Toyota 2008 Rav4 Owners Manual

2015-09-07

: Toyota Toyota-2008-Rav4-Owners-Manual-763138 toyota-2008-rav4-owners-manual-763138 toyota pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 484

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION

1− 1

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Overview of instruments and controls
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering switches overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead console overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument cluster overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2
7
7
8
9

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Instrument panel overview
"View A
1. Side defroster outlets
2. Side vents
3. Instrument cluster
4. Center vents
5. Auxiliary box
6. Power door lock switches
7. Power window switches
8. Glove box
9. Automatic transmission selector lever
10. Rear console box
11. A/V input adapter
12. Power outlet (115 VAC)
13. Power outlet (12 VDC)
14. AUX adapter
15. Power rear view mirror control switches
16. Parking brake lever
17. Cup holders
18. Hood lock release lever
19. Window lock switch

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

"View B (with manual air conditioning system)
1. Instrument panel light control dial
2. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
3. Wiper and washer switches
4. Four−wheel drive lock switch
(four−wheel drive models) or “AUTO
LSD” switch (two−wheel drive models)
5. Audio system
6. Emergency flasher switch
7. Front passenger occupant classification
indicator light
8. Air conditioning controls
9. Clock display
10. Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch
11. Power outlet
12. Windshield wiper de−icer switch
13. Seat heater switch
14. Downhill assist control switch
15. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
16. Engine immobilizer system indicator
light

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

17. Engine switch
18. Tilt and telescopic steering lock release
lever

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

"View B (with automatic air conditioning system)
1. Instrument panel light control dial
2. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
3. Wiper and washer switches
4. Four−wheel drive lock switch
(four−wheel drive models) or “AUTO
LSD” switch (two−wheel drive models)
5. Audio system
6. Emergency flasher switch
7. Front passenger occupant classification
indicator light
8. Air conditioning controls
9. Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch
10. Clock and air conditioning display
11. Power outlet
12. Windshield wiper de−icer switch
13. Seat heater switch
14. Downhill assist control switch
15. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder
light
16. Engine immobilizer system indicator
light

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

17. Engine switch
18. Tilt and telescopic steering lock release
lever
19. Power outlet main switch

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Steering switches overview

Overhead console overview
1. Front personal lights
2. Microphone
3. Auxiliary box
4. Electric moon roof switch

1. Audio remote control switches

Without electric moon roof

2. Telephone switch
3. Speech command switch
4. Cruise control switch

With electric moon roof

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Instrument cluster overview

1. Tachometer

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge

2. Service reminder indicators and
indicator lights

5. Fuel gauge

3. Speedometer

7. Trip meter reset knob

6. Odometer, two trip meters and outside
temperature display

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel
Low fuel level warning light∗1
or

Brake system warning light∗1
or

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1
Open door warning light∗1
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder

light∗1
SRS warning light∗1

Charging system warning light∗1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature
warning light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

Enhanced vehicle stability control
system/traction control system warning light∗1
Tire pressure warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1
“4WD” warning light∗1

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Electric power steering system warning light∗1

Automatic transmission indicator lights
(4−speed)

Low windshield washer fluid level warning
light∗1

Automatic transmission indicator lights
(5−speed)

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1

Four−wheel drive lock indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
lights

Slip indicator light

Headlight indicator light

“AUTO LSD” indicator light

Tail light indicator light

Downhill assist control system indicator light

Headlight high beam indicator light

Cruise control indicator light∗2

Turn signal indicator lights
Front fog light indicator light

∗1:

For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers” on page 129 in Section 1−6.

∗2:

If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 168 in
Section 1−7.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION

1− 2

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Keys and Doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12
15
16
22
24
26
27
28
30

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Keys (without engine
immobilizer system)

Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds
of keys.
1. Master keys—These keys work in every lock.
2. Sub key—This key will not work in the
glove box.
To protect items locked in the glove box
when using valet parking, leave the sub
key with the attendant.
Since the side doors can be locked without a key, you should always carry a
spare key in case you accidentally lock
your keys inside the vehicle.

Keys (with engine immobilizer
system)

KEY NUMBER PLATE
Your key number is shown on the plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as
your wallet, not in the vehicle.
If you should lose your keys or if you
need additional keys, duplicates can be
made by a Toyota dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place.

Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds
of keys.
1. Master keys—These keys work in every lock. Your Toyota dealer will need
one of them to make a new key with
a built−in transponder chip.
2. Sub key—This key will not work in the
glove box.
A transponder chip for engine immobilizer
system has been placed in the head of
the master and sub keys. These chips are
needed to enable the system to function
correctly, so be careful not to lose these
keys. If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the system
or start the engine.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

To protect items locked in the glove box
when using valet parking, leave the sub
key with the attendant.
Since the side doors can be locked without a key, you should always carry a
spare key in case you accidentally lock
your keys inside the vehicle.

NOTICE
When using a key containing a transponder chip, observe the following
precautions:
z When starting the engine, do not
use the key with a key ring resting
on the key grip and do not press
the key ring against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts.

z When starting the engine, do not
use the key with other transponder
keys around (including keys of other vehicles) and do not press other
key plates against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts. If
this happens, remove the key once
and then insert it again after removing other transponder keys (including keys of other vehicles) from the
ring or while gripping or covering
them with your hand to start the
engine.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

z Do not cover the key grip with any
material that cuts off electromagnetic waves.
z Do not knock the key hard against
other objects.
z Do not leave the key exposed to
high temperatures for a long period,
such as on the dashboard and hood
under direct sunlight.
z Do not put the key in water or
wash it in an ultrasonic washer.
z Do not bend the key grip.

z Do not use the key with electromagnetic materials.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Engine immobilizer system
The system is maintenance−free.
For your Toyota dealer to make you a
new key with built−in transponder chip,
your dealer will need your key number
and master key. However, there is a limit
to the number of additional keys your
Toyota dealer can make for you.
If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.

NOTICE
The engine immobilizer system is a
theft prevention system. When you insert the key in the engine switch, the
transponder chip in the key’s head
transmits an electronic code to the vehicle. The engine will start only when
the electronic code in the chip corresponds to the registered ID code for
the vehicle.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle
when you leave the vehicle.

The system is automatically set when the
key is removed from the engine switch.
The indicator light will start flashing to
show the system is set.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer.

Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or
modifications are made, proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

D The indicator light stays on.
D The indicator light does not start flash-

ing when the key is removed from the
engine switch.

D The indicator light flashes inconsistently.

Inserting the registered key in the engine
switch automatically cancels the system,
which enables the engine to start. The
indicator light will go off.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Wireless remote control—
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZRI−20BTY
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with RSS−210 of
industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

1. Indicator light
2. Lock switch
3. Alarm switch
4. Unlock switch
The wireless remote control system is
designed to lock or unlock all the side
doors and back door or activate the
alarm
from
a
distance
within
approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.
When you operate any switch, push it
slowly and securely. At this time, the indicator light flashes once.

The wireless remote control key is an
electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause damage to the key.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D Do not leave the key in places where
the temperature becomes high such as
on the dashboard.

D Do not disassemble it.
D Avoid knocking it hard against other
objects or dropping it.

D Avoid putting it in water.
You can use up to 3 wireless remote control keys for the same vehicle. Contact
your Toyota dealer for detailed information.
If the wireless remote control key does
not actuate the side doors and back door
or alarm, or operate from a normal distance or the indicator on the key is
dimmed or does not come on:

D Check for closeness to a radio trans-

mitter such as a radio station or an
airport which can interfere with normal
operation of the key.

D The battery may have been consumed.
Check the battery in the key. To replace the battery, see “—Replacing battery” on page 20.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:

If you lose your wireless remote control
key, contact your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible to avoid the possibility of
theft, or an accident. (See “If you lose
your keys” on page 379 in Section 4.)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Locking and unlocking
doors
To lock and unlock all the doors, push
the switches of the key slowly and securely. At this time, the indicator light
on the key grip flashes once.

D Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

D Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.

To lock: Push the lock switch. All the side
doors and back door are locked simultaneously. At this time one beep will be
heard, and the turn signal lights flash
once.

D Connect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.

D Consult the dealer or an experienced

Check to see that all the side doors and
back door are securely locked.

radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Locking operation

The beep and flashing turn signal lights
can be disabled. For details, contact your
Toyota dealer.
If any of the side doors or the back door
is not securely closed, locking cannot be
performed by the lock switch and a beep
will sound continuously for 10 seconds.
However, if the key is in the engine
switch, a beep will not sound.

For vehicles sold in Canada
NOTE
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:

To stop the beep, close all the side doors
and back door securely or push the unlock switch.

(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

The beep can be disabled. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.

Unlocking operation

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Activating alarm
To unlock: Push the unlock switch once to
unlock the driver’s door alone. Pushing
the switch twice within 3 seconds unlocks
all the side doors and back door simultaneously. Each time the unlock switch is
pushed, two beeps will be heard, and the
turn signal lights flash twice.

This alarm function can be disabled. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.

This double switch operation to unlock all
the side doors and back door can be
changed to a single switch operation. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.
When you unlock all the doors using the
wireless remote control, the illuminated
entry function will be activated. (For further information, see “Illuminated entry
system” on page 119 in Section 1−5.)
You have 30 seconds to open a door after
using the wireless remote unlock feature.
If a door is not opened by then, all the
side doors and back door will be automatically locked again.
The time before automatic door lock function can be changed. For details, contact
your Toyota dealer.
If the lock or unlock switch is kept
pressed in, the locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the switch
and then push again.

Pushing the alarm switch blows the
horn intermittently and flashes the
headlights, tail lights and turn signal
lights and turns on the interior and personal lights.
The alarm switch is used to deter vehicle
theft when you witness anyone attempting
to break into or damage your vehicle.
The alarm will last for one minute. To stop
alarm midway, push any of the switch on
the key. You can also stop the alarm by
turning the engine switch from the “LOCK”
to the “ON” position.
The alarm function does not work when
the engine switch is in the “ON” position.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Replacing battery
For replacement, use a CR2016 lithium
battery or equivalent.

CAUTION
Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing
the removed battery or components.

NOTICE
z When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the components.
z Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by a
Toyota dealer.

1. Open the cover using a flathead screwdriver wrapped with plastic tape.

2. Remove
frame.

the

module

from

the

key

z Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
Replace the battery by following these
procedures:

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

NOTICE
z Do not bend the terminals.
z Make sure the positive side and
negative side of the battery are
faced correctly.
z Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause unexpected
rust.
z Do not touch or move any components inside the transmitter, or it
may interfere with proper operation.
3. Open and remove the battery case
cover using a coin.

4. Take out the discharged battery and
put in a new battery with the positive
(+) side up.
5. Install the battery case cover and then
install the module into the key frame.
Close the cover.
6. When pushing either switch on the
wireless key, make sure the indicator
light comes on.

z Be careful not to bend the electrode
when inserting the battery and that
dust or oils do not adhere to the
battery case.
z Close the battery case securely.
After replacing the battery, check that the
key operates properly. If the key still does
not operate properly, contact your Toyota
dealer.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Side doors
CAUTION
Do not pull the inside handle of the
doors while driving. The doors will
open and an accident may occur.
Toyota strongly recommends that all
children be placed in the rear seat of
the vehicle.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY
Insert the key into the keyhole and turn
it.

LOCKING
AND
UNLOCKING
INSIDE LOCK KNOB

WITH

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Turn the key forward.
To unlock: Turn the key backward.

To lock: Push the knob forward.
To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

All the side doors and back door lock and
unlock simultaneously with driver’s door.
In the driver’s door lock, turning the key
once will unlock the driver’s door and
twice in succession will unlock all the side
doors and back door simultaneously.

The front doors can be opened by pulling
the inside handle even if the lock knobs
are in the locked position.

Closing the door with the lock knob in the
lock position will also lock the door. Be
careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle.
Doors cannot be locked if you leave the
key in the engine switch.

When the driver’s door is unlocked using
the key, the illuminated entry system will
be activated. (For further information, see
“Illuminated entry system” on page 119 in
Section 1−5.)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

LOCKING
AND
UNLOCKING
POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

WITH

Push the switch.
To lock: Push the switch down on the
right side.
To unlock: Push the switch down on the
left side.
Operating the switch simultaneously locks
or unlocks all the side doors and back
door.

Driver’s side

If you do either of the following, no door
can be unlocked with the power door lock
switch.

D Lock all the doors with the key or wire-

REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS

less remote control when all the doors
are closed.

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”
position as shown on the label.

D Open the driver’s door and move the

When the child−protector is locked, you
cannot open the rear door by the inside
door handle. We recommend using this
feature whenever small children are in the
vehicle.

inside lock knobs to the lock position,
then close the door.

The power door lock switch can be reset
in the following ways.

D Turn the engine switch to the “ON”
position.

D Unlock all the doors with the key or
wireless remote control.

Front passenger’s side

D Unlock the driver’s door with the inside
lock knob, and then unlock all the
doors with the power door lock switch.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Power windows
OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

CAUTION

Use the switch on the driver’s door.
Normal operation: The window moves as
long as you hold the switch.

Before driving, be sure that the doors
are closed and locked, especially
when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of
seat belts, locking the doors helps
prevent the driver and passengers
from being thrown out from the vehicle in an accident. It also helps prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.
To close: Lightly pull up the switch.
Automatic operation: Push the switch
completely down or pull it completely up,
and then release it. The window will fully
open or close. To stop the window partway, lightly move the switch in the opposite direction and then release it.
The windows can be operated with the
switch on each door. The passengers’
windows can also be controlled by the
switches on the driver’s door.
The power windows work when the engine
switch is in the “ON” position.
Key off operation: If the either front door
is closed, they work for 45 seconds even
after the engine switch is turned off. They
stop working when the either front door is
opened.

Jam protection function: During automatic closing operation, the window stops and
opens half way if something gets caught
between the window and window frame.
If the window receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If the power window does not operate
automatically or the jam protection
function does not operate correctly, you
should normalize the power window.

Window
lock
switch

To normalize the power window:
1. Push down the power window switch
and lower the windows fully.
2. Pull up the switch until the windows
close and hold the switch for a second.
Make sure that the window open and
close automatically. If the power windows
cannot be operated properly, have it
checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

D Never try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally, as it could result in a death or serious injury.

D The jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught
just before the window is fully
closed.

OPERATING
WINDOWS

THE

PASSENGERS’

Use the switch on each passenger’s
door or the switches on the driver’s
door that control each passenger’s window.
The window moves as long as you hold
the switch.
To open: Push down the switch.
To close: Pull up the switch.
If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the passengers’ windows
cannot be operated.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Back door
CAUTION
To avoid death or serious personal
injury, you must do the following.

D Before you close the power win-

dows, always make sure there is
nobody around the power windows.
You must also make sure the
heads, hands and other parts of the
bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in a closing window, it
could result in death or serious injury. When anyone closes the power
windows, make sure he or she operates the windows safely.

D When small children are in the ve-

hicle, never let them use the power
window switches without supervision. Use the window lock switch to
prevent them from making unexpected use of the switches.

D Be sure to remove the key when
you leave your vehicle.

D Never leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use
the power window switches and get
trapped in a window. Unattended
person (particularly a small child)
can be involved in a serious accident.

To open the back door, pull the handle.
All the side doors and back door lock and
unlock simultaneously with the driver’s
door.
Operating the power door lock switch or
wireless remote control key simultaneously
locks or unlocks the back door. (See
“—Locking and unlocking doors” on page
18 and “Side doors” on page 22 in this
Section.)
When closing the back door, make sure
it is fully closed.
See “—Stowage precautions” on page 336
in Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Hood
CAUTION

D Keep the back door closed while

driving. This not only keeps the
luggage from being thrown out but
also prevents exhaust gases from
entering the vehicle.

D If the open back door hides the
stop, tail or rear turn signal lights
while you are parked, other road
users must be warned of the presence of your vehicle by a warning
triangle or other device.

To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The
hood will spring up slightly.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the
auxiliary catch lever and lift the
hood.

CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood
is closed and securely locked. Otherwise, the hood may open unexpectedly while driving and an accident may
occur.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Fuel tank cap
CAUTION
After inserting the support rod into
the slot, make sure the rod supports
the hood securely from falling down
on to your head or body.

NOTICE

3. Hold the hood open by inserting the
support rod into the slot.

Be sure to return the
its clip before closing
ing the hood with the
could cause the hood

support rod to
the hood. Clossupport rod up
to bend.

This indicates that the fuel filler door
is on the left side of your vehicle.

To insert the support rod into the slot,
move it straight up. If it is moved to the
side or toward the inside of the vehicle,
it may become detached.
Before closing the hood, check to see that
you have not forgotten any tools, rags,
etc. and return the support rod to its
clip—this prevents rattles. Then lower the
hood and make sure it locks into place.
If necessary, press down gently on the
front edge to lock it.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the
lever up.
When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

D Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-

low open flames when refueling.
The fumes are flammable.

D When opening the cap, do not re-

move the cap quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could cause
injury by spraying out of the filler
neck if the cap is suddenly removed.

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn
the cap counterclockwise. Pause
slightly before removing it.
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh
when the cap is opened.

3. The removed cap can be hanged on
the cap hanger.
When installing the cap, turn it clockwise until one click is heard, in order
to fully close it. The cap returns slightly when your hand is released from the
cap after closure, however this does
not cause any problems.
If the cap is not tightened securely, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Electric moon roof
CAUTION

To operate the moon roof, use the
switch on the overhead console.

D Make sure the cap is tightened se-

The engine switch must be in the “ON”
position.

curely to prevent fuel spillage in
the event of an accident.

The sun shade can be opened or closed
by hand.

D Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank

Automatic sliding operation—

cap for replacement. It is designed
to regulate fuel tank pressure.

To open: Push the switch on the “SLIDE
OPEN” side.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the cap, apply
force only in the turning direction to
the cap. Do not pull or pry it.

Sliding operation

The roof will open and stop partway 50
mm (2.0 in.) from the fully opened position. When you push the “SLIDE OPEN”
side again, the moon roof will open fully.
To stop the roof partway, push the switch
on either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”
side briefly.
As driving with the moon roof opened fully
will cause wind throbs, we recommend
you to drive with the moon roof partway
50 mm (2.0 in.) from the fully opened
position.
The sun shade will be opened together
with the roof.
To close: Push the switch on the “TILT
UP” side.

Tilting operation

The roof will fully close automatically. To
stop the roof partway, push the switch on
either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”
side briefly.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Manual sliding operation—
To open the moon roof slightly, quickly
push and release the switch on the
“SLIDE OPEN” side.
To close the moon roof slightly, quickly
push and release the switch on the “TILT
UP” side.
Automatic tilting operation—
To tilt up: Push the switch on the “TILT
UP” side.
To tilt down: Push the switch on the
“SLIDE OPEN” side.
The roof will fully tilt up or down automatically. To stop the roof partway, push the
switch on either the “SLIDE OPEN” or
“TILT UP” side briefly.
Manual tilting operation—
To tilt up the moon roof slightly, quickly
push and release the switch on the “TILT
UP” side.
To tilt down the moon roof slightly, quickly
push and release the switch on the
“SLIDE OPEN” side.

Key off operation: The moon roof works
for 45 seconds even after the engine
switch is turned off. It stops working when
either front door is opened.
Jam protection function: If something
gets caught between the moon roof and
frame during closing operation, the moon
roof stops and opens half way.
If the moon roof receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.
If the moon roof does not operate automatically or the jam protection function
does not operate correctly, you should
normalize the moon roof.
To normalize the moon roof, push and
hold the moon roof switch on the “TILT
UP” side until the roof fully tilts up. Then
release the switch. Push and hold the
switch on the “TILT UP” side until the
moon roof tilts up, tilts down, slides open
and then closes automatically.
Make sure that the moon roof opens and
closes automatically. If the moon roof cannot be operated properly, have it checked
by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
To avoid death or serious personal
injury, you must do the following:

D While the vehicle is moving, always

keep the heads, hands and other
parts of the bodies of all occupants
away from the roof opening. Failure
to do so may result in death or
serious injury if the vehicle stops
suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.

D Before you close the moon roof,

always make sure there is nobody
around the moon roof. You must
also make sure nobody places his
or her head, hands and other parts
of the body in the roof opening. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in the closing roof, it could
result in death or serious injury.
When anyone closes the moon roof,
first make sure it is safe to do so.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D Be sure to remove the key when
you leave your vehicle.

D Never leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the key still inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use
the moon roof switch and get
trapped in the roof opening. Unattended person (particularly a small
child) can be involved in a serious
accident.

D Never sit on top of the vehicle
around the roof opening.

D Never try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally, as it could result in a death or serious injury.

D The jam protection function may
not work if something gets caught
just before the moon roof is fully
closed.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION

1− 3

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Occupant restraint systems
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flattening front seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34
34
38
41
51
51
52
53
65
85

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Front seats—
—Front seat precautions

Seats
While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should have the seatback
upright, sit well back in the seat and properly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

D Do not drive the vehicle unless the
occupants are properly seated. Do
not allow any passengers to sit on
top of a folded−down seatback, or
in the luggage compartment or cargo area. Persons not properly
seated and/or not properly restrained by seat belts can be killed
or severely injured in the event of
emergency braking or a collision.

D During driving, do not allow any
passengers to stand up or move
around between seats. Otherwise,
death or severe injuries can occur
in the event of emergency braking
or a collision.

Driver seat

D Slightly recline the back of the
CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with
considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if
the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag
is the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) of
inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10
in.) from your driver airbag provides
you with a clear margin of safety.
This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your
breastbone. If you sit less than 250
mm (10 in.) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:

D Move your seat to the rear as far

seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the 250
mm (10 in.) distance, even with the
driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the
seat somewhat. If reclining the back
of your seat makes it hard to see
the road, raise yourself by using a
firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise
the seat if your vehicle has that
feature.

D If your steering wheel is adjustable,
tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of
your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot
pedals, steering wheel, and your view
of the instrument panel controls.

as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Seat adjustment precautions
Front passenger seat

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag also
deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the
airbag as possible with the seatback
adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.

The SRS side airbags are installed in
the driver and front passenger seats.
Observe the following precautions.

D Do not lean against the front door

when the vehicle is in use, since
the side airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise,
you may be killed or seriously injured.

D Do not use seat accessories which
cover the area where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.

D Do not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of the seats with side
airbags. Such change may prevent
the side airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system or
cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

CAUTION

D Do not adjust the seat while the
vehicle is moving as the seat may
unexpectedly move and cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.

D Be careful that the seat does not
hit a passenger or luggage.

D After adjusting the seat position,

try sliding it forward and backward
to make sure it is locked in position.

D After adjusting the seatback, push

your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.

D Do not put objects under the seats.

Otherwise, the objects may interfere
with the seat−lock mechanism or
unexpectedly push up the seat position adjusting lever and the seat
may suddenly move, causing the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.

D While adjusting the seat, do not put

your hands under the seat or near
the moving parts. Otherwise, your
hands or fingers may be caught and
injured.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Adjusting front seats
(manual seat)
1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER
Hold the center of the lever and pull it
up. Then slide the seat to the desired
position with slight body pressure and
release the lever.
2. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING LEVER
Pull up or push down the lever.
3. SEATBACK
LEVER

ANGLE

ADJUSTING

Lean forward and pull the lever up.
Then lean back to the desired angle
and release the lever.

Driver’s seat

Passenger’s seat

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Adjusting front seats (power
seat)
CAUTION
Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and
the front passenger are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats. If
you are reclined, the lap belt may
slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen
or your neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death
or serious injury.

1. SEAT POSITION, SEAT
ANGLE
AND
SEAT
ADJUSTING SWITCH

CUSHION
HEIGHT

Move the control switch in the desired
direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat at
that position.
Do not place anything under the front
seats, as this might interfere with the seat
movement.
2. SEATBACK
SWITCH

ANGLE

ADJUSTING

Move the control switch in the desired
direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback at that position.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Flattening front seatbacks
(manual seat)
CAUTION
Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and
the front passenger are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats. If
you are reclined, the lap belt may
slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen
or your neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death
or serious injury.
3. SEAT
LUMBAR
ADJUSTING SWITCH

SUPPORT

1. Hold the center of the lever and pull
it up. Then slide the rear/second
seats fully backward and pull it forward slightly until it locks.

2. Remove the front head restraint.
Hold the center of the lever and pull
it up. Then slide the front seat further forward than the front−most
lock position.

Push the control switch on either side.
The amount of lumbar support will change
while the switch is pushed.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Flattening front seatbacks
(power seat)
CAUTION

D Do not allow passengers to ride on
the flattened seat while driving; use
the seat in the normal position.

D After returning the seat to its original position,
and seatback
to make sure
Be certain to

3. Pull the seatback angle adjusting lever up to unlock and push down the
seatback.
When returning the seatback to the upright position, be careful not to make
yourself hit by the seatback which will
bound with considerable spring force.

try pushing
forward and
it is secured
replace head

the seat
rearward
in place.
restraint.

1. Hold the center of the lever and pull
it up. Then slide the rear/second
seats fully backward and pull it forward slightly until it locks.

After returning the seat to its original
position, be certain to replace the head
restraint.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CAUTION

D Do not allow passengers to ride on
the flattened seat while driving; use
the seat in the normal position.

D After putting back the seat, try
pushing the seat and seatback forward and rearward to make sure it
is secured in place. Be certain to
replace the head restraint.

2. Remove the front head restraint.
Push the seat position adjusting
switch forward to slide the seat to
the front−most position.

3. Move the seatback angle adjusting
switch backward to flatten the seatback.
After returning the seat to its original
position, be certain to replace the head
restraint.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Rear seats—
—Rear seat precautions
CAUTION

D Do not adjust the seat while the
vehicle is moving.

D Be careful that the seat does not
hit a passenger or luggage.

D Adjust both seat cushions to the

same position and align all seatbacks at the same angle when a
person sits in the rear center position. Otherwise, the person cannot
wear the seat belt properly and this
may cause death or serious injuries
in a collision.

D After adjusting the seat position,

try sliding it forward and backward
to make sure it is locked in position.

D After adjusting the seatback, push

—Adjusting rear/second seats
D When returning seats to their origi-

nal position, observe the following
precautions in order to prevent
death or serious injury in a collision or sudden stop:
Make sure the seat is securely
locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operating properly.
Make sure the seat belts are not
twisted or caught under the seat
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.

Folding down the seats will enlarge the
luggage compartment. See “—Stowage
precautions” on page 336 in Section 2 for
precautions when loading luggage.

back your body to make sure the
seat is locked in position.

Without third seat

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVERS
Hold the center of the lever and pull it
up. Then slide the seat to the desired
position with slight body pressure and
release the lever.
When a person sits in the rear center
position, adjust both seat cushions to
the same position.
2. SEATBACK
LEVERS

ANGLE

ADJUSTING

Pull down the lever. Then lean back to
the desired angle and release the lever.
When a person sits in the rear center
position, align all seatbacks at the
same angle.

CAUTION

D Adjustments should not be made
while the vehicle is moving.

D Adjust both seat cushions to the

D Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts
provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the
passengers are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats. If you
are reclined, the lap belt may slide
past your hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen or
your neck may contact the shoulder
belt. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined,
the greater the risk of death or serious injury.

With third seat

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Moving second seat for
third seat entry

—Fold−down rear/second
seats

For easy access to the third seat from
right side, do this.

BEFORE
FOLDING
REAR/SECOND SEATS

Pull down the lever and fold the seatback. The seat will slide forward.

1. If the center seat belt is connected,
release it to prevent damage.

After passengers are in, lift up the seatback and return the seat to the original
position.

Insert the key into the hole on the
buckle to release the tab, and allow the
belt to retract.

D After adjusting the seatback, push

back your body to make sure it is
locked in position.

D After adjusting the seat position,

try sliding it forward and backward
to make sure it is locked in position.

DOWN

CAUTION
After putting back the seat, try pushing the seat forward and rearward to
make sure it is secured in place.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2. Insert the tabs of the center seat
belt into the cover. Make sure the
tabs are securely locked in the cover.

NOTICE
The seat belt tabs must be stowed
before you fold the seatback.

3. Make sure the outer seat belt passes
through the hanger when folding the
rear/second seat.
This prevents the shoulder belt from being
damaged.

CAUTION
The seat belt must be removed from
the hanger when the seat belt is in
use.

4. Stow the rear/second seat belt
buckles as shown in the illustration.
This prevents the buckles from falling out
when you fold down the rear/second seat.

CAUTION
Before using the seat belt, pull out
the buckle and make sure the belt is
not twisted.

NOTICE
The seat belt buckles must be stowed
before you fold the seatback.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

FOLDING DOWN REAR/SECOND SEATS
1. Hold the center of the lever and pull
it up. Then slide the rear seat fully
backward and pull it forward slightly
until it locks.

2. Lower the head restraint to the lowest position.

3. Raise the armrest until it locks.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Without third seats—
The rear seat can be folded down for
the luggage compartment. Open the
back door and pull the lock release lever to fold down the rear seat.
Before folding down the rear seat, slide
the rear seat fully backward and pull it
forward slightly until it locks. Then raise
the armrest until it locks.

4. Pull down the seatback angle adjusting lever and fold down the seatback.

Left side

Folding down the seats will enlarge the
luggage compartment. See “—Stowage
precautions” on page 336 in Section 2 for
precautions when loading luggage.

Right side

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Stowing third seats for
luggage space
CAUTION
Do not fold the rear seatback when
the rear passengers sit on the rear
seats or the luggage is placed on the
seat. Make sure that no passengers
or luggage are on the rear seats.

RETURNING SEATBACKS
Raise the seatback until it locks.

CAUTION
Do not allow passengers to ride on
the folded seat or in the luggage
compartment while driving; use the
seat in its normal position.
When returning the seatback to the
upright position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent
serious injury in a collision or sudden stop:

D Make sure the seatback is securely

locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operating properly.

D Make sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught in the seatback
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.

BEFORE FOLDING DOWN THIRD SEATS
1. Stow the third seat belt buckles as
shown in the illustration.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the seat belt
buckles, they must be stowed before
you fold down the seatback.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2. Pass the third seat belts through the
hangers.
This prevents the shoulder belt from being
damaged.

STOWING THIRD SEATS
1. Lower the head restraint to the lowest position.

2. Pull the seatback lock release strap
to fold down the seatback. Make
sure it is locked securely.

CAUTION
The seat belt must be removed from
the hanger when the seat belt is in
use.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

4. Push the seat on the front side
against the floor and push the seat
on rear side against the floor. Make
sure it is locked securely.

3. Pull and hold the seat lock release
strap and lift up the seat rearward.
Then push the seat down.
If the seat does not lift up when the seat
lock release strap is pulled, lift the seatback by pulling the seatback lock release
strap, and push the seatback down again.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CAUTION
When stowing or returning the seat,
observe the following precautions in
order to prevent death or serious injury:

D Make sure the seat is free of people

or luggage. Then, hold the seat and
slowly move it. Otherwise, people
may be injured or luggage may be
damaged if the seat hits them.

D Be careful not to get your hands or
RETURNING THIRD SEATS
1. Pull and hold the seat lock release
strap, then lift up the seat forward.
Push the seat down. Push the seat
on the rear side against the floor
and push the seat on the front side.
Make sure it is locked securely.

2. Pull the seatback lock release strap
and raise the seatback.

feet pinched in the seat.

D Do not stow and return the seats
when you are inside the vehicle in
order to prevent pinching your
hands or feet in the seat. Be sure
to stow and return the seats from
outside the vehicle.

If the seat does not lift up when the seat
lock release strap is pulled, lock the seatback again.
To lock the seatback, lift the seatback by
pulling the seatback lock release strap
and push the seatback down.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Armrest

Head restraints

When returning seats to their original
position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent death or
serious injury in a collision or sudden stop:

D Make sure the seat is securely

locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback or
by trying to pull up the edge of the
bottom cushion. Failure to do so
will prevent the seat belt from operating properly.

D Make sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught in the seatback
and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.

To use the armrest, lower the center
head restraint. Pull the strap and pull
the armrest down.

Front seats

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest,
avoid putting heavy loads on it.

Rear/second seats

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Seat heaters
CAUTION

D Adjust the center of the head re-

straint so that it is closest to the
top of your ears.

D After adjusting the head restraint,
make sure it is locked in position.

D Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Third seats

For your safety and comfort, adjust the
head restraint before driving.
To raise: Pull it up.
To lower: Push it down while pressing the
lock release button.
The rear/second seats and third seats
head restraints—When an occupant sits
on the rear seats, always pull up the head
restraint to the lock position.

To turn on the seat heater, push the
switches (“L” switch for driver’s seat
and “R” switch for passenger’s seat).
At this time, the indicator light will illuminate to indicate the seat heater is
operating.
To turn off the seat heater, push the
switch once again.
The engine switch must be in the “ON”
position to operate seat heaters.

The head restraint is most effective when
it is close to your head. Therefore, using
a cushion on the seatback is not recommended.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Seat belts—
—Seat belt precautions
CAUTION
Occupants must use caution when operating the seat heater because it
may make them feel too hot or cause
burns at low temperatures (erythema,
varicella). Use extra caution for;

D Babies, small children, elderly per-

sons, sick persons or persons with
physical disabilities

D Persons who have sensitive skin
D Persons who are exhausted
D Persons who have taken alcohol or

drugs which induce sleep (sleeping
drug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat overheating, do
not use the seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating objects which cover the seat.

NOTICE
z Do not put unevenly weighed objects on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)
into the seat.
z When cleaning the seats, do not
use organic substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.). They may damage the heater
and seat surface.
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, turn the switch off
when the engine is not running.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver and
passengers in the vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts
provided. Failure to do so could increase
the chance of injury and/or the severity of
injury in accidents.
The seat belts provided for your vehicle
are designed for people of adult size,
large enough to properly wear them.
Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”
on page 85 in this Section for details.
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in the
front seat.
If a child must sit in the front seat, the
seat belts should be worn properly. If an
accident occurs and seat belts are not
worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause death or
serious injury to the child.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Do not allow any children to stand up or
kneel on either rear or front seats. An
unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or death during emergency braking or
a collision. Also, do not let the child sit
on your lap. Holding a child in your arms
does not provide sufficient restraint.
Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for
specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips and not on the
waist.
Injured person. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.

CAUTION
Persons should ride in their seats
properly wearing their seat belts
whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely
to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking or
a collision.
When using the seat belts, observe
the following:

D Use the belt for only one person at

a time. Do not use a single belt for
two or more people—even children.

D Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts
provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the
driver and the front passenger are
sitting up straight and well back in
the seats. If you are reclined, the
lap belt may slide past your hips
and apply restraint forces directly
to the abdomen or your neck may
contact the shoulder belt. In the
event of a frontal collision, the
more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death or serious injury.

D Be careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. Take care that
they do not get caught or pinched
in the seat or side doors.

D Inspect the belt system periodically.

Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Damaged parts should be replaced. Do not disassemble or
modify the system.

D Keep the belts clean and dry. If

they need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Never
use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners, or allow them to come into
contact with the belts—they may
severely weaken the belts. (See
“Cleaning the interior” on page 386
in Section 5.)

D Replace the belt assembly (includ-

ing bolts) if it has been used in a
severe impact. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage
is not obvious.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Fastening front and rear
seat belts
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and is then retracted
even slightly, the belt is locked in that
position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint
system securely. (For details, see “Child
restraint” on page 85 in this Section.) To
free the belt again, fully retract the belt
and then pull the belt out once more.

Tab

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the
retractor, firmly pull the belt and release
it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit
straight and well back in the seat.
fasten your belt, pull it out of the
tractor and insert the tab into
buckle.

up
To
rethe

You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt length automatically adjusts
to your size and the seat position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a
sudden stop or on impact. It also may
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A
slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend, and you can move around freely.

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the belt is not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

Take up
slack
Too high

Keep as low on
hips as possible

Adjust the position
shoulder belts.

the

Position the lap belt as low as
on your hips—not on your waist,
just it to a snug fit by pulling the
portion upward through the latch

lap and
possible
then adshoulder
plate.

the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed, because
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from death or serious
injury.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CAUTION

D Both high−positioned lap belts and

Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of
your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Failure to
do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injuries in a collision.

loose−fitting belts could cause
death or serious injuries due to
sliding under the lap belt during a
collision or other unintended event.
Keep the lap belt positioned as low
on hips as possible.

D Do not place the shoulder belt under your arm.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder
anchor—
Adjust the shoulder anchor position to
your size.
To raise: Slide the anchor up.
To lower: Push in the lock release button
and slide the anchor down.
After adjustment, make sure the anchor is
locked in position.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

To release the belt, press the buckle
release button and allow the belt to
retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull
it out and check for kinks or twists. Then
make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

REAR/SECOND CENTER SEAT BELT
The rear/second center seat belt is a
3−point type restraint with 2 buckles. Both
seat belt buckles must be correctly located and securely latched for proper operation.
Make sure that buckle 1 is securely
latched for ready use of the center seat
belt.

Two buckles and tabs for rear/second
center seat belt
The two tabs have different shape for its
end so that the belt is not buckled in the
wrong place.
Buckle 1—Properly matches with hook
end tab
Buckle 2—Properly matches with round
end tab

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CAUTION
Make sure the both buckles are correctly located and securely latched.
Failure to properly match the buckle
and tab may cause death or severe
injury in case of an accident or a
collision.

To release the hook end tab, insert the
key into the hole on the buckle and allow
the belt to retract.

CAUTION
Do not use the rear/second center
seat belt with either buckle released.
Fastening only the shoulder belt or
lap belt may cause death or severe
personal injury in case of sudden
braking or a collision.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Stowing the rear seat belt
buckles

—Stowing the rear/second
center seat belt
The rear seat belt buckles
stowed when not in use.

can

The seat belt buckles must be stowed
before you fold the seatback.

CAUTION
Before using the seat belt, pull out
the buckle and make sure the belt is
not twisted.

Rear/second seat belt buckles

STOWING THE REAR/SECOND CENTER
SEAT BELT
Insert the tabs of the center seat belt
into the cover as shown above. Make
sure the tabs are securely locked in the
cover.
The seat belt must be stowed before you
fold the seatback.

NOTICE
Stow the rear/second center seat belt
when not in use.

Third seat belt buckles

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough,
a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of
charge.

D Make sure the “AIR BAG ON”

Please contact your local Toyota dealer to
order the proper required length for the
extender. Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and
selection of length. Additional ordering information is available at your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
When using the seat belt extender,
observe the following precautions.
Failure to follow these instructions
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt restraint system in case of
an accident, increasing the chance of
death or serious injury.

D Remember that the extender pro-

vided for you may not be safe when
used on a different vehicle, for
another person, or at a different
seating position than the one originally intended.

D If the seat belt extender has been

connected to the driver’s seat belt
buckle without wearing the seat belt
when using the extender in the
driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver wears the seat belt even if not
wearing it. In this case, the driver’s
airbag may not activate correctly,
causing death or serious injury in
the event of collision. Be sure to
wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.

indicator light is illuminated when
using the seat belt extender for the
front passenger seat. If the “AIR
BAG
OFF”
indicator
light
is
illuminated, disconnect the extender
tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt.
Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIR BAG
ON” indicator light is illuminated. If
you use the seat belt extender
while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light
is illuminated,
the front
passenger airbag and side airbag
on the front passenger side may
not activate correctly, causing death
or serious injury in the event of
collision.

D Be sure to wear the seat belt with-

out the seat belt extender if you
can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

As far as the seat belt extender on the
front passenger side is concerned, do not
fail to disconnect the extender from the
seat belt after the above operation in order to activate the front passenger airbag
correctly when getting into the vehicle
next time.

D Do not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint
system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt,
the seat belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, which
could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in
the event of collision.

When not in use, remove the extender
and store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure
To connect the extender to the seat
belt, insert the tab into the seat belt
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on
the buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt are both facing
outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt and the seat belt extender are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function
normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed, because
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from death or serious
injury.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Seat belt pretensioners
Vehicles with curtain shield airbags—When
the sensor detects a severe frontal impact
or a vehicle roll over, the front seat belts
are quickly drawn back by the retractors
so that the belts snugly restrain the occupants.

Vehicles without curtain shield airbags—The driver and front passenger
seat belt pretensioners are designed to
be activated in response to a severe
frontal impact.
Vehicles with curtain shield airbags—
The driver and front passenger seat
belt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in response to a severe frontal impact or a vehicle roll over.
Vehicles without curtain shield airbags—
When the sensor detects a severe frontal
impact, the front seat belts are quickly
drawn back by the retractors so that the
belts snugly restrain the occupants.

The front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner will not activate if no passenger is
detected in the front passenger seat by
the front passenger occupant classification
system. However, the front passenger’s
seat belt pretensioner may activate if luggage is put on the seat, or the seat belt
is buckled up regardless of the presence
of an occupant in the seat. (As for the
front passenger occupant classification
system, see “—Front passenger occupant
classification system” on page 81 in this
Section.)
The seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags may not operate together in all collisions.

The seat belt pretensioner system consists mainly of the following components
and their locations are shown in the illustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. SRS warning light
3. “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
4. Front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors)
5. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies
6. Front passenger’s
switch

seat

belt

buckle

7. Airbag sensor assembly

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

The seat belt pretensioners are controlled
by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag
sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.
When the seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise may be heard
and a small amount of non−toxic gas may
be released. This does not indicate that
a fire is occurring. This gas is normally
harmless.
Once the seat belt pretensioners have
been activated, the seat belt retractors
remain locked.
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the
first collision, but will not activate for the
second or subsequent collisions.

CAUTION

NOTICE

Observe the following precautions to
reduce the risk of injury in the event
of sudden braking or an accident.
Failure to do so may cause death or
severe injury.

Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
seat belt pretensioners in some
cases.

D If the pretensioner has activated,

the seat belt becomes locked: it
cannot be further extended, nor will
it return to the stowed position.
The seat belt cannot be used again
and must be replaced at your
Toyota dealer.

D Do not modify, remove, strike or
open the seat belt
semblies, airbag
rounding area or
your Toyota dealer
and modification.

pretensioner assensor or surwiring. Consult
about any repair

z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Repairs on or near the front seat
belt retractor assemblies
z Modification of the suspension system
z Modification of the front end structure
z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure or console

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front
passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat
belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
(For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on page 129 in
Section 1−6.)
This indicator comes on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds.
This means the seat belt pretensioners
are operating properly.

If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer

following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible.

D The light does not come on when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position or remains on for more than
6 seconds.

D The light comes on while driving.
D If any seat belt does not retract or

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the seat belt pretensioners to operate.

D Either seat belt pretensioner assembly

or surrounding area is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the relevant seat
belt pretensioner.

D The seat belt pretensioner assembly or
surrounding area has been damaged.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SRS airbags—
—SRS driver airbag and front
passenger airbag
In response to a severe frontal impact,
the SRS front airbags work with the seat
belts to help reduce injury by inflating.
The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries
mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s
head or chest caused by hitting the vehicle interior.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver
and front passenger in addition to the
primary safety protection provided by
the seat belts.
Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS” designed based on US motor
vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The
airbag system controls airbag deployment
power for the driver and front passenger.
The driver airbag system consists of the
driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front
passenger’s airbag system consists of the
front passenger occupant classification
sensor etc.

The SRS front passenger airbag will not
activate if there is no passenger sitting in
the front passenger seat. However, the
front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt
is buckled up, regardless of the presence
of an occupant in the seat. (As for the
front passenger occupant classification
system, see “—Front passenger occupant
classification system” on page 81 in this
Section.)
Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

D The SRS front airbag system is de-

signed only as a supplement to the
primary protection of the driver and
front passenger seat belt systems.
The driver and front passenger can
be killed or seriously injured by the
inflating airbags if they do not wear
the available seat belts properly.
During sudden braking just before
a collision, an unrestrained driver
or front passenger can move forward into direct contact with or
close proximity to the airbag which
may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection
in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must
wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of
death or serious injury or being
thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see “Seat
belts” on page 53 in this Section.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D Improperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who
is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a
child
restraint
system.
Toyota
strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the
rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seat is the
safest for infants and children. For
instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see
“Child restraint” on page 85 in this
Section.

The SRS front airbags are designed to
deploy in severe (usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and duration
of the forward deceleration of the vehicle exceeds the designed threshold
level.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the
severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision
when the vehicle has the impact straight
into a fixed barrier that does not move or
deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be
considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or
sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an
underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,
or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions
where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate
together.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side
Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are not generally
designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a
collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may
occur.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

8. Driver’s seat position sensor
9. Airbag sensor assembly
Hitting a curb,
edge of pavement
or hard surface

10. Airbag module for driver
(airbag and inflator)

Falling into or
jumping over a
deep hole

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deploy
if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.

The SRS front airbag system consists
mainly of the following components, and
their locations are shown in the illustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. SRS warning light
3. “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
4. Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
5. Front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors)
6. Front passenger’s
switch

seat

belt

7. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

buckle

The front airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.
If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level,
the system triggers the airbag inflators. At
this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with
non−toxic gas to help restrain the forward
motion of the occupants. The front airbags
then quickly deflate, so that there is no
obstruction of the driver’s vision should it
be necessary to continue driving.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a
loud noise and release some smoke and
residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it
may also cause other, less severe injuries
to the face, chest, arms and hands. These
are usually in the nature of minor burns
or abrasions and swelling, but the force of
a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant’s
hands, arms, chest or head is in close
proximity to the airbag module at the time
of deployment. This is why it is important
for the occupant to: avoid placing any
object or part of the body between the
occupant and the airbag module; sit
straight and well back into the seat; wear
the available seat belt properly; and sit as
far as possible from the airbag module,
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel
hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot
for several minutes after deployment, so
do not touch! The airbags inflate only
once. The windshield may be damaged by
absorbing some of the force of the inflating airbag.

CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is
too close to the steering wheel or
dashboard during airbag deployment
can be killed or seriously injured.
Toyota strongly recommends that:

D The driver sit as far back as pos-

sible from the steering wheel while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.

D The front passenger sit as far back
as possible from the dashboard.

D All vehicle occupants be properly
restrained using the available seat
belts.

For instructions and precautions concerning the seating position, see
“—Front seat precautions” on page
34 in this Section.

D Do not sit on the edge of the seat

or lean against the dashboard when
the vehicle is in use, since the
front passenger airbag could inflate
with considerable speed and force.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, an airbag when it inflates,
can be killed or seriously injured.
Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, and always use your seat belt
properly.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D Do not modify or remove any wir-

ing. Do not modify, remove, strike
or open any components such as
the steering wheel pad, steering
wheel, column cover, dashboard
near the front passenger airbag,
front passenger airbag or airbag
sensor assembly. Doing so may prevent the front airbag system from
activating correctly, cause sudden
activation of the system or disable
the system, which could result in
death or serious injury.

D Toyota strongly recommends that all

infants and children be placed in
the rear seat of the vehicle and be
properly restrained.

D Do not hold a child on your lap or

in your arms. Use a child restraint
system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of
a child restraint system, see “Child
restraint” on page 85 in this Section.

D Do not put anything or any part of

your body on or in front of the
dashboard or steering wheel pad
that houses the front airbag system. They might restrict inflation or
cause death or serious injury as
they are projected rearward by the
force of the deploying airbags. Likewise, the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their
arms or on their knees.

Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repair and modification.
If you wish to modify your vehicle for
a person with physical disability, consult your Toyota dealer. It may dangerously interfere with the SRS front
airbags operation.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS front airbag system in some
cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Modification of the suspension system
z Modification of the front end structure
z Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
z Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering
wheel or dashboard near the front
passenger airbag

This indicator comes
gine switch is turned
tion. It goes off after
This means the SRS
operating properly.

on when the ento the “ON” posiabout 6 seconds.
front airbags are

If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer

following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible.

D The light does not come on when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position or remains on for more than
6 seconds.

D The light comes on while driving.
The SRS warning light and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light will come on if there
is a malfunction in the front passenger
occupant classification system.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—SRS side airbags and
curtain shield airbags
In response to a severe side impact, the
SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbags
in the impacted side work with the seat
belts to help reduce injury by inflating.
The SRS side airbags help reduce injuries
mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s
chest. The SRS curtain shield airbags
help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s,
front passenger’s or rear/second passenger’s head and help prevent them from
being thrown out of the vehicle.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

D The SRS front airbags have been inflated.

D The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS front airbags to inflate.

D The pad section of the steering wheel
or dashboard (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to provide further
protection for the driver, front passenger and rear/second passengers in addition to the primary safety protection
provided by the seat belts.

The SRS side airbag on the passenger
seat will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat.
However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in
the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up
regardless of the presence of the occupant in the seat. (As for the front passenger occupant classification system, see
“—Front passenger occupant classification
system” on page 81 in this Section.)
The SRS curtain shield airbag on the passenger side are activated even with no
passenger in the front seat or rear/second
outside seat.

NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Roll sensing function:
In response to a vehicle rollover, the curtain shield airbags on both sides work
with the seat belts to help reduce injury
by inflating. The curtain shield airbags
help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s,
front passenger’s or rear/second passenger’s head and help prevent them from
being thrown out of the vehicle.
The SRS curtain shield airbags may activate even when the side airbags are not
activated.
Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

D The SRS side airbag and curtain

shield airbag system is designed
only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver, front
passenger and rear/second outside
passenger seat belt systems. To ensure maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their
seat belts properly. Wearing a seat
belt properly during an accident reduces the chances of death or serious injury or being thrown out of
the vehicle. For instructions and
precautions concerning the seat
belt system, see “Seat belts” on
page 53 in this Section.

D Do not allow anyone to lean his/her

head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the
seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof
side rails from which the SRS side
airbag and curtain shield airbag
deploy even if he/she is a child
seated in the child restraint system.
It is dangerous if the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact of the deploying airbag could cause death or serious injury to the occupant.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D Improperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who
is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a
child
restraint
system.
Toyota
strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the
rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page
85 in this Section.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front
Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system may not activate if the
vehicle is subjected to a collision from
the side at certain angles, or a collision
to the side of the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment as
shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags are not generally
designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a front or rear collision, if it
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−
speed side collision.

The SRS side airbags are designed to
inflate when the passenger compartment
area suffers a severe impact from the
side.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Collision from
the front

The angle of
vehicle tip−up
is marginal

The curtain shield airbags may not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a
collision from the side at certain
angles, or a collision to the side of the
vehicle body other than the passenger
compartment as shown in the illustration.

Skidding vehicle
hitting a curb
stone

The curtain shield airbags may inflate
if the angle of vehicle tip−up is marginal or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit
a curb stone laterally as shown in the
illustration.

Collision from
the rear

Pitch end over end

The curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to inflate if the vehicle
is involved in a front or rear collision,
if it pitches end over end, or if it is
involved in a low−speed side collision.

The curtain shield airbags are designed to
inflate when the passenger compartment
area suffers a severe impact from the
side or vehicle rollover.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

8. Airbag sensor assembly
9. Front passenger’s
switch
Hitting a curb,
edge of pavement
or hard surface

belt

buckle

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system is controlled by the airbag
sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and
airbag sensor.

Falling into or
jumping over a
deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags
may deploy if a serious impact occurs
to the underside of your vehicle. Some
examples are shown in the illustration.

seat

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system consists mainly of the following components, and their locations are
shown in the illustration.
1. SRS warning light
2. “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights
3. Curtain shield airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)

In a severe side impact, the side and
curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the
curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the
side airbag inflators and/or the curtain
shield airbag inflators. At this time a
chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help
restrain the lateral motion of the occupants.
In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensor
assembly triggers the curtain shield airbag
inflator. At this time, a chemical reaction
in the inflators quickly fills the airbags
with non−toxic gas to help restrain the
lateral motion of the occupants.

4. Front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors)
5. Side airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)
6. Curtain shield airbag sensors
7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

When the airbags inflate, they produce a
fairly loud noise and release some smoke
and residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.

SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags
inflate with considerable
force. To reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury when they inflate, the driver, front passenger and
rear/second outside passengers must:

Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor burns or
abrasions and swelling.

Improper sitting and wearing of the
seat belts may not retain you inside
the vehicle.

Front seats as well as parts of the front
and rear pillars, front, center and rear
garnish and roof interior may be hot for
several minutes, but the airbags themselves will not be hot. The airbags are
designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION

D Wear their seat belts properly.
D Remain properly seated with their

backs upright and against the seats
at all times.

D Do not allow anyone to lean against

the door when the vehicle is in use,
since the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should
be taken especially when you have
a small child in the vehicle.

D Sit up straight and well back in the

seat, distributing your weight evenly
in the seat. Do not apply excessive
weight to the outer side of the
seats with a side airbag, and to the
front pillar, rear pillar and roof side
rail with a curtain shield airbag.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D Do not allow anyone to get his/her

head closer to the area where the
side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, since these airbags
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

D Do not allow anyone to kneel on

the passenger seat, facing the passenger’s side door, since the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

D Do not allow anyone to get his/her

head or hands out of windows
since the curtain shield airbags
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D Do not hook a hanger, heavy or

sharp pointed objects on the coat
hook. If the curtain shield airbag
inflates, those items will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury. When you hang clothes,
hang them on the coat hook directly.

D Do not use seat accessories which
D Do not attach a cup holder or any
other device or object on or around
the door. When the side airbag inflates, the cup holder or any other
device or object will be thrown with
great force or the side airbag may
not activate correctly, resulting in
death or serious injury. Likewise,
the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their
arms or on their knees.

D Do not attach a microphone or any

other device or object near the area
where the curtain shield airbag activates such as on the windshield
glass, side door glass, front, center
and roof side garnish. When the
curtain shield airbag inflates, the
microphone or other device or object will be thrown away with great
force or the curtain shield airbag
may not activate correctly, resulting
in death or serious injury.

cover the parts where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.

D Do not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of the seats with side
airbags. Such changes may prevent
the side airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system or
cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D Do not disassemble or repair the
front, center and roof side garnish
containing the curtain shield airbags. Such changes may disable
the system or cause the curtain
shield airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

D Do not modify or change the sus-

pension system. Such changes may
cause the curtain shield airbags to
inflate accidentally, which could result in death or serious injury.

D Do not use tires or wheels other

than the manufacturer’s recommended size. Such a use may cause
the curtain shield airbags to inflate
accidentally, which could result in
death or serious injury. For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires”
on page 410 in Section 7−2.

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system in some cases.
z Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
z Modification of the suspension system
z Modification of the side structure of
the passenger compartment
z Repairs made on or near the console or front seat

D Do not place luggage heavier than

specified on the roof luggage carrier. Such luggage may cause the
curtain shield airbags to inflate accidentally, which could result in
death or serious injury. For details,
see “Roof luggage carrier” on page
303 in Section 1−10.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If either of the following conditions occurs,
this indicates a malfunction of the airbags
or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

D The light does not come on when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position or remains on for more than
6 seconds.

D The light comes on while driving.
The SRS warning light and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light will come on if there
is a malfunction in the front passenger
occupant classification system.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Front passenger occupant
classification system
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

D Any of the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags have been inflated.

D The portion of the doors (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.

D The surface of the seats with the side
airbag (shaded in the illustration) is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

D The portion of the front, center and
roof side garnish containing the curtain
shield airbags inside (shaded in the
illustration) is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.

NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

Your vehicle is equipped with a front
passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions
1—4 in the table on page 83 and based
on these conditions activates or deactivates the following systems;

D Front passenger airbag
D Side airbag on the front passenger
seat

D Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner

The system monitors the weight and
load on the front passenger seat, and
the seat belt buckle switch to determine
conditions 1—4.
In order for the system to detect the
conditions correctly, do not do any of
the following:

D Apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback pocket).

D Attach a commercial seatback table,

The “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights indicate the actuation of
the front passenger airbag, side airbag
on the front passenger seat and front
passenger’s seat belt pretensioner.
The “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light will be
illuminated when the engine switch is in
the “ON” position with the condition 2 in
the table shown below.

etc. to the front passenger seatback.

D Put weight on the front passenger seat

by putting your hands or feet on the
seatback from the rear passenger seat.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If the front passenger occupant classification system determines that a person of
adult size sits in the front passenger seat
but the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, one of the following is likely
to have occurred:

D A rear passenger lifts the front passenger seat cushion with their legs.

The “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator lights will be illuminated initially when the engine switch is turned
to the “ON” position. After about four
seconds, they will go off. After that, the
front passenger occupant classification
system operates and judges which indicator light be illuminated.

D Objects are placed under the front passenger seat.

D The front passenger seatback is in
contact with the rear/second seat.

To ensure the system correctly detects an
adult sitting in the front passenger seat,
make sure the above do not occur.
Make sure that the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated when an adult is
seated in the front passenger seat. If the
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight,
well back in the seat, and with the seat
belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the
rear seat, or if that is not possible, move
the front passenger seat fully rearward.

The SRS warning light and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light will come on if
there is a malfunction in the front passenger occupant classification system.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
Indicator/warning light
Condition detected by
the front passenger
occupant classification
system

Devices

“AIR BAG
ON” and “AIR
BAG OFF”
indicator
lights

SRS warning
light

Front
passenger’s
seat belt
reminder light

1. Adult∗1

“AIR BAG
ON”

Off

Flashing∗4

2. Child∗2 or child
restraint system∗3

“AIR BAG
OFF”∗5

Off

Flashing∗4

Deactivated

3. Unoccupied

Not
illuminated

Off

Deactivated

4. There is a
malfunction in the
system

“AIR BAG
OFF”

Off

Deactivated

Front
passenger
airbag

Side airbag
on the front
passenger
seat

Curtain shield
airbag in the
front
passenger
side

Front
passenger’s
seat belt
pretensioner

Activated
Activated
Activated

Deactivated
Activated

∗1 :

The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may
recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
∗2 : When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
∗3 : Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 85 in this Section as for installing the
child restraint system.)
∗4 : In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
∗5 : In case the indicator is not illuminated, see “Child restraint” on page 85 as for installing the child restraint system properly.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CAUTION
To avoid potential death or serious
injury when the front passenger occupant classification system does not
detect the conditions correctly, observe the following.

D Make sure the “AIR BAG ON” indi-

cator light is illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the
front passenger seat. If the “AIR
BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect
the extender
tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after
making sure the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the
“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, the front passenger airbag and side airbag on the front
passenger side may not activate
correctly, which could cause death
or serious injury in the event of
collision.

D Do not recline the front passenger

seatback so far that it touches a
rear/second seat. This may cause
the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator to be
illuminated, which indicates that the
passenger’s airbags will not deploy
in the event of a severe accident.
If the seatback touches the rear/
second seat, return the seatback to
a position where it does not
touches the rear/second seat.
Keep the front passenger seatback
as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

D If an adult sits in the front passen-

ger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indicator light should be illuminated. If
the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit
up straight, well back in the seat,
feet on the floor, and with the seat
belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to
move to the rear/second seat, or if
that is not possible, move the front
passenger seat fully rearward.

D Wear the seat belt properly.
D Make sure the front passenger’s
seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger
seat.

D Do not apply a heavy load to the
front passenger seat or equipment
(e.g. seatback pocket).

D Do not put weight on the front pas-

senger seat by putting your hands
or feet on the front passenger seat
seatback from the rear/second passenger seat.

D Do not let a rear/second passenger

lift the front passenger seat with
their feet or press on the seatback
with their legs.

D Do not put objects under the front
passenger seat.

D Child restraint systems installed on
the rear/second seat should
contact the front seatbacks.

not

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Child restraint—
—Child restraint precautions
D When it is unavoidable to install the
forward−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat,
install the child restraint system on
the front passenger seat in the
proper order. (As for the installation
order, see “—Installation with seat
belt” on page 88 in this Section.)

D Do not remove the front seats.
D Do not kick the front passenger

seat or subject it to severe impact.
Otherwise, the SRS warning light
may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this
case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

The “AIR BAG ON” indicator light may be
illuminated (the front passenger airbag and
side airbag on the front passenger seat
may deploy) even if observing the above
cautions, when a child sits in, or a forward−facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger seat. Refer to all the cautions in “SRS airbags” on
page 65 and “Child restraint” on page 85
in this Section.

Toyota strongly urges the use of appropriate child restraint systems for
children.
The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.
and Canada now require the use of a
child restraint system.
Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on
page 53 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

D For effective protection in automo-

bile accidents and sudden stops, a
child must be properly restrained,
using a seat belt or child restraint
system depending on the age and
size of the child. Holding a child in
your arms is not a substitute for a
child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed
against the windshield, or between
you and the vehicle’s interior.

D Toyota strongly urges use of a

proper child restraint system which
conforms to the size of the child,
installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child
is safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat.

D Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. In the
event of an accident, the force of
the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or
serious injury to the child if the
rear−facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger
seat.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Child restraint system
D A forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated,
because the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the
child may be killed or seriously injured.

D On vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front
or center and roof side garnish
from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if
the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if
the side airbag and/or curtain shield
airbag inflate, and the impact could
cause death or serious injury to the
child.

D Do not use the seat belt extender

D Make sure you have complied with

all installation instructions provided
by the child restraint manufacturer
and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly,
it may cause death or serious injury
to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

A child restraint system for a small
child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must
carefully consult the manufacturer’s
instructions which accompany the child
restraint system.
To provide proper restraint, use a child
restraint system following the manufacturer’s instructions about the appropriate age
and size of the child for the child restraint
system.
Install the child restraint system correctly
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer. General directions are also
provided under the following illustrations.
The child restraint system should be
installed on the rear seat. According to
accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Types of child restraint
system
CAUTION
When the child restraint system is
not in use:

D Keep the child restraint system

properly secured on the seat even
if it is not in use. Do not store the
restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.

D If it is necessary to detach the
child restraint system, remove it
from the vehicle or store it securely
in the luggage compartment. This
will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop
or accident.

Child restraint systems are classified into
the following 3 types depending on the
child’s age and size.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following
the instructions provided by its manufacturer.
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of a child restraint
system.
For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” on
page 100 in this Section.

(A) Infant seat

The child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle may also be used.
See “—Installation with child restraint lower anchorages” on page 104 in this Section.

(B) Convertible seat

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Installation with seat belt

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION
An infant seat must be used in rear−
facing position only.

CAUTION

D Never install a rear−facing child re-

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Same
position

D Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear/second or third
seat if it interferes with the lock
mechanism of the front or second
seats. Otherwise, the child or front
or second seat occupant(s) may be
killed or seriously injured in case
of sudden braking or a collision.

D If the driver’s seat position does

Same angle

D When installing a child restraint

system on the rear/second center
position, adjust both seat cushions
to the same position and align all
seatbacks at the same angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this
may cause death or serious injuries
in a collision.

To install the infant seat:
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the infant seat following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle
taking care not to twist the belt. Keep
the lap portion of the belt tight.

not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right
seat.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CAUTION

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended.
To hold the infant seat securely, make
sure the belt is in the lock mode before
letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing
against the seat
let the shoulder
it will go to hold
ly.

the infant seat firmly
cushion and seatback,
belt retract as far as
the infant seat secure-

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

To remove the infant seat:
Press the buckle release button and allow
the belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult or older child passenger.

Rear/second center seat: If the seat in
which a child restraint system is installed
in the rear most position, release the center seat belt after removing the child restraint system. Otherwise, the rear center
seat belt may not work properly.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Install the child restraint system on the
front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with a
front passenger occupant classification
system. In order to activate the occupant
classification system correctly, install the
forward−facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat in the following
order:
1. Turn the engine switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Move the front passenger seat to the
rearward position.
(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION
A convertible seat must be used in forward−facing or rear−facing position depending on the age and size of the
child. When installing, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions about the
applicable age and size of the child as
well as directions for installing the
child restraint system.

3. Put the child restraint system on the
front passenger seat without putting
your weight on the front passenger
seat.
4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seat
belt buckle.

6. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.
7. Put a child on the child restraint system and secure the child, complying
with the instructions provided by the
child restraint system manufacturer.

5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended. To hold the seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

The “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light should
be illuminated when the engine switch is
in the “ON” position and the child is in the
child restraint system after following these
procedures. The “AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light indicates the SRS front passenger
airbag and side airbag on the passenger
side will not deploy. If the “AIR BAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated, remove the
child restraint system and reinstall it with
the engine switch in the “ACC” or “LOCK”
position. If the “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated when the engine switch
is turned to the “ON” position, then the
SRS front passenger airbag and side airbag on the passenger side may deploy in
an accident. Do not drive the vehicle in
this condition. Remove the child restraint
system and contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

D Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger
seat when unavoidable. If you must
install the child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, put the
seat in its most rearward position,
and install the forward−facing child
restraint system in the proper order. Otherwise, the front passenger
occupant classification system can
not detect the presence of the child
restraint system and the front passenger airbag and side airbag on
the front passenger seat could
deploy, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.

D Never install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. In the
event of an accident, the impact of
the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag could cause death or
serious injury to the child if the
rear−facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger
seat.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D On vehicles with side airbags and

Move seat
fully back

D A forward−facing child restraint sys-

D Do not install a child restraint sys-

D If the driver’s seat position does
not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear/second
right seat.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Same
position

CAUTION

Same angle

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

D If the seat belt does not function
D When installing a child restraint

To install the convertible seat:
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the convertible seat following
the
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt
tight.

normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

To remove the convertible seat:
Press the buckle release button and allow
the belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to work
for an adult or older child passenger.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D On vehicles with side airbags and

Move seat
fully back

CAUTION

D A forward−facing child restraint sys-

Same
position

Same angle

D When installing a child restraint

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CAUTION

D Always make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from child’s neck, but
not falling off child’s shoulder.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

D Both high−positioned lap belts and
To install the booster seat:
Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the
lap and shoulder belt through or around
the booster seat and across the child following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer and insert the tab into the
buckle taking care not to twist the belt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly
across the child’s shoulder and that the
lap belt is positioned as low as possible
on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on
page 53 in this Section for details.

loose−fitting belts could cause
death or serious injuries due to
sliding under the lap belt during a
collision or other unintended event.
Keep the lap belt positioned as low
on a child’s hips as possible.

D For child’s safety, do not place the
shoulder belt under child’s arm.

D After inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

D Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Using a top strap

To remove the booster seat:
Press the buckle release button and allow
the belt to retract.

Outside position

Center position

100

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Follow the procedure below for a child
restraint system that requires the use
of a top strap.

Use one anchor bracket on the roof and
two anchor brackets on the rear/second
seatbacks to attach the top strap.

Symbol mark

Anchor brackets are installed for each
rear/second seating position.
This symbol indicates the locations of the
anchor brackets.

Anchor brackets
Outside position

Symbol mark

Center position

101

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

TO
USE
BRACKET:

THE

OUTSIDE

1. Remove the head restraint.

ANCHOR

Hold the center of the lever and pull it
up. Then slide the rear/second seats
forward slightly if it is in the rear−most
position.

2. Fix the child restraint system with
the seat belt.
Widen the slit of the cover slightly
and confirm the position of the anchor fitting. Latch the hook onto the
anchor bracket and tighten the top
strap.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on
page 85 in this Section.

102

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CAUTION
Make sure the top strap is securely
latched, and check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different directions.
Follow all the installation instructions
provided by its manufacturer.

3. Insert the head restraint and push it
down to the lock position.

After installing the child restraint
system, move the rear/second seat to
the rear−most lock position to prevent
the
child
restraint
system
from
interfering with the front seat.

103

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Installation with child
restraint lower anchorages

TO
USE
BRACKET:

THE

CENTER

ANCHOR

1. Open the lid of the anchor bracket.

2. Fix the child restraint system with
the seat belt.
Latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.

Lower anchorages for the child restraint
systems complying with the FMVSS225
or
CMVSS210.2
specifications
are
installed in the rear/second seat.

For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on
page 85 in this Section.

The anchorages are installed in the gap
between the seat cushion and seatback of
both outside rear/second seating position.

Child restraint systems complying with the
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification
can be fixed to these anchorages. In this
case, it is not necessary to fix the child
restraint system with a seat belt on the
vehicle.

104

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

7th lock
position

CHILD
RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION

1st lock
position

SYSTEM

1. Fold down the seatback and back it
to the 1st lock position (most upright position) until it locks into
place. Adjust the seatback to the 7th
lock position.
Make sure the seatback is locked securely.

Canada only
Type A

Canada only
Type B

105

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2. Widen the gap between the seat
cushion and seatback slightly and
confirm the position of the lower anchorages near the buttons on the
seatback.
3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower
straps onto the anchorages and
tighten the lower straps.
Type B—Latch the buckles onto the
anchorages.
For owners in Canada—The symbol on a
child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
If your child restraint system has a top
strap, it should be anchored. (For the
installation of the top strap, see “—Using
a top strap” on page 100 in this Section.)
For installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

D When using the lower anchorages
for the child restraint system, be
sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that
the seat belt is not caught.

D Push and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be
sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.

D When using the lower anchorages
for the child restraint system, ensure that the seat is moved to the
rear−most position, with the seatback close to the child restraint
system.

D After securing the child restraint

system, never slide or recline the
seat.

D Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
front seat occupant(s) may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

106

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION

1− 4

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Steering wheel and Mirrors
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

108
108
110
111

107

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Tilt and telescopic steering
wheel

Outside rear view mirrors—
CAUTION

D Do not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing
so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.

D After adjusting the steering wheel,
try moving it up and down or forward and rearward to make sure it
is locked in position.

To adjust the steering wheel position,
push down the lock release lever. Then
tilt the steering wheel to the desired
angle, push or pull it to the desired
steering column length and return the
lever to its original position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the side of your vehicle in the mirror.
Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the outside
rear view mirror on the passenger’s side
because it is a convex mirror. Any object
seen in a convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than when seen in a flat
mirror.
On some models, when you push the rear
window defogger switch, the heater panels
in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surface. (See “Rear
window and outside rear view mirror defoggers” on page 122 in Section 1−5.)

108

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Power rear view mirror
control
CAUTION

NOTICE

D Do not adjust the mirror while the

If ice should jam the mirror, do not
operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de−icer to free
the mirror.

vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur
resulting in death or serious injuries.

D On some models: Since the mirror

surfaces can get hot, do not touch
them when the defogger switch is
on.
To adjust a mirror, use the switches.
1. Master switch—To select the mirror to
be adjusted
Push the switch to “L” (left) or “R”
(right).
2. Control switch—To move the mirror
Push the switch in the desired direction.
Mirrors can be adjusted when the engine
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

109

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Folding rear view mirrors

Anti−glare inside rear view
mirror
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

The rear view mirrors can be folded
backward for parking in compact areas.
To fold the rear view mirror, push backward.

CAUTION
Do not drive with the mirrors folded
backward. Both the driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must
be extended and properly adjusted
before driving.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.
To reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving, operate the lever on the lower
edge of the mirror.
Daylight driving—Lever at position 1
The reflection in the mirror has greater
clarity at this position.
Night driving—Lever at position 2
Remember that by reducing glare you also
lose some rear view clarity.

110

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Sun visors—

—Vanity mirrors
CAUTION
Do not extend the plate at the end of
the sun visor when the visor is in the
position 1. It can cover the anti−glare
inside rear view mirror and obstruct
the rear view.

To block out glare, move the sun visor.
To block out glare from the front—Swing
down the main sun visor (position 1).
To block out glare from the side—Swing
down the main sun visor, remove it from
the hook and swing it to the lateral side
(position 2).

To use the vanity mirrors, swing down
the main sun visor and slide the cover.
The vanity light comes on when you slide
the cover.

If glare comes from obliquely behind you,
extend the plate at the end of the visor
(to position 3).

111

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

112

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION

1− 5

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Lights, Wipers and Defogger
Headlights and turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper de−icer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers . . . . . . . . . . .

114
116
116
117
117
118
118
119
120
121
122
122

113

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Headlights and turn signals
HEADLIGHTS
To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.
Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument panel lights
For Canada—The tail light indicator lights
up in the instrument cluster.
Position
above

2—Headlights

and

all

the

For the U.S.A.—The headlight indicator
lights up in the instrument cluster.
For the U.S.A.

Automatic light cut off system
If the driver’s door is opened and closed
with the engine turned off, the lights will
automatically turn off after 30 seconds. If
all the doors are locked with the wireless
remote control, the lights will turn off immediately.
To turn on the lights again, turn the engine switch to the “ON” position or turn
the headlight switch on. If you are going
to park for over one week, make sure the
headlight switch is off.

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on
for a long period when the engine is
not running.
Daytime running light system
(on some models)
The headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking brake is released with
the engine started, even with the light
switch in the “OFF” position. They will not
go off until the engine switch is turned off.
To turn on the other exterior lights and
instrument panel lights, twist the knob to
the position 1.
Twist the knob to the position 2 to turn
the headlights to full intensity for driving
at night.

For Canada

114

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light
bulbs” on page 422 in Section 7−3.

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn
the headlights on and push the lever away
from you (position 1). Pull the lever toward you (position 2) for low beams.

TURN SIGNALS

The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on.

The engine switch must be in the “ON”
position.

Flashing the high
(position 3)—Pull the
back. The high beam
when you release the

beam headlights
lever all the way
headlights turn off
lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights
with the knob turned to “OFF”.

To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.

The lever automatically returns after you
make a turn, but you may have to return
it by hand after you change lanes.
To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
2) and hold it.

115

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Emergency flashers

Instrument panel light control
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the switch on
longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

To turn on the
push the switch.

emergency

flashers,

To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights, turn the dial.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn
them off, push the switch once again.

With the dial turned fully up, the intensity
of the instrument panel lights will not be
reduced even when the tail lights/headlights are turned on.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warn
other drivers if your vehicle must be
stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull as far off the road as possible.
The turn signal light switch will not work
when the emergency flashers are operating.

116

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Front fog lights

Interior light
INTERIOR LIGHT CUT OFF OPERATION
To prevent the battery being discharged,
the light will automatically turn off when
the engine switch is in the “LOCK” position and the door is left opened with the
switch at the “DOOR” position for 20 minutes or more.

To turn on the front fog lights, twist
the band of the headlight and turn signal switch lever. They will come on
only when the headlights are on low
beam.
Front fog light indicator light on the instrument panel will tell you that the front fog
lights are on.

To turn on the interior light, slide the
switch.
The interior light switch has the following
positions:
“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
“OFF”—Turns the light off.
“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of
the side doors are opened. For details,
see “Illuminated entry system” on page
119 in this Section.

117

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Personal lights

Luggage compartment light
The personal lights operate separately
with each lens.
To turn on the light, push the lens on your
side. To turn the light off, push the lens
once again.
The personal light switch has the following
positions:
“DOOR”—Turns the lights on when any of
the side doors is opened. For details, see
“Illuminated entry system” on page 119 in
this Section.

Without electric moon roof

“OFF”—Turn the lights on only when you
push the lens.
INTERIOR LIGHT CUT OFF OPERATION
To prevent the battery being discharged,
the light will automatically turn off when
the engine switch is in the “LOCK” position and the door is left opened with the
switch at the “DOOR” position for 20 minutes or more.

With electric moon roof

118

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Illuminated entry system
To turn on the luggage
light, push the luggage
light switch upwards. The
when the back door is
light goes off when the
closed.

compartment
compartment
light turn on
opened. The
back door is

The following lights will come on when
any of the side doors are opened. After
all the side doors are closed, the lights
remain on for about 15 seconds before
fading out.
1. Engine switch light
2. Personal lights (with the “DOOR” position)
3. Interior light (with the “DOOR” position)
4. Foot lights
When any of the side doors are unlocked,
the lights will come on and remain on for
about 15 seconds before fading out.
If all the doors are closed, when the engine switch is turned to the “LOCK” position, the lights will come on and remain
on for about 15 seconds.
The duration of the lighting can be
changed. For details, ask your Toyota
dealer.
If all the doors are closed and the engine
switch is in the “ACC” position, the engine
switch light and interior light will fade out.
If all the doors are locked, all the lights
will fade out.

119

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Windshield wipers and washer
The “INT” band lets you adjust the wiping
time interval when the wiper lever is in
the intermittent position (position 1). Twist
the band upward to decrease the time
between sweeps, and downward to increase it.

To prevent the battery being discharged,
the lights will automatically turn off when
the key is removed and the door is left
opened for about 20 minutes.
FOOT LIGHTS
The foot lights also come on when the
engine switch is in the “ON” position with
the automatic transmission selector lever
in the “P” position. When the selector lever is moved out of “P” position, the foot
lights will be dimmed.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you.
If the windshield wipers are off, they will
operate a couple of times after the washer
squirts.

This operation can be customized. For details, ask your Toyota dealer.
To turn on the windshield wipers, move
the lever to the desired setting.
The engine switch must be in the “ON”
position.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 422 in
Section 7−3.
In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.

Lever position

Speed setting

Position 1

Intermittent
operation

NOTICE

Position 2

Low speed
operation

Position 3

High speed
operation

Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the
glass.

For a single sweep of the windshield,
push the lever up and release it.

120

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Rear window wiper and
washer
When waxing your vehicle, make sure that
the washer nozzles do not become
blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,
contact your Toyota dealer to have the
vehicle serviced.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 422 in
Section 7−3.

NOTICE

Do not operate the rear wiper if the
rear window is dry. It may scratch the
glass.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.

To turn on the rear window wiper, twist
the lever knob upward.
The engine switch must be in the “ON”
position.
Lever position

Speed setting

Position 1

Intermittent
operation

Position 2

Normal operation

To squirt washer fluid on the rear window,
twist the knob upward or downward as far
as it will go (position 3 or 4). The knob
automatically returns from these positions
after you release it. The rear window wiper operates while the washer squirts.

121

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Windshield wiper de−icer

Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers
To defog or defrost the rear window,
push the switch.
The engine switch must be in the “ON”
position.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the
rear window will quickly clear the window
surface. An indicator light will illuminate to
indicate the defogger is operating.
On some models, the heater panels in the
outside rear view mirrors will also quickly
clear the surfaces.

To deice the windshield wiper blades,
push the switch.

Manual air conditioning system

Push the switch once again to turn the
defoggers off.
The system will automatically shut off after the defoggers have operated about 15
minutes.

The engine switch must be in the “ON”
position.
The system will automatically shut off after the deicer has operated about 15 minutes. An indicator light will illuminate to
indicate the deicer is operating.

CAUTION
On some models: Since the mirror
surfaces can get hot, do not touch
them when the switch is on.

If further deicing is desired, simply actuate
the switch again. When the wiper blades
have deiced, push the switch once again
to turn the deicer off. Continuous use may
cause the battery to discharge, especially
during stop−and−go driving.
Automatic air conditioning system

122

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Make sure you turn the defoggers off
when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the
defoggers on for a long time could cause
the battery to discharge, especially during
stop−and−go driving. The defoggers are
not designed for drying rain water or for
melting snow.
If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use a spray de−icer
before operating the switch.

NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or connectors.

123

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

124

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION

1− 6

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS

Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer and two trip meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

126
126
127
127
128
129

125

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Engine coolant temperature
gauge

Fuel gauge
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge
needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill
the fuel tank immediately.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.
The gauge indicates the approximate
quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
when the engine switch is in the “ON”
position.
Nearly full—Needle at “F”
Nearly empty—Needle at “E”
It is a good idea to keep the tank over
1/4 full.
The needle moves when braking, accelerating or making turns. This is caused by
the movement of the fuel in the tank.
If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low
fuel level warning light comes on, fill the
fuel tank as soon as possible.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature when the engine switch is
in the “ON” position. The engine operating
temperature
will
vary
with
changes in weather and engine load.
If the needle moves into the red zone,
your engine is too hot. If your vehicle
overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the
engine to cool.
Your vehicle may overheat during severe
operating conditions, such as:

D Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
D Reducing speed or stopping after high
speed driving.

126

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Tachometer

Odometer and two trip meters

The tachometer indicates engine speed
in thousands of rpm (revolutions per
minute). Use it while driving to select
correct shift points and to prevent engine lugging and over−revving.

This meter displays the odometer and
two trip meters.

D Idling for a long period with the air
conditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

D Towing a trailer.
NOTICE
z Do not remove the thermostat in
the engine cooling system as this
may cause the engine to overheat.
The thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant to keep the
temperature of the engine within
the specified operating range.
z Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 360 in
Section 4.

Driving with the engine running too fast
causes excessive engine wear and poor
fuel economy. Remember, in most cases
the slower the engine speed, the greater
the fuel economy.

NOTICE
Do not let the indicator needle get
into the red zone. This may cause
severe engine damage.

1. Odometer—Shows the total
the vehicle has been driven.

distance

2. Two trip meters—Show two different
distances independently driven since
the last time each trip meter was set
to zero.
You can use one trip meter to calculate
the fuel economy and the other to
measure the distance on each trip. All
trip meter data is cancelled if the electrical power source is disconnected.

127

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Outside temperature display
3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two
trip meters to zero, and also change
the meter display.
To change the meter display, quickly
push and release the knob. The meter
display changes in the order from the
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter
B, then back to the odometer each
time you push.
To reset the trip meter A to zero, display the meter A reading, then push
and hold the knob until the meter is
set to zero. The same process can be
applied for resetting the trip meter B.

The displayed temperature ranges from
−40_C (−40_F) up to 50_C (122_F).
The engine switch must be in the “ON”
position.
If an abnormality exists in the connection
of the outside air temperature sensor,
“−−_C” will appear on the display. If
“−−_C” appears on the display, contact
your Toyota dealer.

128

When the outside air temperature falls below 3_C (37_F) while driving, the temperature display flashes to indicate that the
outside air temperature is becoming low.
However, if the temperature is already
3_C (37_F) or below, the display does not
flash when the engine is turned to the
“ON” position.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

(a)

(b)

Do this.
If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

Fasten driver’s seat belt.
(indicator and buzzer)

(c)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.
(indicator and buzzer)

(d)

Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(e)

Stop and check.

(f)

(g)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

Fill up tank.

129

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

(h)

Do this.
Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.
If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(i)

Close all side doors and back door.

(j)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(k)

Stop and check.

(l)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(m)

Adjust the tire inflation pressure. If warning light remains, contact Toyota dealer.

(n)

Cool the driveline without turning off the engine. If warning light remains, contact
Toyota dealer.

(o)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

130

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

Do this.

(p)

Add washer fluid.

(q)

Replace engine oil.

(r)

Key reminder buzzer

Remove key.

131

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

(a) Brake System Warning Light
This light comes on in the following cases
when the engine switch is in the “ON”
position.

D When the parking brake is applied...
This light comes on for a few seconds
when the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position even after the parking brake
is released.

D When the brake fluid level is low...
CAUTION
It is dangerous to continue driving
normally when the brake fluid level is
low.
Have your vehicle checked at your
Toyota dealer in the following cases:

D The light does not come on even if the
parking brake is applied when the engine switch is in the “ON” position.

CAUTION
If either of the following conditions
occurs, immediately stop your vehicle
at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.

D The light does not turn off even
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running.

In this case, the brakes may not
work properly and your stopping
distance will become longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly and
bring the vehicle to an immediate
stop.

D The brake system warning light remains on together with the “ABS”
warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light
and Buzzer
The light and buzzer act as a reminder to
buckle up the driver’s seat belt.
Once the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” or “START” position, the reminder
light flashes if the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened. Unless the driver fastens the
belt, the light continues flashing.
If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h
(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,
the buzzer will sound for 30 seconds.
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,
the buzzer will sound in a different tone
for 90 more seconds. Even if the vehicle
speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the
buzzer will continue to sound. To stop the
buzzer, fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer
still sounds, make sure the front passenger’s seat belt is fastened.

D The light does not come on even if the

engine is turned to the “ON” position
with the parking brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

132

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Belt

Re-

The light and buzzer act as a reminder to
have the front passenger buckle up the
seat belt.
Once the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” or “START” position, the reminder
light flashes if a passenger sits in the
front passenger seat and does not fasten
the seat belt. However, if a front passenger uses an additional seat cushion, the
light may not flash even when the seat
belt is not buckled up.
If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h
(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,
the buzzer will sound for 30 seconds.
Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,
the buzzer will sound in a different tone
for 90 more seconds. Even if the vehicle
speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the
buzzer will continue to sound. To stop the
buzzer, fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer
still sounds, make sure the driver’s seat
belt is fastened.
If luggage or other load is placed on the
front passenger seat, depending on its
weight the reminder light may flash.

(d) Charging System Warning Light
This warning light comes on when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON” position, and goes off when the engine is
started.
When there are problems in the charging
system while the engine is running, the
warning light comes on.

NOTICE
When the charging system warning
light comes on while the engine is
running, malfunctions such as the engine drive belt being broken may have
occurred. If the warning light comes
on, immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota
dealer.
(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning
Light
This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low.
If it flickers or stays on while you are
driving, pull off the road to a safe place
and stop the engine immediately. Call a
Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
assistance.

The light may occasionally flicker when
the engine is idling or it may come on
briefly after a hard stop. There is no
cause for concern if it then goes out when
the engine is accelerated slightly.
The light may come on when the oil level
is extremely low. It is not designed to
indicate low oil level, and the oil level
must be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the
warning light on—even for one block.
It may ruin the engine.
(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This lamp comes on when the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position
and goes off after the engine starts.
This means that the warning light system is operating properly.
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp
comes on while driving, first check the
followings.

D Empty fuel tank
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.

133

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D Loose fuel tank cap
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely
tighten it.
These cases are temporary malfunctions.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after
several trips, contact your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.
If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel
tank cap is not loose...

D There is a problem somewhere in the
engine, emission control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic
transmission electrical system or warning light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.
If engine speed does not increase when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, there
may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system.
At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal
more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.

134

Even if the abnormality of the electronic
throttle control system is corrected during
low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and
the engine switch is turned to the “ACC”
or “LOCK” position.

CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) programs
Your vehicle may not pass a state
emission inspection if the malfunction
indicator lamp remains on. Contact your
Toyota dealer to check your vehicle’s
emission
control
system
and
OBD
(On−Board Diagnostics) system before
taking your vehicle for the inspection.
For details, see “Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 394
in Section 6.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light
This light comes on when the fuel level
in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up
the tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.
(h) “ABS” Warning Light
The light comes on when the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position. If
the anti−lock brake system and the brake
assist system work properly, the light
turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter,
if either of the systems malfunctions, the
light comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
following systems do not operate, but the
brake system still operates conventionally.

D
D
D
D
D

Anti−lock brake system
Brake assist system
Traction control system
“AUTO LSD” system
Enhanced vehicle stability control system

D Downhill assist control system
D Hill−start assist control system

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.
If either of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
service the vehicle.

D The light does not come on when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position, or remains on.

D The light comes on while you are driving.

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.
(i) Open Door Warning Light
This light remains on until all the side
doors and back door are completely
closed.

(j) SRS Warning Light
This indicator comes on when the engine switch is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds.
This means the SRS airbags and seat
belt pretensioners are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, “AIR BAG ON” indicator
light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front
passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat
belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer

following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible.

D The light does not come on when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position or remains on for more than
6 seconds.

D The light comes on while driving.

135

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

The SRS warning light and “AIR BAG
OFF” indicator light will come on if there
is a malfunction in the front passenger
occupant classification system.
(k) Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature Warning Light
This light warns that the automatic transmission fluid temperature is too high.
If this light comes on while you are driving, slow down and pull off the road. Stop
the vehicle at a safe place and put the
selector lever in “P”. With the engine idling, wait until the light goes off. If the
light goes off, you can start the vehicle
again. If the light does not go off, call a
Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
assistance.

NOTICE
Continued driving with the warning
light on may damage the automatic
transmission.

(l) “VSC” Warning Light

(m) Tire Pressure Warning Light

The light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the following.

This light warns that the tire pressure of
one or more of your tires (including the
spare tire) is low. The light comes on
when the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position. It goes off after a few seconds. This indicates that the tire pressure
warning system is functioning properly.

D Enhanced vehicle stability control system

D
D
D
D

Traction control system
“AUTO LSD” system
Downhill assist control system
Hill−start assist control system

The light will come on when the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position and
will go off after a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, all the
above systems will not work. In such a
case, the brakes will operate when applied
(no electronic assistance will be available), and it will be possible to continue
driving the vehicle.

If the warning light comes on while you
are driving, the tire pressure of one or
more of your tires (including the spare
tire) is low. The light goes off after the
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the
proper pressure.
If the warning light blinks, the tire pressure warning system may be malfunctioning. Contact your Toyota dealer.
For details, see “Tire pressure warning
system” on page 163 in Section 1−7.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

D The warning light does not come on
after the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position.

D The warning light remains on after the
engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position.

D The warning light comes on while driving.

136

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

(n) “4WD” Warning Light

If the “4WD” warning light remains on...

The light warns that when there is a problem somewhere in active torque control
4WD system.

This indicates that the system may not
work properly. Contact your Toyota dealer
to service your vehicle.

The light will come on when the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position, and
will go off after about a few seconds.

(o) Electric Power
Warning Light

If the warning light does not come on
when the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position, contact your Toyota dealer
to service the vehicle.
If the “4WD” warning light flashes...
This indicates that the driveline temperature has become too high. Without turning
off the engine, do either of the following
to cool the driveline:

D Reduce vehicle speed until the light
goes off.

D Stop the vehicle at a safe place and
allow the engine to idle until the light
goes off.

If operation of the vehicle is continued
while the light is flashing, the system automatically shuts off the engine torque that
is applied to the rear wheels to protect
the driveline. If this happens, the light will
flash faster.
When the driveline temperature
enough, the light will go off.

Steering

System

The light comes on when the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position. If
the electric power steering system warning
light works properly, the light turns off
after a few seconds. If the system has
malfunctions, the light comes on again.
If the following conditions occur, this
indicates a malfunction somewhere in
the components monitored by the warning light system. Have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.

CAUTION
If the electric power steering system
warning light comes on, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible. In this case, more effort
is required for the steering wheel to
turn than usual. Drive your vehicle
while firmly gripping the steering
wheel.
(p) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level
Warning Light
The light warns that the windshield washer
fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at
your earliest opportunity. (For instructions,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 422 in
Section 7−3.)

D The light does not come on when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position or remains on.

D The light stays on while you are driving.

falls

137

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

(q) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder
Light
This light acts as a reminder to replace
the engine oil.
This light will come on when the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position and
will go off after about a few seconds.
When you drive for about 7200 km (4500
miles) after the engine oil replacement,
this light illuminates for about 3 seconds
and then flashes for about 12 seconds
with the engine switch turned to the “ON”
position. If you continue driving without
replacing the engine oil, and if the distance driven exceeds 8000 km (5000
miles), the light will come on after the
engine switch is turned to the “ON” position. The light will remain on thereafter.
If the light is flashing, we recommend that
you replace the engine oil at an early
opportunity depending on the driving and
road conditions. If the light comes on,
replace it as soon as possible.

The system must be reset after the engine oil replacement. Reset the system by
the following procedure:
1. Turn the engine switch to the “OFF”
position with the trip meter A reading
shown. (For details, see “Odometer and
two trip meters” on page 127 in this
Section.)

CHECKING
SERVICE
REMINDER
INDICATORS (except the low fuel level
warning light and low windshield
washer fluid level warning light)
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Open one of the doors.
The open door warning light should
come on.

2. Turn the engine switch to the “ON”
position while holding down the trip
meter reset knob.

3. Close the door.
The open door warning light should go
off.

Hold down the knob for at least 5 seconds. The odometer indicates “000000”
and the light goes off.

4. Turn the engine switch to the “ON”
position, but do not start the engine.
All the service reminder indicators except the open door warning light should
come on.

If the system fails to reset, the light will
continue flashing.

The following service reminder indicators go off after a few seconds:

(r) Key Reminder Buzzer
This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove
the key when you open the driver’s door
with the engine switch in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.

D Engine oil replacement reminder light
D Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light

D
D
D
D
D

“ABS” warning light
“VSC” warning light
Tire pressure warning light
“4WD” warning light
Electric power steering system warning
light

138

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D “AUTO LSD” indicator light
D Slip indicator light
D Downhill assist control system indicator
light

D Four−wheel drive lock indicator light
The SRS warning light goes off after
about 6 seconds.
If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not function as described
above, have it checked by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.

139

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

140

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION

1− 7

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS

Engine (ignition) switch, Transmission and Parking
brake
Engine (ignition) switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active torque control 4WD system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“AUTO LSD” system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enhanced vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downhill assist control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill−start assist control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

142
143
150
152
153
155
158
161
163
167
168

141

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Engine (ignition) switch
“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering
wheel is locked. The key can be removed only at this position.
You must push in the key to turn the
engine switch from the “ACC” to “LOCK”
position. The selector lever must be in the
“P” position before pushing the key.

NOTICE
Do not leave the engine switch in the
“ON” position if the engine is not
running. The battery will discharge
and the ignition could be damaged.

Vehicles with engine immobilizer system—Once you remove the key, the engine immobilizer system is automatically
set. (See “Engine immobilizer system” on
page 15 in Section 1−2.)
“START”—Starter motor on. The key
will return to the “ON” position when
released.
For starting tips, see page 341 in Section
3.
“ON”—Engine on and all accessories
on.
This is the normal driving position.
“ACC”—Accessories such as the radio
operate, but the engine is off.
If you leave the engine switch in the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position and open the
driver’s door, a buzzer will remind you to
remove the key.

When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck at the “LOCK”
position. To free it, first be sure the key
is pushed all the way in, and then rotate
the steering wheel slightly while turning
the key gently.
Approximately five hours after the engine
is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from under the floor around the driver’s
seat for several minutes. This is normal
operation and does not indicate a malfunction. (See “Leak detection pump” on page
ix.)
It is not a malfunction if the needle on all
meters and gauges move slightly when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON” or
“START” position.

142

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Automatic transmission (4−speed)

Selector lever

Your automatic transmission has a shift
lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
only shift out of the “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the engine
switch in the “ON” position).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and
key removal
R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving
(shifting into overdrive possible)
3: Engine braking
(shifting into overdrive not possible)

Shift with the brake pedal
depressed.
(The engine switch must
be in the “ON” position.)

2: Stronger engine braking
L: Maximum engine braking

Shift normally.

143

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
to start the engine” on page 342 in
Section 3. The transmission must be in
the “P” or “N” position.

To use engine braking, you can downshift
the transmission as follows:

2. With your foot holding down the brake
pedal, shift the selector lever to the
“D” position.
When the lever is in the “D” position, the
automatic transmission system will select
the most suitable gear for running conditions such as normal cruising, hill climbing, hard towing, etc.
Always use the “D” position for better fuel
economy and quieter driving. If the engine
coolant temperature is low, the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear
even in the “D” position.

CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
slowly for smooth starting.

D Shift into the “3” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to third gear and
engine braking will be enabled.
Two−wheel drive models
173 km/h (108 mph)
Four−wheel drive models
164 km/h (102 mph)

D Shift into the “2” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to second gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
stronger engine braking will be enabled.
Two−wheel drive models
113 km/h (70 mph)
Four−wheel drive models
107 km/h (66 mph)

D Shift into the “L” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to first gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than the following speed, and
maximum engine braking will be enabled.
Two−wheel drive models
56 km/h (35 mph)
Four−wheel drive models
53 km/h (33 mph)

When the cruise control is being used,
even if you downshift from the “D” to “3”
position, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not
cancelled.
For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
see “Cruise control” on page 168 in this
Section.

CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery
surface.
Abrupt
shifting
could cause the vehicle to skid or
spin.

144

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

(d) Using the “2” and “L” positions
The “2” and “L” positions are used for
strong engine braking as described previously.
With the selector lever in the “2” or “L”
position, you can start the vehicle in motion as with the lever in the “D” position.
With the selector lever in the “2” position,
the vehicle will start in first gear and automatically shift to second gear.
With the selector lever in the “L” position,
the transmission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE
z Be careful not to over−rev the engine. Watch the tachometer to keep
engine rpm from going into the red
zone. The approximate maximum allowable speed for each position is
given below for your reference:
Two−wheel drive models
“2” . . . . . . . . . 126 km/h (78 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . . . 70 km/h (43 mph)
Four−wheel drive models
“2” . . . . . . . . . 120 km/h (74 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . . . 67 km/h (41 mph)

z Do not continue hill climbing or
hard towing for a long time in the
“2” or “L” position. This may cause
severe automatic transmission damage from overheating. To prevent
such damage, the “3” position
should be used in hill climbing or
hard towing.

(f) Parking
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up fully to
securely apply the parking brake.
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
shift the selector lever to the “P” position.

CAUTION

(e) Backing up
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
“R” position.

NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.

Never attempt to move the selector
lever into the “P” position under any
circumstances while the vehicle is
moving. Serious mechanical damage
and loss of vehicle control may result.
(g) Good driving practice

D If the transmission repeatedly shifts up
and down between third gear and overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,
shift the selector lever to the “3” position. Be sure to shift the selector lever
to the “D” position immediately afterward.

D When towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not
use the “D” position.

145

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.

NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.
(h) If you cannot shift the selector lever out of the “P” position
If you cannot shift the selector lever from
the “P” position even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
override button. For instructions, see “If
you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever” on page 378 in Section 4.

146

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Automatic transmission (5−speed)

Selector lever

Your automatic transmission has a shift
lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
only shift out of the “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the engine
switch in the “ON” position).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and key
removal
R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving
(shifting into overdrive possible)
4: Engine braking
(shifting into overdrive not possible)

Shift with the brake pedal
depressed.
(The engine switch must
be in the “ON” position.)

3, 2: Stronger engine braking
L: Maximum engine braking

Shift normally.

147

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
to start the engine” on page 342 in
Section 3. The transmission must be in
the “P” or “N” position.

To use engine braking, you can downshift
the transmission as follows:

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
see “Cruise control” on page 168 in this
Section.

D Shift into the “4” position. The trans-

CAUTION

CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
slowly for smooth starting.

mission will downshift to fourth gear
and engine braking will be enabled.

D Shift into the “3” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to third gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than 161 km/h (100 mph),
and stronger engine braking will be enabled.

D Shift into the “2” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to second gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than 99 km/h (62 mph), and
stronger engine braking will be enabled.

D Shift into the “L” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to first gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than 42 km/h (26 mph), and
maximum engine braking will be enabled.

When the cruise control is being used,
even if you downshift from the “D” to “4”
position, engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not
cancelled.

Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery
surface.
Abrupt
shifting
could cause the vehicle to skid or
spin.
(d) Using the “3”, “2” and “L” positions
The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used for
strong engine braking as described previously.
With the selector lever in the “3”, “2” or
“L” position, you can start the vehicle in
motion as with the lever in the “D” position.
With the selector lever in the “3” or “2”
position, the vehicle will start in first gear
and automatically shift to third gear or
second gear.
With the selector lever in the “L” position,
the transmission is engaged in first gear.

148

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

NOTICE
z Be careful not to over−rev the engine. Watch the tachometer to keep
engine rpm from going into the red
zone. The approximate maximum allowable speed for each position is
given below for your reference:
“3” . . . . . . . . 175 km/h (109 mph)
“2” . . . . . . . . . 113 km/h (70 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . . . 63 km/h (39 mph)
z Do not continue hill climbing or
hard towing for a long time in the
“3”, “2” or “L” position. This may
cause severe automatic transmission damage from overheating. To
prevent such damage, the “4” position should be used in hill climbing
or hard towing.

(e) Backing up

(g) Good driving practice

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

D If the transmission repeatedly shifts up

2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
“R” position.

NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.
(f) Parking
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Pull the parking brake lever up fully to
securely apply the parking brake.
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
shift the selector lever to the “P” position.

and down between fourth gear and
overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,
shift the selector lever to the “4” position. Be sure to shift the selector lever
to the “D” position immediately afterward.

D When towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not
use the “D” position.

CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.

CAUTION

NOTICE

Never attempt to move the selector
lever into the “P” position under any
circumstances while the vehicle is
moving. Serious mechanical damage
and loss of vehicle control may result.

Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.

149

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Active torque control 4WD
system
(h) If you cannot shift the selector lever out of the “P” position
If you cannot shift the selector lever from
the “P” position even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
override button. For instructions, see “If
you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever” on page 378 in Section 4.

The active torque control 4WD system
controls the engine torque that is applied to the rear wheels according to
the driving conditions and road conditions. When the vehicle’s driving conditions are stable such as driving straight
ahead, the engine torque is applied to
only the front wheels.

FOUR−WHEEL DRIVE LOCK SWITCH
When the vehicle is driven on loose
surfaces, such as sand, gravel, or deep
snow, or if the vehicle gets stuck,
pushing the four−wheel drive lock
switch to ensure that the engine torque
is applied to the 4 wheels.
When the four−wheel drive lock switch is
pushed, the four−wheel drive lock indicator
light blinks twice and remains on until the
four−wheel drive lock is canceled.
To cancel the four−wheel drive lock, push
the switch once again and the four−wheel
drive lock indicator light will go off.

150

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

When the vehicle speed exceeds 40 km/h
(25 mph), the four−wheel drive lock will
be cancelled automatically.

If the “4WD” warning light flashes...
This indicates that the driveline temperature has become too high. Without turning
off the engine, do either of the following
to cool the driveline:

The four−wheel drive lock indicator will
come on for a few seconds when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON” position.

D Reduce vehicle speed until the light
goes off.

If the indicator light does not come on
when the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position or the four−wheel drive lock
switch is pushed, contact your Toyota
dealer.

NOTICE
Use the four−wheel drive lock only
when driving on the loose surfaces,
such as sand, gravel, or deep snow,
or if the vehicle gets stuck. After the
four−wheel drive lock is used to provide traction, cancel the four−wheel
drive lock. Using the four−wheel drive
lock at other times may cause damage to the four−wheel drive system.

D Stop the vehicle at a safe place and
allow the engine to idle until the light
goes off.

SYSTEM FAILURE WARING
The “4WD” warning light warns that there
is a problem somewhere in the active
torque control 4WD system.
The light will come on when the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
When the system works properly, the light
turns off after a few seconds.
If the warning light does not come on
when the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position, contact your Toyota dealer
to service the vehicle.

falls

If the “4WD” warning light remains on...
This indicates that the system may not
work properly. Contact your Toyota dealer
to service your vehicle.

151

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Traction control system
When the traction control system is operating, the following conditions occur:

The traction control system automatically helps prevent the spinning of the
front wheels (two−wheel drive models)
or 4 wheels (four−wheel drive models)
when the vehicle is started or accelerated on slippery road surfaces.

D The system controls the spinning of the
front wheels (two−wheel drive models)
or 4 wheels (four−wheels drive models). At this time, the slip indicator light
blinks.

When the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the system automatically
turns on.

D The vehicle may vibrate or make a
noise due to brake operation. This indicates the system is functioning properly.

CAUTION
Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of the vehicle and
power to the front wheels (two−wheel
drive models) or 4 wheels (four−wheel
drive models) cannot be maintained,
even though the traction control system is in operation. Do not drive the
vehicle under any speed or maneuvering conditions which may cause the
vehicle to lose traction control. If the
road surface is covered with ice or
snow, your vehicle should be fitted
with snow tires or tire chains. Always
drive at a speed that is appropriate
for the present road conditions.

A sound may be heard from the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the system is in the self−check mode. This sound
does not indicate a malfunction.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the engine switch is turned
to the “ON” position. If the indicator light
does not come on when the engine switch
is turned to the “ON” position, contact
your Toyota dealer.

152

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

“AUTO LSD” system
(two−wheel drive models)
If the light comes on while driving, all the
above systems will not work. In such a
case, the brakes will operate when applied
(no electronic assistance will be available), and it will be possible to continue
driving the vehicle.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the following systems:

D Traction control system
D “AUTO LSD” system
D Enhanced vehicle stability control sys-

This system is used only when wheel
spinning occurs in a ditch or on a
rough surface.

D The warning light does not come on

This system is effective in case one of
the front wheels is spinning.

D The warning light remains on after the

NOTICE

when the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position.

“VSC” warning light

The “AUTO LSD” system aids traction
by using the traction control system to
control engine performance and braking
when one of the front wheels begins to
spin.

engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position.

D The warning light comes on while driving.

Do not use the “AUTO LSD” system
in conditions other than the above. A
much greater steering effort and more
careful cornering control will be required.

tem

D Downhill assist control system
D Hill−start assist control system
The light will come on when the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position.
When the systems are work properly, the
light turns off after a few seconds.

153

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

The “AUTO LSD” indicator light will come
on for a few seconds when the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position. If
the indicator light does not come on when
the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position or the “AUTO LSD” switch is
pushed, contact your Toyota dealer.

To turn on the system, push the “AUTO
LSD” switch when the vehicle is
stopped.
The “AUTO LSD” indicator light will come
on and remain on while the system is on.
While the system is operating, the slip
indicator light will also flash.
To turn off the system, push the “AUTO
LSD” switch again and the “AUTO LSD”
indicator light will go off.
If the vehicle speed exceeds 50 km/h (31
mph), this system will be cancelled automatically.

If the brake actuator temperature becomes
too high, a buzzer will sound for about 3
seconds. (The slip indicator light will also
be lit.) The system will temporarily stop
operating in order to protect the brake
actuator. Although “AUTO LSD” system is
not operating, it is still possible to continue your driving.
The operation of the system will be automatically restored after the actuator cools
down. After operation is restored, the slip
indicator light will go off.

“VSC” warning light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the following systems:

D Traction control system
D “AUTO LSD” system
D Enhanced vehicle stability control system

D Downhill assist control system
D Hill−start assist control system
When the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the light will come on.
When the systems are work properly, the
light turns off after a few seconds.

154

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Enhanced vehicle stability
control system
(two−wheel drive vehicles)
If the light comes on while driving, all the
above systems will not work. In such a
case, the brakes will operate when applied
(no electronic assistance will be available), and it will be possible to continue
driving the vehicle.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

D The warning light does not come on
when the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position.

D The warning light remains on after the
engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position.

D The warning light comes on while driving.

The vehicle stability control system
helps provide integrated control of the
such systems as the anti−lock brake,
brake assist, traction control, engine
control, electric power steering. This
system
automatically
controls
the
brakes, engine and power steering to
help prevent the vehicle from skidding
when cornering on a slippery road surface or operating steering wheel abruptly.
This system activates when the vehicle
speed exceeds about 15 km/h (9 mph).
A sound may be heard from the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the system is in the self−check mode. This sound
does not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

D Do not rely excessively on the ve-

hicle stability control system. Even
if the vehicle stability control system is operating, you must always
drive carefully and attentively to
avoid death or serious injury. Reckless driving will result in an unexpected accident. If the slip indicator
light flashes, and an alarm sounds,
special care should be taken while
driving.

D Use only tires of the specified size.

The size, manufacturer, brand and
tread pattern for all 4 tires should
be the same. If you use the tires
other than specified, or different
type or size, the vehicle stability
control system may not function
correctly. When replacing the tires
or wheels, contact your Toyota dealer. (See “Checking and replacing
tires” on page 410 in Section 7−2.)

D In situations where the road surface

is covered with ice or snow, your
vehicle should be fitted with snow
tires or tire chains.

155

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If the light comes on while driving, all the
above systems will not work. In such a
case, the brakes will operate when applied
(no electronic assistance will be available), and it will be possible to continue
driving the vehicle.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

D The warning light does not come on
when the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position.

D The warning light remains on after the
If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator light blinks and an
alarm sounds intermittently. Special care
should be taken while driving.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the engine switch is turned
to the “ON” position. If the indicator light
does not come on when the engine switch
is turned to the “ON” position, contact
your Toyota dealer.

“VSC” warning light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the following systems:

engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position.

D The warning light comes on while driving.

D Traction control system
D “AUTO LSD” system
D Enhanced vehicle stability control system

156

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Enhanced vehicle stability
control system
(four−wheel drive models)
The vehicle stability control system
helps provide integrated control of the
such systems as the anti−lock brake,
brake assist, traction control, engine
control, electric power steering, active
torque control 4WD. This system automatically controls the brakes, engine
and power steering as well as driving
force to all the 4 wheels to help prevent the vehicle from skidding when
cornering on a slippery road surface or
operating steering wheel abruptly.
This system activates when the vehicle
speed exceeds about 15 km/h (9 mph).
A sound may be heard from the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the system is in the self−check mode. This sound
does not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

D Do not rely excessively on the ve-

D Use only tires of the specified size.

If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator light blinks and an
alarm sounds intermittently. Special care
should be taken while driving.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the engine switch is turned
to the “ON” position. If the indicator light
does not come on when the engine switch
is turned to the “ON” position, contact
your Toyota dealer.

D In situations where the road surface
is covered with ice or snow, your
vehicle should be fitted with snow
tires or tire chains.

157

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Downhill assist control system
If the light comes on while driving, all the
above systems will not work. In such a
case, the brakes will operate when applied
(no electronic assistance will be available), and it will be possible to continue
driving the vehicle.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

The downhill assist control system assists the deceleration of the engine
brake when you drive down a steep hill.
When you are driving down a hill,
pushing the “DAC” switch turns on the
system. If the vehicle is traveling at a
speed of 25 km/h (15 mph) or less, you
can descend at a constant speed.

D The warning light does not come on

CAUTION

when the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position.

D The warning light remains on after the
“VSC” warning light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the following systems:

D Traction control system
D Enhanced vehicle stability control system

engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position.

D The warning light comes on while driving.

Do not rely excessively on the downhill assist control system. It may not
be able to maintain a low speed over
road surfaces or off−road surfaces on
which sliding can easily occur, such
as extremely steep slopes or icy or
muddy roads.
TO ACTIVATE THE DOWNHILL ASSIST
CONTROL SYSTEM
1. In order to make full use of the engine brake, put the transmission selector lever in “L” (forward) or “R”
(reverse).

158

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If the “DAC” switch is pushed to turn the
system off while it is in operation, the
system will stop operating gradually. The
downhill assist control system indicator
light will flash to alert the driver. To continue driving at a low speed, push the
“DAC” switch to turn the system on.

2. Push the “DAC” switch to turn the
system on. The downhill assist control system indicator light will come
on.
If the downhill assist control system indicator light flashes, the selector lever may
not be in “L” or “R”.
If the indicator light does not come on
when the switch is pushed, or the indicator light flashes when the selector lever is
in “L” or “R”, contact your Toyota dealer.

With the vehicle traveling at a speed of
25 km/h (15 mph) or less, release the
brake pedal and accelerator pedal to activate the system. The vehicle will descend
the hill at a low speed.
While the system is operating, the slip
indicator light will flash and the stoplights
and high mounted stoplight will be lit. A
sound may also occur during the operation. This does not indicate a malfunction.
If the brakes are applied while the system
is operating, a kickback from the brake
pedal may result and a sound may occur.
This does not indicate a malfunction.

The slip indicator light and downhill assist
control system indicator light come on for
a few seconds when the engine switch is
turned to the “ON” position. If any of the
indicator lights does not come on when
the engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position, contact your Toyota dealer.
If the brake actuator temperature becomes
too high, the downhill assist control system indicator light will flash and a buzzer
will start to sound intermittently. This indicates that the system cannot operate for
much longer. In this case, stop the vehicle
immediately in a safe place.
If the system continues to operate while
driving, the buzzer will sound for about 3
seconds. The system will temporarily stop
operating in order to protect the brake
actuator. Although the downhill assist control system is not operating, it is still possible to continue your driving.

159

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

The operation of the system will be automatically restored after the actuator cools
down. The downhill assist control system
indicator light changes from flash to remain on after operation is restored.

D The warning light does not come on
when the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position.

D The warning light remains on after the
“VSC” warning light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the following systems:

engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position.

D The warning light comes on while driving.

D Traction control system
D “AUTO LSD” system
D Enhanced vehicle stability control system

160

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Hill−start assist control
system
The hill−start assist control system assists in starting to drive a steep or a
slippery hill. When you start to move
up a hill slope, the system helps to
prevent the vehicle from rolling backward in the interval while moving the
foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.

CAUTION

D Do not rely excessively on the hill−
start assist control system. The vehicle may not be able to start
smoothly on road surfaces or off−
road surfaces such as extremely
steep slopes or icy roads, on which
sliding can occur very easily.

D Do not use the hill−start assist con-

trol system to park the vehicle. This
system is not designed as a function for parking the vehicle on a
uphill slope.

TO ACTIVATE THE HILL−START ASSIST
CONTROL SYSTEM
The hill−start assist control system will
operate for maximum of 2 seconds. The
brake pedal must be depressed further
to activate the system when all of the
following conditions apply with the
brake pedal is depressed:
At this time, one beep will be heard.

D When the selector lever is not in “P”
D When the accelerator pedal is not depressed

D When the parking brake is not applied
D When the vehicle is stopped
The system is designed to operate when
the vehicle is starting on uphill slope;
therefore, if the transmission selector lever is in “P”, it will not operate.

When the hill−start assist control system
is operating, the slip indicator light flashes
and the stoplights and high mounted stoplight are lit.
When any of the following is performed,
the system will stop operation. At this
time, two beeps will be heard and the slip
indicator light will go off.

D Shifting the selector lever to “P”
D Applying the parking brake
D Depressing the brake pedal
If the accelerator pedal is depressed, the
system will also stop operation without
beep sounds.

161

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

The hill−start assist control system operates for a maximum of 2 seconds. If the
vehicle is not started within 2 seconds,
two beeps will be heard and the system
will gradually stop operating.

The hill−start control system is not designed to park the vehicle on uphill slope.
When parking the vehicle, be sure to apply the parking brake.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the engine switch is turned
to the “ON” position. If the indicator light
does not come on when the engine switch
is turned to the “ON” position, contact
your Toyota dealer.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

D The warning light does not come on
when the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position.

D The warning light remains on after the
“VSC” warning light
This light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the following systems:

engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position.

D The warning light comes on while driving.

D Traction control system
D “AUTO LSD” system
D Enhanced vehicle stability control system

D Downhill assist control system
D Hill−start assist control system
When the engine switch is turned to the
“ON” position, the light will come on. If
the systems are work properly, the light
turns off after a few seconds.

162

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Tire pressure warning system
The tire pressure warning system warns
you that the tire inflation pressure is
low.

Indicator
status

The tire pressure warning system is not
a substitute for checking normal tire inflation pressure. Check the tire inflation
pressure with a tire pressure gauge regularly.

CAUTION
The warning system may not activate
immediately if blowout or sudden air
loss should occur.

Meanings

Do this

Tire inflation Adjust the
pressure is
tire inflation
low
pressure

ON after
blinking for
1 minute

Tire pressure warning system
malfunction

Have the
system
checked at
your Toyota
dealer

CAUTION
The tire pressure warning light comes on
when the engine switch is in “ON” position
and goes off after a few seconds. This
means the tire pressure warning system is
operating properly. If the tire inflation pressure becomes low, the light comes on
again. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the light after a
few minutes. If the light comes on after
blinking for 1 minute, the tire pressure
warning system is not working properly.

If the tire pressure warning light
comes on, be sure to observe the
following precautions. Failure to do
so could cause loss of vehicle control
and result in death or serious injury.

D Stop your vehicle in a safe place as

soon as possible. Adjust the tire
inflation pressure immediately.

163

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D If the tire pressure warning light

CAUTION

D Avoid abrupt maneuvering and bra-

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label (tire
and load information label). (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label
(tire and load information label), you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

comes on even after tire inflation
pressure adjustment, it is probable
that you have a flat tire. Check the
tires. If the tire is flat, change to
the spare tire and have the flat tire
repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.
king. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

The tire pressure warning light may turn
on due to natural causes such as natural
air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes
caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn
off the light after a few minutes.
The spare tire is also equipped with the
tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. The tire pressure warning light will
turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the
spare tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even
though the flat tire is replaced with the
spare tire, the warning light does not turn
off. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning
light will turn off after a few minutes.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS–
tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
(tire pressure warning light) when one
or more of your tires is significantly
under−inflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under−inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under−inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under−inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).

164

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS (tire pressure
warning system) malfunction indicator
is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning
light). When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start−ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system)
malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation
of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pressure
warning system) malfunction telltale
after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure
warning system) to continue to function properly.

NOTICE
z Do not use liquid sealants for a flat
tire as tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter will be damaged.
z When the tires must be repaired or
replaced, have them repaired or replaced by the nearest Toyota dealer
or an authorized tire dealer. The
tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters will be affected by the
installation or removal of tires.

IF THE TIRE PRESSURE WARNING
LIGHT COMES ON AFTER BLINKING
FOR 1 MINUTE···
If the tire pressure warning light comes
on after blinking for 1 minute when the
engine switch is in “ON” position, the
tire pressure warning system is not
working properly.
The system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the
system will work properly.)

D If tires not equipped with tire pressure
warning
used.

valves and

transmitters are

165

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D If the ID code on the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters is not
registered in the tire pressure warning
computer.

D If the tire inflation pressure is more

than 500 kPa (5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar, 73
psi).

The system may be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the
system will work properly.)

D If electronic devices or facilities using
similar radio
nearby.

wave

frequencies

are

D If a radio set at similar frequencies is
in use in the vehicle.

D If a window tint that affects the radio
wave signals is installed.

D If there is a lot of snow or ice on the
vehicle, in particular around the wheels
or wheel housings.

D If non−genuine Toyota wheels are used.
D If tire chains are used.
D If the spare tire is in a location subject
to poor radio wave signal reception.

If the tire pressure warning light continues
to come on after blinking for 1 minute
when the engine switch is in “ON” position, have the system checked by your
Toyota dealer.
Even if you use genuine wheels, the tire
pressure warning system may not work
properly with some types of tires.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:

D Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

D Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.

D If a large metallic object which can

interfere with signal reception is put in
the luggage compartment.

166

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Parking brake
D Connect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.

D Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

REPLACING TIRES AND WHEELS
When replacing the tires and wheels, be
sure to install tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters. ID codes on the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters
are registered in the tire pressure warning
computer. When replacing a tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Have
the ID code registered by your Toyota
dealer.
If the ID code is not registered, the system will not work properly. After driving
about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1
minute to indicate a system malfunction.

For the U.S.A.

NOTICE
When the tires or tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be
replaced, have them replaced by your
Toyota dealer. The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be
affected by the installation or removal
of tires.

For Canada

167

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Cruise control
When parking, firmly apply the parking
brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.
To set: Pull up the lever. For better holding power, first depress the brake pedal
and hold it while setting the parking
brake.
To release: Pull up the lever slightly (1),
press the lock release button (2), and lower (3).
To remind you that the parking brake is
set, the parking brake reminder light in
the instrument panel remains on until you
release the parking brake.

CAUTION
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the parking brake reminder light is off.

The cruise control is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruising speed can be set to any
speed above 40 km/h (25 mph).
Within the limits of the engine’s capabilities, cruising speed can be maintained up
or down grades. However, changes in vehicle speed may occur on steeper grades.

CAUTION

D To help maintain maximum control

of your vehicle, do not use the
cruise control when driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or
winding roads.

D Be careful about vehicle speed as
it may increase when driving downhill with the cruise control on.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
To turn the cruise control on, press the
“ON−OFF” button. The “CRUISE” indicator
light on the instrument panel will come on
to indicate that the cruise control is operational. Pressing the “ON−OFF” button
again turns the system off.
When the system is turned off, cruising
speed must be reset when the cruise control is turned on again.

168

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If you need acceleration—for example,
when passing—depress the accelerator
pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed
the set speed. When you release it, the
vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.

CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging the
cruise control, turn the system off
when it is not in use. Make sure the
“CRUISE” indicator light is off.

CANCELLING THE CRUISE CONTROL
The cruise control may be temporarily
cancelled by the driver or by the system
itself under certain circumstances. Temporary cancellation allows the set cruising
speed to remain in memory.
SETTING THE CRUISING SPEED

The cruise control can be temporarily cancelled by doing the following:

The transmission must be in “D”, “3”
(4−speed) or “4” (5−speed) before you set
the cruising speed.

D Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” di-

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,
push the lever down in the “− SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle
at that speed. If the speed is not satisfactory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,
or tap it down for a slower speed. Each
tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h
(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off
the accelerator pedal.

Under certain circumstances, the cruise
control is temporarily cancelled:

rection and releasing it

D Depressing the brake pedal
D When vehicle speed falls below 40
km/h (25 mph)

D When vehicle stability control is activated

When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10
mph) below the set speed, the cruise control is cancelled and the set speed is
erased from memory.

169

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

The “CRUISE” indicator light remains on
to indicate that the system is still in operation.
To turn the cruise control off, press the
“ON−OFF”
button.
Make
sure
the
“CRUISE” indicator light is off.
If the cruise control automatically cancels
out other than for the above cases, have
your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer at the earliest opportunity.
RESUMING THE CRUISE CONTROL
If the cruise control is temporarily cancelled, the cruising speed can be resumed
by pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”
direction.
Vehicle speed must be above 40 km/h (25
mph).
RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED
Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction
and hold it. Release the lever when the
desired speed is attained. While the lever
is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

Push the lever down in the “− SET” direction and hold it. Release the lever when
the desired speed is attained. While the
lever is held down, the vehicle speed will
gradually decrease.

If the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes
when using the cruise control, press the
“ON−OFF” button to turn the system off
and then press it again to turn it on.

A sound may occur due to brake operation while the vehicle speed is decreasing.
This does not indicate a malfunction.
However, a faster way to reset is to depress the brake pedal and then push the
lever down in the “− SET” direction.
Even if you downshift the transmission
from the “D” position to “3” (4−speed) or
“4” (5−speed) with the cruise control on,
engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled.
To decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a
slower speed with the cruise control lever
or depress the brake pedal. If you use the
brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.

If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some trouble in the cruise
control system.

D The indicator light does not come on.
D The indicator light flashes again.
D The indicator light goes out after it
comes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyota
dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

However, a faster way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then push the
lever down in the “− SET” direction.

170

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION

1− 8

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Audio and hands−free phone systems

Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using your audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat entertainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio/video system operating hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hands−free phone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

172
173
191
191
194
232
239

171

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Reference

Type 1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player
(with compact disc changer controller)

Type 2−1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player with changer (with XMr Satellite Radio∗
controller)

Type 2−2: AM·FM radio/compact disc player with changer (with XMr Satellite Radio∗
controller)
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

172

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Using your audio system—
—Some basics
This section describes some of the basic
features on Toyota audio systems. Some
information may not pertain to your system.
Your audio system works when the engine
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off.
Push “AM”, “AM·SAT”∗, “FM1”, “FM2” or
“DISC·AUX” to turn on that function without pushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn on the
compact disc player, a compact disc must
be loaded in the player.
You can turn on compact disc player by
inserting a compact disc.
You can turn off the compact disc player
by ejecting the compact disc. If the audio
system was previously off, then the entire
audio system will be turned off when you
eject the compact disc. If other function
was previously playing, it will come on
again.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS
Push “AM”, “AM·SAT”∗, “FM1”, “FM2”,
“DISC·AUX” if the system is already on
but you want to switch from one function
to other.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

LISTENING TO THE XMr SATELLITE
RADIO BROADCAST∗ (type 2−1 and 2−2)
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in
your vehicle, an additional genuine Toyota
satellite receiver and antenna (or equivalents) must be purchased and installed. A
subscription to the XMr Satellite Radio
service is also necessary.
How to subscribe to an XMr Satellite
Radio
An XMr Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts
provided under a separate subscription.
Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous
U.S. states and 10 Canadian provinces.

How to subscribe:
You must enter into a separate service
agreement with the XMr Satellite Radio in
order to receive satellite broadcast programming in the vehicle. Additional activation and service subscription fees apply
that are not included in the purchase price
of the vehicle and optional digital satellite
tuner. For complete information on subscription rates and terms, or to subscribe
to the XMr Satellite Radio,
U.S.A.—
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or
call 1−800−967−2346.
Canada—
Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call
1−877−438−9677.
The XMr Satellite Radio is solely responsible for the quality, availability and content of the satellite radio services provided, which are subject to the terms and
conditions of the XMr Satellite Radio customer service agreement.
Customers should have their radio ID
ready; the radio ID can be found by tuning to “channel 000” on the radio. For
details, see “Displaying the radio ID” below.

173

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

All fees and programming are the responsibility of the XMr Satellite Radio and are
subject to change.
Satellite tuner technology notice:
Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are awarded
Type Approval Certificates from XMr Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibility
with the services offered by the XMr
Satellite Radio.

TONE AND BALANCE

Tone

For details about your system’s tone and
balance controls, see the description of
your own system.

How good an audio program sounds to
you is largely determined by the mix of
the treble, midrange (type 2−2) and bass
levels. In fact, different kinds of music
and vocal programs usually sound better
with different mixes of treble, midrange
and bass.

SRS

Balance

Displaying the radio ID

A good balance of the left and right stereo
channels and of the front and rear sound
levels is also important.

Each XMr tuner is identified with a unique
radio ID. You will need the radio ID when
activating XMr service or when reporting
a problem.
If you select the “CH 000” using the
“TUNE·FILE” knob, the ID code of 8 alphanumeric characters appears. If you select another channel, display of the ID
code is canceled. The channel (000) alternates the display between the radio ID
and the specific radio ID code.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

Type 1 and 2−1 audio systems utilize SRS
FOCUSr and SRS TruBassr audio
enhancement technologies, under license
from SRS Labs, Inc., in all modes except
AM radio mode.
FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and
r symbols are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
FOCUS and TruBass technologies are incorporated under
license from SRS Labs, Inc.

Keep in mind that if you are listening to
a stereo recording or broadcast, changing
the right/left balance will increase the volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of other.
YOUR RADIO ANTENNA
Your vehicle has a mast type antenna.
To remove the antenna, carefully turn it
counterclockwise.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the antenna,
make sure it is removed before driving your Toyota through an automatic
car wash.

174

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)
When you insert a disc, gently push it in
with the label side up. The player will play
from track 1 through to the end of the
disc. Then it will play from track 1 again.

NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.
YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH
CHANGER (type 2)
When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”
button and gently push the disc in with
the label side up. This compact disc player can store up to six discs. The player
will play from track 1 through to the end
of the disc. Then it will play from track
1 of the next disc.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE
z Do not stack up two discs for insertion, or it will cause damage to
the compact disc changer. Insert
only one compact disc into slot at
a time.
z Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything except a compact disc into the slot.

175

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Controls and features
"Type 1
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

176

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio
and select the AM band. “AM” will appear
on the display.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the station to the button. The button number will appear on the display.
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The button number and station frequency will appear on
the display.
These systems can store one AM and two
FM stations for each button. (The display
will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you
push “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)
(Eject button)
Push the compact disc eject button to
eject a compact disc.
(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound balance adjustment function)
Each
time
you push
the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob, the mode changes. To
adjust the tone and balance, turn the
knob.
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can
be turned on by turning the knob. In addition, turning the knob allows you to select
from LOW, MID, and HIGH volume and
tone settings. The ASL system automatically adjusts volume and tone in accordance with the driving speed. This helps
ensure an optimal listening experience
even if noise levels rise while driving.
DISC·AUX (Compact disc)
Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a
compact disc.
When the audio system is set into compact disc operation, the display shows the
track, or track and disc number currently
being played.
To switch between CD and AUX (external
device) modes, press the “DISC·AUX” button. The AUX mode is only available when
AUX adapter is connected to the system.
When the AUX adapter is in use, “AUX”
will appear on the display.

Push and hold “
” (preset button 6) or
“
” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.

177

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Error messages

Ɲ DISC Ɯ

FM1 FM2

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display following error messages.

With compact disc changer only—

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on
the radio and select the FM band. “FM1”
or “FM2” will appear on the display. This
system allows you to set twelve FM stations, two for each of the preset button.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.
“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up−side
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.
“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of
separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system. Eject the disc or magazine.
Set the disc or magazine again.
“ERROR 4”: Over−current.
Toyota dealer to inspect.

Ask

your

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer
lid of separate unit is open. Close the
compact disc changer lid.
If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,
it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA
data has been inserted. Remove the disc
from the player and insert an MP3/WMA
data disc.
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Use these buttons to select the disc you
want to listen to.
Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset
button 4) until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.
Dolbyr

NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that was
recorded with Dolbyr B Noise Reduction,
push “ ” (preset button 3). “
” will
appear on the display. Push the button
again to turn off Dolbyr B NR.
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise
by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduction, play your tapes with this button on
or off according to the mode used to record the tape.
∗ : Dolby digital
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double−D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished
works.

FOLDER (Folder up/down)
To skip up or down to a different folder:
Push either side of the “FOLDER” several
times until the number of the folder you
want to listen to appears on the display.
To jump to the first file in the first folder:
Push and hold the “Ɲ” side of the button
until you hear a beep.
When playing a disc featuring both audio
data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio
data (CD−DA) is played.
PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
volume.

(c) 1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
This product incorporates copyright protection technology
that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents
and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision
Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision
Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

178

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

RAND (Random)

MP3/WMA player

Compact disc player

There are two random playback features—
you can either listen to all of the files on
the compact discs in random order. You
can also listen to the files in a single
folder in random order.

There are two random features—you can
either listen to the tracks on one compact
disc in random order, or listen to the
tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order.
To play the tracks on one disc in random
order:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
” will appear on the
button 1). “
display and the player will perform the
tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.
With compact disc changer only—
To play all the tracks in the magazine in
random order:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
” will apuntil you hear a beep. “
pear on the display and the player will
perform all the tracks on all the discs in
the magazine in random order. To turn off
the random feature, push this button
again.

To randomly play the files in a folder:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
” will appear on the
button 1). “
display.
To randomly play all of the files on the
compact disc:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
” will
until you hear a beep. “
appear on the display and the player will
play all of the files on the disc in random
order. To turn off the random playback
feature, push this button again.
RPT (Repeat)
Compact disc player
There are two repeat features—you can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.

Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the track is playing.
” will appear on the display. When
“
the track ends, it will automatically replay.
To turn off the repeat feature, push this
button again.
With compact disc changer only—
Repeating a disc:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display. The player will repeat
all the tracks on the disc you are listening
to. When the disc ends, the player will
automatically go back to the first track on
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
feature, push this button again.
MP3/WMA player
There are two repeat features—you can
repeat a signal file or an entire folder.
Repeating a file:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the file is playing.
” will appear on the display. When
“
the file ends, it will repeat automatically.
This process will be continued until you
push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.

179

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Repeating a folder:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
” will apuntil you hear a beep. “
pear on the display. The player will repeat
all of the files in the folder. When the last
file in the folder ends, the folder will repeat from the beginning. To turn off the
repeat feature, push this button again.
SCAN
Radio
You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.
To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold “SCAN” until you hear a
beep. The radio will tune in the next preset station up or down the band, stay there
for 5 seconds, and then move to the next
preset station. To stop scanning, push this
button again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release “SCAN”. The
radio will find the next station up or down
the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
and then scan again to the next station.
To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.

There are two scan features—you can either scan the files in a folder on a specific disc or scan the first file of all the
folder.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:
Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”
will appear on the display and the player
will scan up or down all the tracks on the
disc you are listening to. To stop scanning, push this button again. If the player
scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will
stop scanning.

Scanning the files on a folder:
Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”
will appear on the display and the player
will scan all the files in the folder you are
listening to. To select a file, push the
“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on the
disc have been scanned in one pass, normal play resumes.

The discs in the compact disc changer
can be scanned up only.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:
Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.
“ SCAN” will appear on the display and
the player will scan the first file of the
next folder. To select a folder, push the
“SCAN” again. After all the folders have
been scanned in one pass, normal play
resumes.

With compact disc changer only—
Scanning the first tracks of all the discs
in the magazine:
Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.
“ SCAN” will appear on the display and
the player will scan up or down the first
track of the next disc. To stop scanning,
push this button again. If the auto changer
has scanned all the discs, it will stop
scanning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)
Radio
In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.

180

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
“SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to
find the station after that.
Compact disc player
Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.
Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/
TRACK” button until the number of the
track you want to listen to appears on the
display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, quickly push the
down side of the button one time.
MP3/WMA player
To file up or down to a different file:
Push either side of the “SEEK/TRACK”
several times until the file you want to
listen to appears on the display. If you
want to return to the beginning of the
current file, push the “Ɲ” side of the button one time, quickly.
To fast forward or reverse the disc:
If you want to fast forward or reverse the
disc, push and hold it until you hear a
beep. When you release the button, the
player will resume playing.

ST (Stereo reception) display

MP3/WMA player

Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono reception.

This button is used to change the display
for the MP3/WMA file that contains text
data.

TEXT
Compact disc player
This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while a compact
disc that does not contain text data is
playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
If the entire disc or track title does not
appear on the display, push and hold the
button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the title will appear.

To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the
MP3/WMA file is playing. The display
changes in the order from the elapsed
time to folder name to file name to album
title to track title to artist name, then back
to the elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while an
MP3/WMA file that does not contain text
data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on
the display.
If the entire text data is not displayed,
push and hold it until you hear a beep.
The rest of the text data will appear.
TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)
Radio
Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
step up the frequency. Turn the knob
counterclockwise to step down the frequency.
MP3/WMA player
Turn the knob clockwise to file up. Turn
the knob counterclockwise to file down.

181

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

"Type 2−1
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

182

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

"Type 2−2
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

183

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or
“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the station to the button. The preset button number will appear on the display.
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The preset button number and station frequency will appear on the display.
This radio can store one AM and two FM
stations for each button. (The display will
show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you
push “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)
(Eject button)
This button is used to eject one or all
compact discs.
To eject the current compact disc, push
and release the compact disc eject button.
To eject a specific disc, push “Ɲ” (preset
button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset button 4) until the
number of the disc you want to eject is
displayed. Push and release the eject button.

To eject all discs at a time, press and
hold the eject button until you hear a
beep. The last compact disc played before
pushing the button will be ejected first. If
the ejected disc is not removed for a long
time, the eject function will be cancelled.
(Reverse/Fast−forward button)
Push and hold “
” (preset button 6) or
“
” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
AM·SAT (AM band and XMr Satellite
Radio∗)
Push the “AM·SAT” button to turn on the
radio and select the AM or XMr band.
“AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” will appear on the display.
Error messages
If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,
your audio system will display following
error messages.
“ANTENNA”:

D The XMr antenna is not connected.

Check whether the XMr antenna cable
is attached securely.

D A short−circuit occurs in the antenna or

the surrounding antenna cable. See a
Toyota certified dealer.

“UPDATING”:

D You have not subscribed to the XMr

Satellite Radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.
Contact the XMr Satellite Radio for
subscription information. When a contact is canceled, you can choose the
“CH000” and all free−to−air channels.

D The premium channel you selected is

not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does
not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the
premium channel, contact the XMr Satellite Radio.

“NO SIGNAL”: The XMr signal is too
weak at the current location. Wait until
your vehicle reaches a location with a
stronger signal.
“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audio
or program information. Wait until the unit
has received the information.
“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected is
not broadcasting any programming. Select
another channel.

184

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

“− − −”: The channel you selected is no
longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds
until the radio returns to the previous
channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel.
The XMr Listener Care Center is also
available on the phone, please call
1−800−967−2346
(U.S.A.)
or
1−877−438−9677 (Canada).
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound balance adjustment function)
Each
time
you push
the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob, the mode changes. To
adjust the tone and balance, turn the
knob.
Type 2−1—
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.
ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can
be turned on by turning the knob. In addition, turning the knob allows you to select
from LOW, MID, and HIGH volume and
tone settings. The ASL system automatically adjusts volume and tone in accordance with the driving speed. This helps
ensure an optimal listening experience
even if noise levels rise while driving.
Type 2−2—
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can
be turned on by turning the knob. The
ASL system automatically adjusts volume
and tone in accordance with ambient noise
levels. This helps ensure an optimal listening experience even when road, wind
or other ambient noise levels rise.
RSE: Vehicles with a rear seat entertainment system—See “Rear seat entertainment system” on page 194 in this Section.
DISC·AUX (Compact disc)
Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a
compact disc.
When the audio system is set into compact disc operation, the display shows the
track, or track and disc number currently
being played.
Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—
The “DISC·AUX” button may also be used
to operate the DVD player when a disc is
in
the
DVD
player.
Pressing
the
“DISC·AUX” button allows you to switch
between the CD player and the DVD player. When the DVD player is in operation,
“RSE DVD” appears on the display.

185

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Vehicles with AUX adapter—
To switch between CD, DVD, and AUX
(external device) modes, press the
“DISC·AUX” button. The AUX mode is only
available when AUX adapter is connected
to the system. When the AUX adapter is
in use, “AUX” will appear on the display.

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,
it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA
data has been inserted. Remove the disc
from the player and insert an MP3/WMA
data disc.
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Error messages

Ɲ DISC Ɯ

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display following error messages.

Use these buttons to select a disc you
want to listen to.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.

Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset
button 4) until the number of the disc you
want to listen to appears on the display.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up−side
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

FM1 FM2

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of
separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system. Eject the disc or magazine.
Set the disc or magazine again.

TYPE/FOLDER (Type/Folder up/down)
Radio
XMr Satellite Radio∗—
When you push the “Ɲ” or “Ɯ” side of
the “TYPE/FOLDER” button while receiving
a XMr channel, the current channel category appears on the display.
When the channel category appears, push
either
“Ɲ”
or
“Ɯ”
side
of
the
“TYPE/FOLDER” button to switch to the
next or previous category.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XMr
tuner and service. Contact your Toyota
dealer for details.

MP3/WMA player
To skip up or down to a different folder:
Push
“Ɯ”
or
“Ɲ”
side
of
the
“TYPE/FOLDER” several times until the
number of the folder you want to listen to
appears on the display.

your

To jump to the first file in the first folder:
Push and hold the “Ɲ” side of the button
until you hear a beep.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer
lid of separate unit is open. Close the
compact disc changer lid.

When playing a disc featuring both audio
data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio
data (CD−DA) is played.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current.
Toyota dealer to inspect.

Ask

186

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

LOAD

RAND (Random)

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to load the compact
discs in the compact disc player. This
player can store up to six discs.

Compact disc player

There are two random playback features—
you can either listen to all of the files on
the compact discs in random order. You
can also listen to the files in a single
folder in random order.

To load one compact
push and release the
a compact disc. After
the shutter of the slot

disc only, quickly
button, then insert
the disc is loaded,
will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.
To load multiple compact discs, push and
hold the button (until you hear a beep
when the audio system is on). When the
indicators on both sides of the slot turn
green, insert the first compact disc. After
the disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot
will close. After a few seconds, the shutter will automatically open again and the
indicators will turn green so the next disc
can be inserted. The same process can
be applied for loading the rest of the
discs. If the player is full of discs, “DISC
FULL” will appear on the display.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.

There are two random features—you can
either listen to the tracks on one compact
disc in random order, or listen to the
tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order.
To play the tracks on one disc in random
order:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
” will appear on the
button 1). “
display and the player will perform the
tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.
To play all the tracks in the magazine in
random order:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
” will apuntil you hear a beep. “
pear on the display and the player will
perform all the tracks on all the discs in
the magazine in random order. To turn off
the random feature, push this button
again.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)
Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system
on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the
volume.

187

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

RPT (Repeat)

MP3/WMA player

SCAN

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can
repeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Radio

There are two repeat features—you can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the track is playing.
” will appear on the display. When
“
the track ends, it will automatically replay.
To turn off the repeat feature, push this
button again.
Repeating a disc:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
” will apuntil you hear a beep. “
pear on the display. The player will repeat
all the tracks on the disc you are listening
to. When the disc ends, the player will
automatically go back to the first track on
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
feature, push this button again.

Repeating a file:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the file is playing.
” will appear on the display. When
“
the file ends, it will repeat automatically.
This process will be continued until you
push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
Repeating a folder:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
” will apuntil you hear a beep. “
pear on the display. The player will repeat
all of the files in the folder. When the last
file in the folder ends, the folder will repeat from the beginning. To turn off the
repeat feature, push this button again.

You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.
To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold “SCAN” until you hear a
beep. The radio will tune in the next preset station up or down the band, stay there
for 5 seconds, and then move to the next
preset station. To stop scanning, push this
button again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release “SCAN”. The
radio will find the next station up or down
the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
and then scan again to the next station.
To stop scanning, push this button again.

188

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Compact disc player

MP3/WMA player

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.

There are two scan features—you can either scan the files in a folder on a specific disc or scan the first file of all the
folder.

Radio

To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
“SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to
find the station after that.

The discs in the compact disc changer of
separate unit can be scanned up only.

Push
“Ɯ”
or
“Ɲ”
side
of
the
“SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of
the track you want to listen to appears on
the display. If you want to return to the
beginning of the current track, quickly
push the down side of the button one
time.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs
in the magazine:
Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.
“ SCAN” will appear on the display and
the player will scan up or down the first
track of the next disc. To stop scanning,
push this button again. If the auto changer
has scanned all the discs, it will stop
scanning.
The discs in the compact disc changer of
separate unit can be scanned up only.

In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.

Compact disc player
Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—
While the rear DVD player is in operation,
the chapter or track can be changed by
pushing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
“SEEK·TRACK” button.

189

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

MP3/WMA player

TEXT

MP3/WMA player

To file up or down to a different file:
Push either side of the “SEEK/TRACK”
several times until the file you want to
listen to appears on the display. If you
want to return to the beginning of the
current file, push the “Ɲ” side of the button one time.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display
for the MP3/WMA file that contains text
data.

To fast forward or reverse the disc:
If you want to fast forward or reverse the
disc, push and hold it until you hear a
beep. When you release the button, the
player will resume playing.
Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—
While the rear DVD player is in operation,
the chapter or track can be changed by
pushing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
“SEEK·TRACK” button.
ST (Stereo reception) display
Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono reception.

This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact
disc that does not contain text data is
playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.

If this button is pushed while an
MP3/WMA file that does not contain text
data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on
the display.

If the entire disc or track title does not
appear on the display, push and hold the
button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the title will appear.

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

If the entire text data is not displayed,
push and hold it until you hear a beep.
The rest of the text data will appear.
Radio
Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
step up the frequency. Turn the knob
counterclockwise to step down the frequency.
MP3/WMA

player

Turn the knob clockwise to file up. Turn
the knob counterclockwise to file down.

190

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Audio remote controls
(steering switches)

AUX adapter
If you install an audio system other than
a genuine audio system, you will not be
able to use the AUX adapter.

An AUX adapter is installed in the rear
console box.
By inserting a mini plug into the AUX
adapter, you can listen to music from a
portable audio device through the vehicle’s
speaker system.
To use the AUX adapter, switch to the
AUX mode (external device mode) by
pressing the “DISC·AUX” button. When the
AUX adapter is in use, “AUX” will appear
on the display. To adjust the volume, turn
the “PWR·VOL” knob.

Some parts of the audio system can be
adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel.
Details of the specific switches, controls,
and features are described below.
1. “+ −” switch
2. “MODE” switch
3. “Ɯ Ɲ” switch

When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet or cigarette
lighter, noise may occur during playback.
If this happens, use the power source of
the portable audio device.

191

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

“+ −” switch

“Ɯ Ɲ” switch

Compact disc player

Push “+” side to increase the volume. The
volume continues to increase while the
switch is being pushed.

Radio

To select a desired track:
Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”
side of the switch until the track you want
to listen to is set. If you want to return
to the beginning of the current track, push
the “Ɲ” side of the switch once, quickly.

Push “−” side to decrease the volume.
The volume continues to decrease while
the switch is being pushed.
“MODE” switch
Push “MODE” switch to select an audio
mode. Each push changes the mode sequentially if the desired mode is ready to
use.
To turn the audio system on, push the
“MODE” switch.
To turn the audio system off, push and
hold the “MODE” switch until the system
turns off.

To select a preset station:
Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”
side of the switch. Do this again to select
the next preset station.
To seek a station:
Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
switch until you hear a beep. Do this
again to find the next station. If you push
the switch on either side during the seek
mode, seeking will be cancelled.
To step up or down the frequency, push
and hold the switch even after you hear
a beep. When you release from the
switch, the radio will begin seeking up or
down for a station. Do this again to find
the next station.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—
While the rear DVD player is in operation,
the chapter or track can be changed by
pushing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the switch.
With compact disc changer only—
To select a desired disc:
Push and hold the “Ɲ” or “Ɯ” side of the
switch until you hear a beep. Repeat this
until the disc you wish to listen to is set.

192

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

MP3/WMA player
To select a desired file:
Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”
side of the switch until the file you want
to listen to is set. If you want to return
to the beginning of the current file, push
the “Ɲ” side of the switch once, quickly.
To select a desired folder:
Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
switch until you hear a beep. Repeat this
until the folder you want to listen to is
set.
Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system—
While the rear DVD player is in operation,
the file can be changed by pushing the
“Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the switch.
With compact disc changer only—
To select a desired disc:
Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
switch until you hear a beep. Repeat this
until the disc you want to listen to is set.

193

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Rear seat entertainment system—
The rear seat entertainment system consists of the following components.
1. Front audio system∗
2. DVD player
3. Rear seat entertainment system display
4. Rear seat entertainment system
controller
5. A/V input adapter
6. Power outlet (115 VAC)
7. Audio remote control switches∗
8. Power outlet main switch
∗:

For details, see “—Controls and features” on page 176 or “Audio remote controls” on page 191 in this section.

194

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Display
The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to enjoy
audio and DVD video separately from the
front audio system.
The rear seat entertainment system can
be operated when the engine switch is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position.
The rear passengers can enjoy DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CD text, dts−CD
and MP3.
The rear seat entertainment system can
play DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CD
text, dts−CD or MP3 only when a disc is
loaded in the DVD player.
You can enjoy videos and sound when
your personal audio system is connected
to the A/V input adapter. For details, refer
to the manufacturer’s instructions.
You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment
system with a wireless headphone. The
wireless headphone can be used within
rear seat. If the signal becomes weak, the
headphone will mute. For details, refer to
the manufacturer’s instructions.

You can purchase a wireless headphone
at a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

D Do not operate a motor vehicle
while using headphones. Doing so
may cause an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.

D With DVD player:
Conversational speech on some
DVDs is recorded at a low volume
to emphasize the impact of sound
effects. If you adjust the volume
assuming that the conversations
represent the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may
be startled by louder sound effects
or when you change to a different
audio source. Be sure to adjust the
volume with this in mind.

To open the display, push the lock release
button.

Make sure the volume is not increased, before you turn on the
headphone.

With some wireless headphone generally
available in the market, it may be difficult
to catch sound properly. Toyota recommends the use of Toyota genuine wireless
headphone.

195

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

NOTICE
z Benzene or alkaline solutions may
damage the coated surface of the
screen.
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not turn on the rear
seat entertainment system longer
than necessary when the engine is
not running.

Pull the display down to an easily viewable angle (between 90_ and 125_)

NOTICE
The screen should be cleaned with a
dry soft cloth. If the screen is pushed
by hand or wiped with a hard cloth,
the surface of the screen may be
scratched.

To close, push the display up until you
hear a click.
The illumination of the screen is automatically turned off when the display is
closed. However, the rear seat entertainment system is not turned off.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop
while driving, close the display when
it is not in use.

196

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Rear seat entertainment
system controller
The rear seat entertainment system can
be operated with the rear seat entertainment system controller and buttons on the
DVD player unit. The system cannot be
operated by touching the switches on the
screen directly.

CAUTION

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER
(for new vehicle owners)
A battery is already set in the controller with an insulating sheet, which prevents the battery from being discharged. Before using the controller,
remove the insulating sheet according
to the following procedure.

Do not disassemble or modify the
controller. It may cause an accident,
fire or electric shock.

NOTICE
Keep the controller away from direct
sunlight, high heat and high humidity.
These conditions could cause the
case to deform or the battery to explode or leak.

1. Remove the cover of the controller
as shown.

197

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

USING THE CONTROLLER
To use the rear seat entertainment system controller, direct the signal output
portion of the controller to the signal
reception portion of the rear seat entertainment system display.
The controller does not operate properly
when the signal reception portion of the
display is exposed to direct sunlight.
Block the display from direct sunlight.

CAUTION
2. Remove the insulating sheet.

To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop
while driving, stow the controller in
the console box or front seat side
table when it is not in use.

198

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

NOTICE
Observe the followings, otherwise the
controller may be damaged.
z Do not drop or strongly knock the
controller against hard objects.
z Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the controller.
z Do not leave the controller exposed
to high temperatures (such as on
the instrument panel) for a long
time.

199

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Control buttons
"Controller
1. “DVD” button
This button turns on the DVD mode.
2. “VIDEO” button
This button causes the display to use
the video signal from an external video
device.
3. “OFF” button
This button turns off the rear seat entertainment system.
4. Joystick
This joystick selects a control switch,
mode switch on the screen or the
menu for the disc.
5. “ENT” button
This button inputs the selected switch
or the selected menu for the disc.
6. “FOLDER

” button

This button selects a desired folder.
7. “FOLDER

” button

This button selects a desired folder.
8. “

” button

This button fast forwards a screen
when the DVD player is operated.

200

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

9. “

” button

This button stops a screen when the
DVD player is operated.
10. “SET UP” button
This button indicates the initial set up
screen when the DVD player is operated.
11. “MENU” button
This button indicates the menu screen
for DVD video when the DVD player is
operated.
12. “AUDIO” button
This button indicates the changing audio screen when the DVD player is
operated.
13. “SUB TITLE” button
This button indicates the changing subtitle screen when the DVD player is
operated.
14. “DISPLAY” button
This button adjusts the color, tone,
contrast and brightness of the screen.
15. “SIZE” button
This button changes the display mode
when the DVD player is operated.

16. “ANGLE” button

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

This button selects the angle of the
screen when the DVD player is operated.
17. “SEARCH” button
This button indicates the title search
screen when the DVD player is operated.
18. “TOP MENU” button
This button indicates the title selection
screen for DVD video when the DVD
player is operated.
19. “

” button

This button reverse a screen when the
DVD player is operated.
20. “"

” button

This button plays or pauses a screen
when the DVD player is operated.
21. “TRACK/CHAPTER

For replacement, use 3 AA batteries.

CAUTION
Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing
the removed battery or components.

NOTICE
z When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the components.
z Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by a
Toyota dealer.
z Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.

” button

This button selects track/chapter.
22. “TRACK/CHAPTER

” button

This button selects track/chapter.
23. “OPTION” button
This button indicates the control
switches on the screen when the DVD
player is operated.

201

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

NOTICE
z Be sure that the positive side and
negative side of the controller battery should be faced correctly.
z Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause rust.
z Do not touch or move any components inside of the controller, or it
may interfere with proper operation.
z Be careful not to bend the electrode
of the controller battery insertion.
Replace the battery according to the following procedure:
1. Remove the cover of the controller as
shown.

2. Remove the discharged batteries and
put in the new batteries as shown.
Install the cover.

z Close the battery case securely.
After replacing the battery, check that the
controller operates properly. If the controller still does not operate properly, contact
your Toyota dealer.

202

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Turning the rear seat
entertainment system on and
off

—Operating the rear DVD
player using the front audio
system
While the rear DVD player is in operation,
the chapter or track can be changed by
pushing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the
“SEEK/TRACK” button.
For details, see “—Controls and features”
on page 176 in this Section.

To turn on the system, push the “DVD”
button or “VIDEO” button.

To turn off the system, push the “OFF”
button.

When the “DVD” button is pushed, the
disc load screen changes to the DVD
player operation screen.

When the front audio system is turned off,
the rear audio system and the DVD player
will be turned off simultaneously.

When the “VIDEO” button is pushed, the
images and sounds from the personal audio machine are output.
The “DVD” button is effective only when
a disc is inserted.

203

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Rear system lock

—DVD player

The audio system controls in the instrument panel can be used to disable the
operation of the rear seat entertainment
system by rear seat passengers.

The DVD player can play audio CDs/
MP3 CDs, DVD video discs, CD texts,
dts−CDs and video CDs.
For appropriate discs for this player, see
“Audio/video system operating hints” on
page 232 in this Section.

Turning on the rear system lock prevents
small children from using the remote controller or operation panel of the DVD player unit to operate the rear seat entertainment system during driving.
Turn the audio system on. Push the
“AUDIO CONTROL” knob repeatedly until
“RSE” is displayed. Next, turn the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob until “ON” is displayed,
and then push the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob.

The DVD player works when the engine
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
To turn on the DVD player, a disc must
be loaded in the player.
To turn off the player, eject the disc.
Error messages
When the rear system lock is on and any
button is pushed on the remote controller
or the operation panel, the screen shown
above is displayed for approximately 6
seconds.
Even when the rear system lock is turned
on during play mode, the images and
sounds continue without interruption.
The condition of the rear system lock is
maintained, even when the engine switch
is turned off.

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display following error messages.
If “DISC CHECK” appears on the
screen: It indicates that the disc is dirty,
damaged or it was inserted upside down.
Clean the disc or insert it correctly.
If “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on
the screen: It indicates that the DVD region code is not set properly.
If “DVD ERROR” appears on the
screen: There is a problem inside the
player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

204

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If a disc which is not playable is inserted,
“DISC CHECK” will also appear on the
screen. For appropriate discs for this player, see “Audio/video system operating
hints” on page 232 in this Section.
The player will play the track or chapter,
and it will play from the beginning of the
track or chapter again after it reaches the
end.

8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles
Your compact disc player needs an adaptor to play compact disc singles. Compact
disc singles are about 8 cm (3 in.) in
diameter−smaller than standard discs.

NOTICE

INSERTING THE DISC
Insert a disc into the slot with the label
side up.

Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the DVD player. Do not insert
anything other than a disc into the
slot.

“DISC” indicator light turns on while the
disc is loaded.
If the label faces down, the disc cannot
be played. In this case, “DISC CHECK”
and disc number appear on the screen.

205

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—DVD player operation
switches

EJECTING THE DISC
Push the “

” button.

The DVD player can be operated with the
controller buttons directly.

The player can also be operated with the
switches on the screen.

1. “DVD” button

To operate the switches on the screen,
select the switch by the joystick and push
the “ENT” button. You cannot select the
switches on the screen by touching them
directly.

2. “SET UP” button
3. “MENU” button
4. “AUDIO” button
5. “SUB TITLE” button
6. “ANGLE” button
7. “SIZE” button
8. “SEARCH” button

When the switch is selected by the joystick, the outline of the switch changes to
blue. Push the “ENT” button, and the
switch will be highlighted in green.

9. “TOP MENU” button
10. “"

”, “

”, “AA” and “""” buttons

206

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

TURNING THE OPERATION SWITCHES
ON AND OFF

Top page (DVD video operation switch)

Top page (video CD)

Second
switch)

Second page (video CD)

To turn on the operation switches, push
the “OPTION” button on the controller.

page

(DVD

video

operation

207

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

There are operation switches on the “Page
1” and “Page 2” screens.
To change the screen, push the “Page 1”
or “Page 2” switch on the screen.

If “ ” appears on the screen when
you select a switch, it indicates that
the switch cannot work.

On the screen

Controller

208

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—DVD player operation
To turn off the switches on the screen,
push the “OPTION” button on the controller once again or push the “Hide Buttons”
on the screen.

NOTE: The playback condition of some
DVD video discs may be determined by
the DVD video software producer. This
DVD player plays discs as the software
producer intended. Therefore, some
functions may not work properly. Be
sure to read the instruction manual for
the DVD video disc separately provided.
For detailed information about DVD
video discs, see “—DVD video disc
information” on page 229 in this
Section.
Precautions for DVD video discs
When recording on a DVD video, video
CD or audio tracks may not record in
some cases while the menu is displayed.
As audio will not play in this case, verify
that the video tracks are playing and then
activate playback.

CAUTION
Conversational speech on some DVDs
is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects.
If you adjust the volume assuming
that the conversations represent the
maximum volume level available for
the DVD, you may be startled by
louder sound effects or when you
change to a different audio source.
Loud sounds may have a significant
impact on the human body or pose a
driving hazard. Keep this in mind
when you adjust the volume.

The title/chapter number and playback
time display may not appear while playing
back certain DVD video discs.

209

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

TURNING THE MENU SCREEN FOR THE
DISC ON OR OFF
To turn on the menu screen for the disc,
push the “Top Menu” or the “Menu” switch
on the screen. You can also turn on the
menu screen by pushing the “MENU” or
“TOP MENU” button on the controller.
For the operation of the menu screen, see
the separate manual for the DVD disc.

You can select the menu for the disc by
the joystick and the “ENT” button on the
controller.

210

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

OPERATING THE “" ”, “ ”, “AA”
AND “""” SWITCHES/BUTTONS
“" ” switch/button: Push this switch/button to pause the disc or to cancel the
pause and return to normal playing.
“ ” switch/button: This switch/button
stops a screen when the DVD player is
operated.
“AA” and “""” switches/buttons: Push
and hold the “AA” or “""” switch/button
to fast forward or reverse. When you release the switch/button, the DVD player
will resume playing.
Push the “""” switch/button while pausing, the DVD video plays the slow−motion
video replay.

211

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SKIPPING
SCREEN

THE

PREDETERMINED

To skip to the predetermined screen, push
the “Return” switch. The DVD player starts
playing from the beginning of the predetermined screen.

SELECTING THE TITLE
To display the searching title screen, push
the “Search” switch on the screen. You
can also display the screen by pushing
the “SEARCH” button on the controller.

For further details of the predetermined
screen, see the separate manual for the
DVD disc.

212

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
Push the “Sub Title” switch on the screen,
and then the changing subtitle language
screen will appear. You can also display
the screen by pushing the “SUB TITLE”
button on the controller.

Select the title number by using the
joystick and push the “ENT” button to
enter the number. The player starts playing disc for that title number. The selected
title number will appear on the screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
menu screen.

213

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CHANGING AUDIO LANGUAGE
Push the “Audio” switch on the screen
and then the changing audio language
screen will appear. You can also display
the screen by pushing the “AUDIO” button
on the controller.

Each time you push the “Sub Title” switch,
another language stored on the disc is
selected.
To turn off the subtitles, push the “Hide
Buttons” switch.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.
The selected subtitle language will appear
on the screen.

214

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CHANGING ANGLE SCREEN
Push the “Angle” switch on the screen,
and then the changing angle screen will
appear. You can also display the screen
by pushing the “ANGLE” button on the
controller.

Each time you push the “Audio” switch,
another language stored on the disc is
selected.
To turn off the audio language screen,
push the “Hide Buttons” switch.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.
The selected audio language will appear
on the screen.

215

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING
Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen,
and then the initial setting screen will appear. You can also display the screen by
pushing the “SET UP” button on the controller. You can change the initial setting.
After the setting is done, the player plays
from the beginning of the chapter or the
track.

The angle can be selected for discs that
are multi−angle compatible when the “
”
mark appears on the screen. Each time
you push the “Angle” switch, the angle
changes. The angle number which you
can select will appear on the screen.
To turn off the screen, push the “Hide
Buttons” switch.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
previous screen.

216

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Setup Menu screen

There are initial setting switches on the
“Setup Menu” screen.
After you change the initial setting, push
the “Enter” switch. The initial setting
switch will be turned off and return to the
picture previously.
When the “Default” switch is pushed, all
menus are initialized.

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE
Push the “Audio Language” switch on the
“Setup Menu” and the “Select Audio
Lang.” screen appears.
Select the language you want to hear by
pushing the appropriate switch on the
screen.
To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,
push the “Back” switch.
If you cannot find the language you want
to hear, push the “Others” switch. The
“Enter Audio Lang. Code” screen will appear.

To select an audio language, use the joystick to enter the appropriate 4−digit language code. For details of the language
codes, see the language code list.
If a code which is not on the list is entered and the “ENT” button is pushed, the
“Incorrect Code” screen will appear. Enter
the code of the language you want to hear
again.
To return to the “Select Audio Lang.”
screen, push the “Back” switch.

217

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE
To display the “Select Subtitle Lang.”
screen, push the “Subtitle Language”
switch on the “Setup Menu” screen.
Select the language you want to read by
pushing the appropriate switch on the
screen.
To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,
push the “Back” switch.
If you cannot find the language you want
to read, push the “Others” switch. The
“Enter Subtitle Lang. Code” screen will
appear.

To enter the code of the language you
want to read, use the joystick to enter the
appropriate 4−digit language code. For details about the language codes, see the
language code list.
Push the “ENT” button on the controller.
If numbers which are not on the list are
entered and the “ENT” button is pushed,
the “Incorrect code” screen will appear.
Enter the language code you want to read
again.
To return to the “Select Subtitle Lang.”
screen, push the “Back” switch on the
screen.

CHANGING THE DVD LANGUAGE
To display the “Select DVD Lang.” screen,
push the “DVD Language” switch on the
“Setup Menu” screen.
Select the language you want to read on
the screen.
To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,
push the “Back” switch.
If you cannot find a language you want to
read, push the “Others” switch. The “Enter
DVD Lang. Code” screen will appear.

218

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

TURNING THE ANGLE MARK ON OR
OFF

SETTING
LEVEL
RESTRICTIONS

The angle mark can be turned on for
discs that are multi−angle compatible.

You can restrict the play back screen by
setting the viewer restrictions. You can
prevent the restriction with a password.
Some discs do not supply a restriction.

Each time you push the “Angle Mark”
switch on the screen, the angle mark
turns on or off alternately.

VIEWER

To set the level of viewer restriction, push
the “Parental Lock” switch on the “Setup
Menu” screen. The “Enter Personal Code”
screen will appear.

To return to the “Select DVD Lang.”
screen, push the “Back” switch on the
screen.

219

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE
Pushing the “SIZE” button on the controller causes the display modes to change
sequentially as follows:
Normal

Enter the password and push the “ENT”
button. The “Select Restriction Level”
screen will appear.
You cannot change the setting without inputting the password. When you forget or
change the password, push the “A” side
of the joystick ten times to initialize the
password.

Wide1

Wide2

Push a parental level (1—8). The smaller
the level number, the stricter the age limit.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
“Setup Menu” screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,
push the “Back” switch.

220

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

LANGUAGE CODE LIST

0125

Aymara

0610

Fiji

Code

Language

0126

Azerbaijani

0615

Faroese

1001

Japanese

0201

Bashkir

0625

Frisian

0514

English

0205

Byelorussian

0701

Irish

0618

French

0207

Bulgarian

0704

Scots−Gaelic

0405

German

0208

Bihari

0712

Galician

0920

Italian

0209

Bislama

0714

Guarani

0519

Spanish

0214

Bengali

0721

Gujarati

2608

Chinese

0215

Tibetan

0801

Hausa

1412

Dutch

0218

Breton

0809

Hindi

1620

Portuguese

0301

Catalan

0818

Croatian

1922

Swedish

0315

Corsican

0821

Hungarian

1821

Russian

0319

Czech

0825

Armenian

1115

Korean

0325

Welsh

0901

Interlingua

0512

Greek

0401

Danish

0905

Interlingue

0101

Afar

0426

Bhutani

0911

Inupiak

0102

Abkhazian

0515

Esperanto

0914

Indonesian

0106

Afrikaans

0520

Estonian

0919

Icelandic

0113

Amharic

0521

Basque

0923

Hebrew

0118

Arabic

0601

Persian

1009

Yiddish

0119

Assamese

0609

Finnish

1023

Javanese

221

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

1101

Georgian

1320

Maltese

1911

Slovak

1111

Kazakh

1325

Burmese

1912

Slovenian

1112

Greenlandic

1401

Nauru

1913

Samoan

1113

Cambodian

1405

Nepali

1914

Shona

1114

Kannada

1415

Norwegian

1915

Somali

1119

Kashmiri

1503

Occitan

1917

Albanian

1121

Kurdish

1513

(Afan) Oromo

1918

Serbian

1125

Kirghiz

1518

Oriya

1919

Siswati

1201

Latin

1601

Punjabi

1920

Sesotho

1214

Lingala

1612

Polish

1921

Sundanese

1215

Laothian

1619

Pashto, Pushto

1923

Swahili

1220

Lithuanian

1721

Quechua

2001

Tamil

1222

Latvian

1813

Rhaeto−Romance

2005

Telugu

1307

Malagasy

1814

Kirundi

2007

Tajik

1309

Maori

1815

Romanian

2008

Thai

1311

Macedonian

1823

Kinyarwanda

2009

Tigrinya

1312

Malayalam

1901

Sanskrit

2011

Turkmen

1314

Mongolian

1904

Sindhi

2012

Tagalog

1315

Moldavian

1907

Sangho

2014

Setswana

1318

Marathi

1908

Serbo−Croatian

2015

Tonga

1319

Malay

1909

Sinhalese

2018

Turkish

222

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2019

Tsonga

2020

Tatar

2023

Twi

2111

Ukrainian

2118

Urdu

2126

Uzbek

2209

Vietnamese

2215

Volapük

2315

Wolof

2408

Xhosa

2515

Yoruba

2621

Zulu

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN
When playing a disc, push the “DVD” button on the controller. The status screen
will appear on the screen.

SELECTING THE CHAPTER/TRACK
To select the chapter/track, push the
”
button
or
“CHAPTER/TRACK
” button on the
“CHAPTER/TRACK
controller until the number of the
chapter/track you want to select appears
on the screen.

223

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—DVD player operation (video
CD/audio CD/CD text/MP3)

SELECTING THE DISC MENU NUMBER
(video CD only)
Push the “Select Number” switch and then
the disc menu number search screen will
appear. You can also display the screen
by pushing the “SEARCH” button on the
controller.

Enter the disc menu number by using the
joystick and push the “ENT” button. The
player starts playing the disc from the
entered disc menu number. The entered
disc menu number will appear on the
screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the
menu screen.

OPERATING THE “" ”, “AA” AND
“""” SWITCHES (video CD only)
“" ” switch: Push this switch to pause
the disc or to cancel the pause and return
to normal playing.
“AA” and “""” switches: Push this
switch to fast forward or reverse. If you
want to return to the beginning of the
current track, release the switch.
Video CD only—
Push the “""” switch/button while pausing, the DVD video plays the slow−motion
video replay.

224

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

TURNING ON THE DISC MENU (video
CD only)

CHANGING MENU
(video CD only)

TRACK

CHANGING
A
MULTIPLEX
TRANSMISSION (video CD only)

Push the “Return” switch to turn on the
menu screen for the disc.

Push the “Next Menu” or “Prev. Menu”
switch while the disc menu is displayed.
The next or previous page will appear on
the screen.

Push the “Main/Sub” switch to change a
multiplex transmission. The mode changes
from Main/Sub to Main to Sub and back
to Main/Sub by pushing the “Main/Sub”
switch.

For the operation of the menu screen, see
the manual for the video CD.

PAGE

Push the “Next Menu” or “Prev. Menu”
switch while the player is playing video.
The next or previous track will be
searched and played.

225

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING (video
CD only)

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN
When playing a disc, push the “DVD” button on the controller. The control screen
will appear on the screen.

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen
and then the initial setting screen will appear. You can also display the screen by
pushing the “SET UP” button on the controller. You can change the initial setting.
(See “CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING”
on page 216 in this Section for details.)

CD text only—
The disc title and track title will appear on
the screen when pushing the “DVD” button.
Details of the specific switches, controls
and features are described below.

After the setting is done, the player plays
from the beginning of the chapter or the
track.

1. “RPT” switch (audio CD and CD text)
CD Text

Push the “RPT” switch while the track
is playing. When the track ends, it will
automatically replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this switch again.
2. “RAND” switch (audio CD and CD text)
Push the “RAND” switch. The player
will play the tracks on the disc in random order. To turn off the random feature, push this switch again.
3. “SCAN” switch (audio CD and CD text)

CD MP3

Push the “SCAN” switch. The player
will scan all the tracks on the disc. To
stop scanning, push this switch again.
When the player has scanned all the
tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.

226

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Screen adjustment
MP3 only—
Folder and file names will appear on the
screen when the “DVD” button is pushed.
The details of the specific switches, controls, and features are described below.
1. “RPT” switch
When the “RPT” switch is pushed while
a track is played, the track file will be
played repeatedly until the switch is
pushed again. When the switch is
pushed for at least 0.8 seconds, all the
files in a folder will be played repeatedly. To turn off repeat play mode,
push the switch again.
2. “RAND” switch
When the “RAND” switch is pushed,
the files in a current folder will be
played in random order. When the
switch is pushed for at least 0.8 seconds, all the files in the disk will be
played in random. To turn off random
play mode, push the switch again.

3. “SCAN” switch
When the “SCAN” switch is pushed, all
the files in a current folder will be
scanned. Only the first 10 seconds of
each file are played sequentially until
all the files are scanned. When the
switch is pushed for at least 0.8 seconds, the first 10 seconds of each initial file of all the folders in the disk will
be played sequentially until the entire
initial files are scanned. To stop scanning, push the switch again.
4. “FLD

You can adjust the color, contrast, tone
and brightness of the screen.
Push the “DISPLAY” button on the controller and the “Display” screen will appear.
The screen may turn purple to deflect the
sunlight. This is not a malfunction.

” switch

When the switch is pushed, the initial
file of the next folder will be played.
5. “

FLD” switch

When the switch is pushed, the initial
file of the previous folder will be
played.
6. “DETAIL” switch
When the switch is pushed while a
track is played, the detailed file information of the track will be displayed.

227

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Selecting the video mode
After adjusting the screen, push the “ENT”
button or “DISPLAY” button to return to
the previous screen.

Operate the joystick up and down to select Brightness, Contrast, Tone, or Color
and left and right to make adjustments.
− or “Red”

+ or
“Green”

Brightness

Darkens

Brightens

Contrast

Weakens
the contrast

Strengthens
the contrast

Tone

Weakens
the tone

Strengthens
the tone

Color

Strengthens
the red
color

Strengthens
the green
color

The audio machine connected to the input
terminal adapter can be played in the
video mode.
To select the video mode, push
“VIDEO” button on the controller.

the

228

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—DVD video disc information
DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISCS
This DVD player conforms to NTSC color TV formats. DVD video discs conforming to other formats such as PAL
or SECAM cannot be used.
Region codes: Some DVD video discs
have a region code indicating where you
can use. If the DVD video disc is not
labeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it in
this DVD player. If you attempt to play an
inappropriate DVD video disc in this player, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on
the screen. Even if the DVD video disc
does not have a region code, in some
cases you cannot use it.

Marks shown on DVD video discs:
Indicates NTSC format
of color TV.

Indicates the number
of audio tracks.

Indicates the number
of language subtitles.

Indicates the number
of angles.
Indicates the screen
to be selected.
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates regions in
which this video disc
can be played.
ALL: all countries
Number: region code

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY
DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc
that holds video. DVD video discs have
adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world standards of digital compression technologies.
The picture data is compressed by 1/40
on average and stored. Variable rate encoded technology in which the volume of
data assigned to the picture is changed
depending on the picture format has also
been adopted. Audio data is stored using
PCM and Dolby digital, which enables
higher quality of sound. Furthermore, multi−angle and multi−language features will
also help you enjoy the more advanced
technology of DVD video.
Viewer restrictions: This feature limits
what can be viewed in conformity with the
level of restrictions of the country. The
level of restrictions varies depending on
the DVD video disc. Some DVD video
discs cannot be played at all, or violent
scenes are skipped or replaced with other
scenes.
Level 1: DVD video discs for children can
be played.
Level 2—7: DVD video discs for children
and G−rated movies can be played.

229

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—A/V input adapter
Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can
be played.
Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy the
same scene at different angles.
Multi−language feature: You can select
the language of the subtitles and audio.
Region codes: Region codes are provided
on DVD players and DVD discs. If the
DVD video disc does not have the same
region code as the DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the DVD player. For
region codes, see page 229.

Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and
the double−D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
E1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. All
rights reserved.

The rear entertainment system plays videos and sound when an audio−video
equipment is connected to the A/V input
adapter. For details, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.

“dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.

Audio: This DVD player can play liner
PCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audio
format DVD. Other decoded type cannot
be played.
Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored on DVD video discs are divided in parts by title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and
audio programs stored on DVD video
discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one
album, or one audio program is assigned
as a title.
Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title
comprises plural chapters.

230

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Power outlet

To use the adapter, open the cover.
The A/V input adapter is composed of 3
input adapters.
Yellow: Image input adapter
Red: Audio input adapter
White: Audio input adapter

NOTICE
Close the cover
adapter is not in
eign object other
plug may cause
short circuit.

when the A/V input
use. Inserting a forthan the appropriate
electrical failure or

This power outlet is designed for use as
a power supply for the audio device connected to the A/V input adapter.
The engine switch must be in the “ON”
position for the power outlet to be used.
The maximum capacity for this power outlet is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to
use an appliance that requires more than
115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit
will activate and cut the power supply.
The power supply will restart automatically
when you use an appliance that operates
within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

To use the power outlet, push the main
switch on the instrument panel.
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the power outlet is ready for use.
Push the main switch once again to turn
the power outlet off. When the power outlet is not in use, make sure that the main
switch is turned off.

231

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Audio/video system operating
hints
NOTICE
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlet longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
z Close the power outlet lid when the
power outlet is not in use. Inserting
a foreign object other than the appropriate plug that fits the outlet
may cause electrical failure or short
circuit.
The power outlet is not designed for
the following electric appliances even if
their power consumption is under 115
VAC/100W. These appliances may not
operate properly.

D Appliances with high initial peak watt-

age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,
compressor−driven refrigerators, electric
pumps, electric tools, etc.

D Measuring devices which process pre-

cise data: medical equipment, measuring instruments, etc.

D Other appliances requiring an extremely

NOTICE

stable power supply: microcomputer−
controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

To ensure correct audio/video system
operation:

Certain electrical appliances may cause
radio noise.

z Be careful not to spill beverages
over the audio system.
z Do not put anything other than a
compact disc into the slot.
z Do not put anything other than a
DVD video, video CD, dts−CD or audio CD into the DVD player.
z The use of a cellular phone inside
or near the vehicle may cause a
noise from the speakers of the audio system which you are listening
to. However, this does not indicate
a malfunction.
RADIO RECEPTION
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
your radio—it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.

232

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

For example, nearby buildings and terrain
can interfere with FM reception. Power
lines or telephone wires can interfere with
AM signals. And of course, radio signals
have a limited range. The farther you are
from a station, the weaker its signal will
be. In addition, reception conditions
change constantly as your vehicle moves.
Here are some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with your radio:
FM
Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 40 km (25
miles). Once outside this range, you may
notice fading and drifting, which increase
with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,
making it possible for two signals to reach
your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or
loss of reception.
Static and fluttering—These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal you
are listening to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may
tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again.
AM
Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphere–especially at night.
These reflected signals can interfere with
those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound
alternately strong and weak.
Station interference—When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a
radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.
Static—AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening, or electrical motors. This results in static.

FCC ID: BABBT010A
NOTE: This device complies with Part
15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions, (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

CAUTION
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications in construction not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Radio frequently exposure. This device is approved for Mobile Application only and, to comply with applicable FCC radio frequency exposure
regulations, must be used with a distance of at least 7.9in. (20cm) between the antenna and the body of
any person at all time during use.

233

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. (and
Canada)—
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void
the user’s authority to operate this
device.
Laser products

D Do not take this unit apart or at-

tempt to make any changes yourself. This is an intricate unit that
uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully
shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never
try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may
be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.

D This product utilizes a laser. Use of

controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result in
hazardous radiation exposure.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC
PLAYER, DVD PLAYER AND DISCS

Compact disc player

D Extremely high temperatures can keep
your compact disc player and DVD
player from working. On hot days, use
the air conditioning to cool the vehicle
interior before you use the players.

Audio CDs

D Bumpy roads or other vibrations may

make your compact disc player and
DVD player skip.

D If moisture gets into your compact disc

player and DVD player, the players
may not play even though they appear
to be working. Remove the disc from
the player and wait until it dries.

CAUTION

D Use only compact discs marked as

shown above. The following products
may not be playable on your compact
disc player.
SACD
dts−CD
Copy−protected CD
CD−ROM

Compact disc players and DVD players use an invisible laser beam which
could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed outside the unit. Be
sure to operate the players correctly.

234

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

DVD player

Audio CDs

DVD video
discs

Video CDs
Special shaped discs

Low quality discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Labeled discs

D Use only discs marked as shown
above. The following products may not
be playable on your DVD player.

SACD
Copy−protected CD
CD−R (CD−Recordable)
CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)
CD−ROM
DVD−R
DVD+R
DVD+RW
DVD−RW
DVD−ROM
DVD−RAM

235

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

NOTICE
z Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in
the illustrations. The use of such
discs may damage the player or
changer, or it may be impossible to
eject the disc.
z This system is not designed for use
of Dual Disc. Do not use Dual Disc
because it may cause damage to
the player or changer.

Correct

Wrong

D Handle the discs carefully, especially

when you are inserting them. Hold
them on the edge and do not bend
them. Avoid getting fingerprints on
them, particularly on the shiny side.

D Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or

other disc damage could cause the
player to skip or to repeat a section of
a chapter or track. (To see a pin hole,
hold the disc up to the light.)

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint−
free cloth that has been dampened with
water. Wipe in a straight line from the
center to the edge of the disc (not in
circles). Dry it with another soft, lint−free
cloth. Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or anti−static device.

D Remove discs from the compact disc

player when you are not playing them.
Store them in their plastic cases away
from moisture, heat, and direct sunlight.

236

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

MP3/WMA FILES

D WMA files can contain a WMA tag that

D MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA

is used in the same way as an ID3
tag. WMA tags carry information such
as track title, artist name.

D The MP3/WMA player can play MP3

D The emphasis function is available only

(Windows Media Audio) are audio compression standards.

and WMA files on CD−ROM, CD−R and
CD−RW discs.
The unit can play disc recordings compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level
2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file
system.

D When naming an MP3 or WMA file,

add the appropriate file extension (.mp3
or .wma).

D The MP3/WMA player plays back files

with .mp3 or .wma file extensions as
MP3 or WMA files. To prevent noise
and playback errors, use the appropriate file extensions.

D Multi−session compatible CDs can also
be played.

D MP3 files are compatible with the ID3

Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2, and
Ver. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot display disc title, track title and artist
name in other formats.

when playing MP3/WMA files recorded
at 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. (The system
can play MP3 files with sampling frequencies of 16, 22.05, and 24 kHz.
However, the emphasis function is not
available for files recorded at these frequencies.)

D The sound quality of MP3/WMA files

generally improves with higher bit
rates. In order to achieve a reasonable
level of sound quality, discs recorded
with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps are
recommended.
Playable bit rates
MP3 files:
MPEG1 LAYER3—64 to 320 kbps
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3—64 to 160 kbps
WMA files:
Ver. 7, 8 CBR—48 to 192 kbps
Ver. 9 CBR—48 to 320 kbps

D The MP3/WMA player does not play

back MP3/WMA files from discs recorder using packet write data transfer
(UDF format). Discs should be recorded using “pre−mastering” software
rather than packet−write software.

D M3u playlists are not compatible with
the audio player.

D MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO
formats are not compatible with the audio player.

D The MP3 player is compatible with
VBR (Variable Bit Rate).

D When playing back files recorded as

VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play
time will not be correctly displayed if
fast−forward or reverse operations are
used.

D It is not possible to check folders that
do not include MP3/WMA files.

D MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 lev-

els deep can be played. However, the
start of playback may be delayed when
using discs containing numerous levels
of folders. For this reason, we recommend creating discs with no more than
two levels of folders.

D It is possible to play up to 192 folders
or 255 files on one disc.

237

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CD−R and CD−RW discs

D CD−R/CD−RW discs that have not been
001.mp3
002.wma
Folder 1
003.mp3
Folder 2
004.mp3
005.wma
Folder 3
006.mp3

D The play order of the compact disc

with the structure shown on the left is
as follows:

subject to the “finalizing process” (a
process that allows discs to be played
on a conventional CD player) cannot
be played.

D It

may not be possible to play
CD−R/CD−RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc characteristics,
scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,
condensation, etc. on the lens of the
unit.

D It may not be possible to play discs

recorded on a personal computer depending on the application settings and
the environment. Record with the correct format. (For details, contact the
appropriate application manufacturers of
the applications.)

D CD−R/CD−RW discs may be damaged

by direct exposure to sunlight, high
temperatures or other storage conditions. The unit may be unable to play
some damaged discs.

D If you insert a CD−RW disc into the
MP3/WMA player, playback will begin
more slowly than with a conventional
CD or CD−R disc.

D Recordings on CD−R/CD−RW cannot

be played using the DDCD (Double
Density CD) system.

TERMS
Packet write—
This is a general term that describes the
process of writing data on−demand to
CD−R, etc., in the same way that data is
written to floppy or hard discs.
ID3 Tag—
This is a method of embedding track−related information in an MP3 file. This embedded information can include the track
title, the artist’s name, the album title, the
music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can
be freely edited using software with ID3
tag editing functions. Although the tags
are restricted to the number of characters,
the information can be viewed when the
track is played back.
WMA Tag—
WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is
used in the same way as an ID3 tag.
WMA tags carry information such as track
title, artist name.

238

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Hands−free phone system—
—Reference
ISO 9660 format—

WMA—

Phone Setup (see page 245)

This is the international standard for the
formatting of CD−ROM folders and files.
For the ISO 9660 format, there are two
levels of regulations.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio
compression
format
developed
by
Microsoft. It compresses files into a size
smaller than that of MP3 files. The decoding formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8,
and 9.

D Pair phone

Level 1:
The file name is in 8.3 format (8 character file names, with a 3 character file
extension. File names must be composed
of one−byte capital letters and numbers.
The “_” symbol may also be included.)
Level 2:
The file name can have up to 31 characters (including the separation mark “.” and
file extension). Each folder must contain
fewer than 8 hierarchies.
m3u—
Playlists created using “WINAMP” software
have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

To use the hands−free system, you
need to register your phone in the system.

D Change name
The registered phone names can be
changed.

D Delete
The registered phones can be deleted.

D List phones
The registered phone names can be
checked.

D Select phone
The registered phones can be selected.

D Set passkey
The passkey can be changed.

MP3—
MP3 is an audio compression standard
determined by a working group (MPEG) of
the ISO (International Standard Organization). MP3 compresses audio data to
about 1/10 the size of that on conventional discs.

239

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Some basics
Security (see page 250)

D Set PIN
The PIN can be set or changed.

D Phone book lock
The phone book can be locked.

D Phone book unlock
The locked phone book can be unlocked.

D Delete Speed Dial
The registered speed dial can be deleted.

D List names
The registered names can be checked.

D Set Speed Dial
Speed dials can be set
Redial (see page 262)

System Setup (see page 254)

Callback (see page 263)

D Adjust Guidance Volume

Making a phone call (see page 265)

Guidance volume can be adjusted.

D Initialize

Receiving a phone call (see page 267)
Talking on the phone (see page 268)

Phone Book (see page 254)

D Add Entry
Phone numbers and voice tags can be
registered.

D Change Name
The registered names can be changed.

D Delete Entry
The registered names can be deleted.

240

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

This system supports Bluetoothr, a
wireless system that allows you to
make or receive calls without taking
your hands from the steering wheel and
without using cables to connect the
phone and system.
The phone must be paired to the system
before using the hands−free feature. If
your cellular phone does not support
Bluetoothr, this system will not function.

CAUTION
While you are driving, do not use a
cellular
phone
or
connect
the
Bluetoothr phone.

NOTICE
Do not leave your cellular phone in
the car. The temperature indoor may
be high and damage the phone.

The system may not function in the following conditions and places:

When transferring ownership of the vehicle:

D The cellular phone is turned off.
D The current position is outside the

A lot
when
When
hicle,

communication area.

D The cellular phone is not connected.
D The cellular phone has a low battery.
D The cellular phone is located behind
the seat or in the glove box and console box.

D The cellular phone touches or is covered with metal materials.

This system supports the following service.

D HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver.1.0
D OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver.1.1

of personal data is registered
you use the hands−free system.
transferring ownership of the veinitialize the system.

If you initialize it, the former state will
never come back again. Pay much attention when initializing the data.
You can initialize the following data in the
system.

D
D
D
D
D

Phone book data
Dialed numbers and received calls
Speed dial
Bluetoothr phone data
Security code

If your cellular phone does not support
HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetoothr
phone, and take OPP service individually.

Bluetooth is a trademark
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

owned

241

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

FCC ID: BABBT010A
IC ID: 2024B−BT010A
MADE IN CHINA
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS−210. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE: This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the
following measures:
−Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
−Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
−Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
−Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation
Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC/IC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled equipment and meets the
FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65
and RSS−102 of the IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without
maximum permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it
should be installed and operated with
at least 20 cm and more between the
radiator and person’s body (excluding
extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
legs).
Co−location: This transmitter must
not be co−located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.

242

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Control and features
"Steering switches and microphone
1. Volume control switch

5. Microphone

To increase the volume: Push “+”.
To decrease the volume: Push “−”.

The microphone is used when talking on
the phone or using the speech command
system.

When driving at 80 km/h (50 mph) or
more, the volume automatically increases
without switch adjustment. When your
speed falls below 70 km/h (43 mph), the
volume automatically returns to its original
level.
Voice guidance volume cannot be changed
by pushing the volume control switch on
the steering wheel.
Steering switches

2. Talk switch
Pushing the talk switch turns the hands−
free system on and initiates the speech
command system.
3. On−hook switch
When the hands−free system is on, pushing the on−hook switch turns the hands−
free system off.
Pushing and holding the talk switch ends
the speech command system.
4. Off−hook switch
Pushing the off−hook switch
hands−free system on.

Microphone

turns

the

When receiving a call, pushing the off−
hook switch allows you to talk on the
phone.

243

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

"Audio unit
1. Display
Displays such items as the reception level, a party’s name and phone number. See
“DISPLAY” described on the following
page for further details about the display.
2. “AUDIO CONTROL” knob
Turning the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob displays the menu items, names, numbers,
etc. to be selected. To select an item,
push the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob. Due to
safety concerns, the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob does not function while the vehicle
is in motion.
3. “TEXT” button
When the party’s name or phone number
is too long to be displayed, pushing and
holding the “TEXT” button displays the remaining characters.
4. Preset buttons
Pushing the preset button displays the
registered speed dial numbers.

244

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Phone Setup
2. Reception level display
Displays the cellular phone reception levels. This may not match the display on
the cellular phone. The reception level of
some cellular phones may not be displayed.

DISPLAY

The phone setup menu includes the following:

D Pair Phone

The number of bars is greater when the
signal received is stronger.

To use the hands−free system, you need
to register your phone in the system.
Once you have registered it, you can
make a hands−free call. Up to 6 phones
can be registered.

3. Message display

D Select Phone

Displays phone numbers, names, comments, menu items, etc.

When the system connects to Bluetoothr,
the phone previously used is automatically
selected. Select a different phone if necessary. Only the selected phone can be
used with the hands−free system.

1. Bluetoothr display

D Change Name

Displays when a Bluetoothr connection is
made. If there is no display, the
Bluetoothr connection has not been made
and communication between the phone
and system is not possible. When using
the hands−free system, make sure that
[BT] is displayed. The display is updated
in real time.

The registered
changed.

phone

names

can

phone

names

can

D List Phones
The registered
checked.

The following can be performed during the
name playback:

D Select phone
D Change name
D Delete

245

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D Set PassKey

To pair phones

The passkey can be changed. A 4 to 8
digit code can be input as a passkey.

1. Push the talk switch and say [Pair
phone], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob until [Pair Phone] is displayed
and push the knob.

D Delete
The registered phones can be deleted.
To enter the phone setup menu
1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Setup] is displayed and push the knob.
[Setup. Please push the talk switch and
say security, or phone setup.] is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Phone Setup] is displayed and push
the knob.

[The phone is paired and ready for use.
Returning to the main menu.] is heard and
[Paired] is displayed.
The system may not function in the following cases:

[Pair. Push the talk switch and say a
name for the phone.] is heard.

D If 6 phones have already been regis-

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Record Name] is displayed, push the
knob and say the desired phone name.

D If the vehicle is moving.
D If the system cannot communicate with

[Push the talk switch and say confirm.
Otherwise, say go back.] is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.

tered.

the phone.

∗:

Passkey is a password required to register a phone to the system.

INFORMATION
D To use the hands−free system, you

need to register your phone in the
system. Once you have registered
it, you can make a hands−free call.
Up to 6 phones can be registered.

[XXX (desired phone name) Ready for
phone pairing. Please use the phone to
connect it to the hands−free system. The
passkey for the phone is....] is heard.

D For the operation of the phone, see

[XXX (phone name) already selected.] is
heard and the phone name is displayed.

After [HANDS FREE] is displayed, a passkey∗ is displayed and [Searching.] is
heard.

D The passkey can be changed. See

If no phone has been registered, the system may not function properly.

4. Input the displayed passkey into the
phone.

[Phone setup. Push the talk switch and
say pair phone, select phone, change
name, list phones, set passkey or delete.]
is heard.

the manual that comes with your
cellular phone.
page 249 for changing the passkey.

246

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

To select a phone
1. Push the talk switch and say [Select
phone], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob until [Select Phone] is displayed
and push the knob.
[Select phone. Push the talk switch and
say the phone name or say list phones.]
is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
the desired phone name is displayed
and push the knob.

When the phone is selected by using
the knob:
[XXX selected. Returning to the phone
setup.] is heard.
The system may not function in the following cases:

D If the phone is not found.
D If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

To change a name
1. Push the talk switch and say [Change
name], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob until [Change Name] is displayed
and push the knob.
[Change name. Push the talk switch and
say the phone name to change.] is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
the phone name that you want to
change is displayed and push the
knob.

When the phone is selected by a voice
command:
[XXX (phone name) Push the talk switch
and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.]
is heard and the phone name is displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until [Confirm] is displayed and push the knob.
[XXX selected. Returning to the phone
setup.] is heard.

247

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

When the phone is selected by a voice
command:

When the phone is selected by using
the knob:

The system may not function in the following cases:

[XXX (phone name) Push the talk switch
and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.]
is heard and the phone name is displayed.

[XXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard
and the phone name is displayed.

D If no phone has been registered.
D If the system does not recognize the

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.

[Push the talk switch and say a new
name.] is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Record Name] is displayed, push the
knob and say the desired phone name.

[XXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.

[Name changed. Returning to the phone
setup.] is heard and [Changed] is displayed.

voice command.

To list phones
1. Push the talk switch and say [List
phones], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until [List Phones] is displayed and push the knob.
[List phones. To select a name, push the
talk switch during the name playback.] is
heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions.
[Push the talk switch and say select
phone, change name, or delete.] is heard.
Select one of the following:

248

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Select phone

To set a passkey

When using the knob:

Push the talk switch and say [Select
phone], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob until [Select Phone] is displayed and
push the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say [Set
passkey], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until [Set Passkey] is displayed and push the knob.

1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to
select a number. Push the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob to set.

For further details on selecting a phone,
see page 247.

[Set Passkey. The passkey is required for
the phone pairing process. Push the talk
switch and say a new passkey.] is heard
and passkey is displayed.

Change name
Push the talk switch and say [Change
name], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob until [Change Name] is displayed
and push the knob.
For further details on changing a name,
see page 247.
Delete
Push the talk switch and say [Delete], or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Delete] is displayed and push the knob.
For further details on deleting a phone,
see page 250.
If no phone has been registered, the system may not function properly.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to
select a number.
When using a voice command:

2. When the passkey is set, push the
“AUDIO CONTROL” knob.
[Passkey changed. Returning to the phone
setup.] is heard.
The system does not function in the following cases:

D If the passkey has less than 4 digits.
D If the passkey has more than 8 digits.

[XXXX (new passkey) Push the talk switch
and say confirm. Otherwise, continue adding numbers, or say go back or delete.]
is heard and the new passkey is displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the
“AUDIO
CONTROL”
knob
until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the knob.
[Passkey changed. Returning to the phone
setup.] is heard.

249

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Security
To delete a phone
1. Push the talk switch and say [Delete],
or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob
until [Delete] is displayed and push the
knob.
[Delete. Push the talk switch and say the
phone name to delete.] is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
the phone name you want to delete is
displayed and push the knob.
When using a voice command:
[XXX (desired phone name) Push the talk
switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go
back.] is heard and the phone name is
displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until [Confirm] is displayed and push the knob.

The system may not function in the following cases:

D If no phone has been registered.
D If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

The security menu includes the following:

D Set PIN (Personal Identification Number)

The PIN can be set or changed.

D Phone book lock
The phone book can be locked.
When the phone book is locked, the following functions cannot be used:

D
D
D
D
D
D

Dial by name
Redial
Callback
Speed Dial
Phone Book
Phone book unlock

The locked phone book can be unlocked.

[Deleted. Returning to the phone setup.] is
heard and $[Deleted]$ is displayed.
When using the knob:
[Deleted. Returning to the phone setup.] is
heard and [Deleted] is displayed.

250

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

To enter the security menu

To set a PIN

When using a voice command:

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.

Push the talk switch and say [Set PIN],
or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Set PIN] is displayed and push the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say a new
PIN number.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Setup] is displayed and push the knob.
[Setup. Please push the talk switch and
say security, or phone setup.] is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Security] is displayed and push the
knob.
[Security. Push the talk switch and say
set PIN, phone book lock, or phone book
unlock.] is heard.

[There is no PIN number set. Please register a PIN number. Please push the talk
switch and say a four−digit PIN number.]
is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.
[The PIN number has been set. Returning
to the security.] is heard and [Completed]
is displayed.
When using the knob:
1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to
select a number. Push the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob to set.
2. Repeat the above procedure until the
entire four−digit number is set.
3. When the PIN is set, push the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob.
4. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.
[The PIN number has been set. Returning
to the security.] is heard and [Completed]
is displayed.

251

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If the PIN is to be changed:

To lock the phone book

When using a voice command:

[There is a PIN number in place. Push the
talk switch and say the correct PIN number.] is heard and [Current PIN?] is displayed.

1. Push the talk switch and say [Phone
book lock], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until [Phbk Lock] is displayed and push the knob.

[XXXX (PIN number) Push the talk switch
and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.]
is heard and PIN number is displayed.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
use the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to
input the current PIN number.

[There is a PIN number in place. Push the
talk switch and say the correct PIN number.] is heard and [Current PIN?] is displayed.

[Please push the talk switch and say a
four−digit PIN number.] is heard.
2. Push the talk switch and say new PIN
number.
[The PIN number has been set. Returning
to the security.] is heard and [Completed]
is displayed.
If the current number is not correct, the
system does not function properly.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to
select a number.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the
“AUDIO
CONTROL”
knob
until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the knob.
[PIN number accepted. The phone book is
now locked. Returning to the main menu.]
is heard and [Locked] is displayed.
When using the knob:
1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to
select a number. Push the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob to set.
2. When the PIN number is set, push the
“AUDIO CONTROL” knob.

INFORMATION

[XXXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard
and PIN number is displayed.

Do not forget your PIN. If you forget
the PIN, initialization will be necessary. For details about initialization,
see page 254.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.
[PIN number accepted. The phone book is
now locked. Returning to the main menu.]
is heard and [Locked] is displayed.

252

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

The system may not function in the following cases:

D If the current number is not correct.
D If the phone book has already been
locked.

D If the PIN number does not exist.
To unlock the phone book
1. Push the talk switch and say [Phone
book unlock], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until [Phbk Unlock] is displayed and push the knob.
[Phonebook unlock. There is a PIN number in place. Push the talk switch and say
the correct PIN number.] is heard and
[Current PIN?] is displayed.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to
select a number.

When using a voice command:
[XXXX (PIN number) Push the talk switch
and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.]
is heard and the PIN number is displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the
“AUDIO
CONTROL”
knob
until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the knob.
[PIN number accepted. The phone book is
now unlocked. Returning to the main
menu.] is heard and [Unlocked] is displayed.
When using the knob:
1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to
select a number. Push the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob to set.

The system may not function in the following cases:

D If the current number is not correct.
D If the phone book has already been
unlocked.

INFORMATION
A shortcut to each of the following
functions is available. Enter the
phone book menu, push the off−hook
switch, and say either of the following:

D Phone book lock
D Phone book unlock

2. When the PIN number is set, push the
“AUDIO CONTROL” knob.
[XXXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard
and the PIN number is displayed.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.
[PIN number accepted. The phone book is
now unlocked. Returning to the main
menu.] is heard and [Unlocked] is displayed.

253

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—System Setup

—Phone Book

The system setup menu includes the following:

D Adjust Guidance Volume
D Initialize
To enter the system setup menu
1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Setup] is displayed and push the knob.
3. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[System Setup] is displayed and push
the knob.
[System setup. Please select
volume or initialize.] is heard.

guidance

To adjust the guidance volume
1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Guidance Vol] is displayed and push
the knob.
[Guidance will be at this volume] is heard
and the present volume level is displayed.
2. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to
adjust the volume and push the knob.

To initialize
1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Initialize] is displayed and push the
knob.
[System initialization. This will erase all
user information in the hands free system;
including paired phones, phone book entries, and call history. Select confirm to
initialize. Otherwise, select go back.] is
heard.
2. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.
[System initialization. This will erase all
user information in the hands free system;
including paired phones, phone book entries, and call history. Select confirm to
initialize. Otherwise, select go back.] is
heard.
3. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.

The phone book menu includes the following:

D Add Entry
Phone numbers and voice tags can be
registered.

D Change Name
The registered names can be changed.

D Delete Entry
The registered names can be deleted.

D Delete Speed Dial
The registered speed dial can be deleted.

D List Names
The registered names can be checked.

D Set Speed Dial
Speed dials can be set.
Up to 20 numbers can be registered in
the phone book.

[Initialized. Returning to the main menu.]
is heard.

254

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

To enter the phone book menu

To add entry

(a) By Voice

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.

The add entry includes the following:

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Phonebook] is displayed and push the
knob.

(b) By Phone

1. Push the talk switch and say [By
voice], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob until [By Voice] is displayed and
push the knob.

[Phone book. Please push the talk switch
and say add entry, change name, delete
entry, list names, set speed dial or delete
speed dial.] is heard.

Push the talk switch and say [Add entry],
or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Add Entry] is displayed and push the
knob.

If the phone book is locked, the system
may not function properly.

[Add Entry. How will the number be entered. Push the talk switch and say by
voice, by phone, or call history.] is heard.

(a) By Voice
(c) Call History
(d) Manual Input

[Voice entry. Push the talk switch and say
the number.] is heard.
2. Push the talk switch and say the dial
number that you want to register.
[To store, push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, continue adding numbers, or say go back, or delete.] is heard
and number is displayed.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions.

255

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If [Confirm] is said, then input a voice
tag.
[Push the talk switch and say a name.] is
heard.
1. Push the talk switch and say the name
of the dial number that you want to
register.
[XXXX (phone number) Push the talk
switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go
back.] is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.
[Stored. To register this as a speed dial
entry, push the talk switch and say set
speed dial. Otherwise, say confirm.] is
heard and [Stored] is displayed.
3. Select one of the following:

D Confirm
D Speed Dial

Confirm

(b) By Phone

Push the talk switch and say [Confirm], or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say [By
phone], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob until [By Phone] is displayed and
push the knob.

[Returning to the phone book.] is heard.
Speed Dial
1. Push the talk switch and say [Set
speed dial], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until [Speed Dial] is displayed and push the knob.
[Set speed dial. Push the preset button to
assign to XXXX] is heard.
2. Push and hold the desired preset button.
[preset... is now assigned. Returning to
the phone book.] is heard.
The system may not function in the following cases:

D If the phone book is full.
D If the dial number has more than 24
digits.

[Phone entry. Prepare to send the information from the phone. When ready, push
the talk switch and say confirm.] is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.
[Send the information at this time.] is
heard.
After the system has received the name
and phone number, [Push the talk switch
and say confirm. To select an alternate
number, say next or previous. Otherwise,
say go back.] is heard and the name and
phone number are displayed.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions,
push the talk switch and say [Confirm],
or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob
until the dial number that you want to
register is displayed and push the
knob.
Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 255.

256

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Outgoing

(d) Manual Input

1. Push the talk switch and say [Call history], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob until [Call History] is displayed
and push the knob.

1. Push
ing],
knob
push

1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Manual Input] is displayed and push
the knob.

[Call history. Push the talk switch and say
incoming or outgoing.] is heard and [Call
History] is displayed.

[Most recent outgoing call was XXXX] is
heard and the outgoing number is displayed.

2. Select one of the following:

[Push the talk switch and say confirm.
Otherwise, say previous, or go back.] is
heard.

D Incoming
D Outgoing
Incoming
1. Push
ing],
knob
push

the talk switch and say [Incomor turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”
until [Incoming] is displayed and
the knob.

[Most recent incoming call was XXXX
(phone number)] is heard and the incoming number is displayed.
[Push the talk switch and say confirm.
Otherwise, say previous, or go back.] is
heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
the dial number that you want to register is displayed and push the knob.

the talk switch and say [Outgoor turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”
until [Outgoing] is displayed and
the knob.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
the dial number that you want to register is displayed and push the knob.
Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 255.

2. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to
select a number. Push the “AUDIO
CONTROL” knob to set.
3. When the number is set, push the
“AUDIO CONTROL” knob.
Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 255.

INFORMATION
D The system can recognize single
digits from zero to nine, #(pound),
*(star), and +(plus). Numbers that
are ten or greater are not recognized.

D To speed up input, it is a good idea

to group all digits into a continuous
string. However, you can enter each
digit individually or group digits together in preferred string lengths.

The display corresponding to each operation appears on the screen as follows:

Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 255.

257

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Input operation—

Display: [995]

You say: [Nine, nine, five]

Repeating the above operation deletes
the last digits in reverse order of input.

Voice output: [995 to store push the
talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, continue adding numbers, or
say go back, or delete.]
Display: [995]
You say: [Seven, three, four]
Voice output: [734 to store push the
talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, continue adding numbers, or
say go back, or delete.]
Display: [995734]
Repeat the above procedure until the
entire number that you want to register is input.

Delete operation—
You say: [Delete]

To list names
The voice tags can be edited during the
name playback.
1. Push the talk switch and say [List
names], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob until [List Names] is displayed
and push the knob.

Display: [Delete]

[List names. To select a name, push the
talk switch during the name playback.] is
heard.

The display will return to the initial
screen that allows a number to be
input.

[XXXX selected.] is heard and [Selected]
is displayed.

Voice output: [Deleted. Push the talk
switch and say the number.]

2. Follow voice guidance instructions.

If you push the off−hook switch during the
name playback, you can dial the number
of the selected name.

Go back operation—
You say: [Go back]
Voice output: [Go back. The last numbers said have been removed. Push
the talk switch and say the number.]

258

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Editing the voice tags

Delete Entry

To delete entry

The following can be performed:

Push the talk switch and say [Delete
entry], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob until [Delete Entry] is displayed and
push the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say [Delete
entry], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob until [Delete Entry] is displayed
and push the knob.

For further details, see page 259.

[Delete entry. Push the talk switch and
say the name to delete.] is heard.

D
D
D
D

Dial
Change Name
Delete Entry
Speed Dial

[Push the talk switch and say dial, change
name, delete entry, or set speed dial.] is
heard and [Selected] is displayed.
Dial
Push the talk switch and say [Dial], or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Dial] is displayed and push the knob.
Change Name
Push the talk switch and say [Change
name], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob until [Change Name] is displayed
and push the knob.
For further details, see page 260.

Speed dial
Push the talk switch and say [Set speed
dial], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob
until [Speed Dial] is displayed and push
the knob.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
the name that you want to delete is
displayed and push the knob.

For further details, see page 261.

When using a voice command:
[XXXX (name) Push the talk switch and
say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.] is
heard and the name is displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the
“AUDIO
CONTROL”
knob
until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the knob.
[Deleted. Returning to the phone book.] is
heard and [Deleted] is displayed.
When using the knob:
[Deleted. Returning to the phone book.] is
heard and [Deleted] is displayed.
The system may not function in the following cases:

D If no name has been registered.
D If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

259

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

To delete speed dial

To change name

When using a voice command:

1. Push the talk switch and say [Delete
speed dial], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until [Del Spd Dial] is displayed and push the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say [Change
name], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”
knob until [Change Name] is displayed
and push the knob.

[XXXX (phone number) Push the talk
switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go
back.] is heard and the phone number is
displayed.

[Delete speed dial. Push the preset button
to delete from speed dial.] is heard.

[Change name. Push the talk switch and
say the name to change.] is heard.

2. Select the preset button that you want
to delete.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
the dial number that you want to
change is displayed and push the
knob.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.

[To delete preset... push the talk switch
and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.]
is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.
[Deleted.] is heard and [Deleted] is displayed.
[Returning to the phone book.] is heard.
The system may not function in the following cases:

D If no speed dial has been registered.
D If the preset button has not been as-

[Push the talk switch and say a new
name.] is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Record Name] is displayed, push the
knob and say new name.
[XXXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.
[Name changed. Returning to the phone
book.] is heard and [Changed] is displayed.

signed.

260

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

When using the knob:

To set speed dial

When using a voice command:

[Push the talk switch and say a new
name.] is heard.

1. Push the talk switch and say [Set
Speed dial], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until [Speed Dial] is displayed and push the knob.

[XXXX (phone number) To register this as
a speed dial entry, push the talk switch
and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.]
is heard and the phone number is displayed.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Record Name] is displayed, push the
knob and say new name.
[XXXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.
[Name changed. Returning to the phone
book.] is heard and [Changed] is displayed.
The system may not function in the following cases:

D If no name has been registered.
D If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

[Set speed dial. Push the talk switch and
say a name.] is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
the dial number that you want to register is displayed and push the knob.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.
[Push the preset
XXXX] is heard.

button

assign

2. Push and hold the desired preset button.
[preset... is now assigned. Returning to
the phone book.] is heard.
When using the knob:
[Push the preset
XXXX] is heard.

button

assign

Push and hold the desired preset button.
[preset... is now assigned. Returning to
the phone book.] is heard.
The system may not function in the following cases:

D If no name has been registered.
D If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

261

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Redial
The following can be performed:

Dial

A shortcut to each of the following
functions is available. Push the off−
hook switch and talk switch, and say
one of the following:

D Dial
D Delete
D Store

Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
the number that you want to dial is displayed and push the knob. After that, do
the one of the following:

To enter the redial

D Phone book add entry
D Phone book change name

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.

D Push the off−hook switch.
D Push the talk switch and say [dial].
D Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

INFORMATION

D Phone book delete entry
D Phone book delete speed dial
D Phone book list names
D Phone book set speed dial

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Redial] is displayed and push the
knob.
[Redial. Most recent outgoing call was
XXXX (phone number)] is heard and outgoing history is displayed.
[Please push the off−hook switch to dial.
Otherwise, push the talk switch and say
dial, previous, go back, store, or delete.]
is heard.

[Dial] is displayed and push the knob.

Delete
1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
the dial number that you want to delete
is displayed and push the knob.
2. Push the talk switch and say [Delete],
or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob
until [Delete] is displayed and push the
knob.
[Delete. Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back] is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.
[Deleted.] is heard.

262

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Callback
Store
1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
the dial number that you want to register is displayed and push the knob.

INFORMATION
D Up to five outgoing calls can be
stored in the system.

2. Push the talk switch and say [Store],
or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob
until [Store] is displayed and push the
knob.

D When five outgoing calls are stored

[Store. Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard.

D Only

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.
Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 255.
The system may not function in the following cases:

D If there is no outgoing history.
D If the phone book is locked.

in memory, the oldest outgoing call
is deleted to make room in memory
for new calls.
the latest outgoing call is
stored when the same telephone
number is dialed.

D A shortcut to “Redial” is available.

Push the off−hook switch and then
push the off−hook switch.

The following can be performed:

D Dial
D Delete
D Store
To enter the callback
1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Callback] is displayed and push the
knob.
[Callback. Most recent incoming call was
XXXX (phone number)] is heard and incoming history is displayed.
[Please push the off−hook switch to dial.
Otherwise, push the talk switch and say
dial, previous, go back, store, or delete.]
is heard.

263

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Dial

Store

Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
the number that you want to dial is displayed and push the knob. After that, do
the one of the following:

1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
the dial number that you want to register is displayed and push the knob.

D Push the off−hook switch.
D Push the talk switch and say [Dial].
D Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Dial] is displayed and push the knob.

2. Push the talk switch and say [Store],
or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob
until [Store] is displayed and push the
knob.

INFORMATION
D Up to five incoming calls can be
stored in the system.

D When five incoming calls are stored

in memory, the oldest incoming call
is deleted to make room in memory
for new calls.

[Store. Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Confirm] is displayed and push the
knob.
Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 255.
The system may not function in the following cases:

D If there is no incoming history.
D If the phone book is locked.

[Deleted.] is heard.

264

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Making a phone call
If the cellular phone is not registered, this
system cannot be used. See page 245 for
registering a cellular phone. Make sure
that [BT] is displayed and get the cellular
phone ready to use.
There are 3 ways to make a phone call
with this system.

D Speed dial
A phone call can be made with a preset
button in which a phone number is registered. See page 261 for setting the preset
buttons.

D Dial by Name
The system dials the numbers corresponding to the spoken names registered in the
system.

D Dial by Number
The system dials to the spoken numbers.

To speed dial

When using a voice command:

1. Push the preset button where the desired number is set. The name or telephone number is displayed.

[XXXX (phone number) Push the off−hook
switch to dial. Otherwise, push the talk
switch and say dial, or go back.] is heard.
After that, do the one of the following:

2. Push the off−hook switch to dial.
To dial by Name
1. Push the talk switch and say [Dial by
name].
[Dial by name. Please push the talk
switch and say the stored name, or say
list names.] is heard and [Dial by Name]
is displayed.
2. Push the talk switch and say the
phone name, or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until the name that you
want to dial is displayed and push the
knob.

D Push the off−hook switch.
D Push the talk switch and say [Dial].
D Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Dial] is displayed and push the knob.

When using the knob:
It calls the number.
The system may not function in the following cases:

D If there is no number registered in the
preset button.

D If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

To make a phone call
Push the off−hook switch
hands−free system on.

turn the

265

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

INFORMATION

To dial by Number

D The phone numbers registered in

1. Push the talk switch and say [Dial by
Number].

D The system does not recognize that

[Dial by number. Please push the talk
switch and say the number.] is heard and
[Dial by Num] is displayed.

the phone book can be retrieved.

the voice tag is not registered in
the registered cellular phone. For
details about voice tags, see “To
add entry” on page 255.

D A shortcut to [Dial by name] is
available. Push the talk switch and
say [Dial XXX (name you want to
dial)].

2. Push talk switch and say the dial number.
[Push the off−hook switch to dial. Otherwise, push the talk switch and say dial,
go back, or delete.] is heard.
To dial the number, do the one of the
following:

D Push the off−hook switch.
D Push the talk switch and say [Dial].
D Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until
[Dial] is displayed and push the knob.

If the number exceeds 24 digits, the system may not function properly.

INFORMATION
D The system can recognize single
digits from zero to nine, #(pound),
*(star), and +(plus). Numbers that
are ten or greater are not recognized.

D To speed up input, it is a good idea

to group all digits into a continuous
string. However, you can enter each
digit individually or group digits together in preferred string lengths.

The display corresponding to each operation appears on the screen as follows:
Input operation—
You say: [Nine, nine, five]
Voice output: [995 push the off−hook
switch to dial. Otherwise, push the
talk switch and say dial, go back, or
delete.]
Display: [995]
You say: [Seven, three, four]
Voice output: [734 push the off−hook
switch to dial. Otherwise, push the
talk switch and say dial, go back, or
delete.]

266

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Receiving a phone call
Display: [995734]

Cancel operation—

Repeat the above procedure until the
entire number that you want to dial is
input.

Do either one of the following:

Go back operation—

D Push the talk switch and say [Can-

You say: [Go back]
Voice output: [Go back, the
bers entered have been
Push the talk switch and
adding numbers otherwise
go back, or delete.]

last numremoved.
continue
say dial,

Display: [995]
Repeating the above operation deletes
the last digits in reverse order of input.
Delete operation—
You say: [Delete]
Voice output: [Deleted. The entire
number to dial has been deleted.
Please push the talk switch and say
the number.]
Display: [Dial by Num]
The display will return to the initial
screen that allows a number to be
input.

D Push the on−hook switch at anytime
during the operation.

cel] after the beep at anytime during the operation except while a call
is connected.

When receiving a phone call, a ring tone
is audible and the system changes into
the telephone mode.
When receiving a phone call, the display
is as follows. The display differs depending on whether or not the vehicle is in
motion.
When the vehicle is stopped:
Number, name, or [Incoming] is displayed.
When the vehicle is in motion:
[Incoming] is displayed.
Do either one of the following:

D Pushing the off−hook switch allows you
to talk on the phone.

D Pushing the on−hook switch refuses
the call.

To adjust the ring volume, push “+” or “−”
on the steering volume controls. Volume
adjustment cannot be done using the audio system.
Repeatedly pushing “−” on the steering
volume controls mutes the ring.
When receiving an international phone
call, the name of the party may not be
displayed correctly depending on the cellular phone.

267

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Talking on the phone
To transfer a call to the phone:
The received call can be transferred from
the hands−free system to the cellular
phone that is connected to Bluetoothr. For
details, refer to the user’s guide for the
cellular phone.

While talking on the phone, the display is
as follows. The display differs depending
on whether or not the vehicle is in motion.
When the vehicle is stopped:
Number is displayed.
When the vehicle is in motion:
[Talking] is displayed.
When the call is finished, push the on−
hook switch.
In the following situations, your voice may
not reach the party.

To transfer a call from the phone:
Pushing the off−hook switch while talking
on the cellular phone that is connected to
Bluetoothr allows you to talk hands−free.
A call can also be transferred by pushing
the talk switch and say [Call transfer].
To transfer a call to the phone:
The call can be transferred from the
hands−free system to the phone that is
connected to Bluetoothr. For details, refer
to the user’s guide for the cellular phone.

D Talk alternately with the other party on

the phone. If you talk at the same
time, the voice may not reach each
other. (It is not a malfunction.)

D Keep the volume of receiving voice
down. Otherwise, echo is coming up.
When you talk on the phone, speak
clearly towards the microphone.

D
D
D
D

When driving on a rough road.
When driving at high speeds.
When the window is open.
When the air conditioning vents face
the microphone.

D When the sound of the air conditioning
fan is loud.

The microphone can be muted by pushing
the talk switch and say [Mute].

268

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION

1− 9

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Air conditioning system

Manual air conditioning system
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic air conditioning system
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

270
273
273
276
280
280
283
284

269

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Manual air conditioning system—
—Controls
1. Air flow selector
2. Fan speed selector
3. Temperature selector
4. “A/C” button
5. Air intake selector

270

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

In this position, air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically
to clean up the front view quickly. It is
not possible to return to RECIRCULATE
in this position.

Fan speed selector
Turn the dial to adjust the fan speed—to
the right to increase, to the left to decrease.
Temperature selector

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears
the front view more quickly.

Turn the dial to adjust the temperature—to
the right to warm, to the left to cool.

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the
windshield vents.
Turning the air flow selector to the
windshield position turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view.

Air flow selector
Turn the dial to select the vents used for
air flow.
1. Panel—Air flows mainly
instrument panel vents.

from

the

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor
vents and the instrument panel vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.
4. Floor/Windshield—Air
flows
mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.
Turning the air flow selector to the
floor/windshield position turns on the
defogging function with the purpose of
clearing the front view.

In this position, air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically
to clean up the front view quickly. It is
not possible to return to RECIRCULATE
in this position.
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears
the front view more quickly.
For details about air flow selector settings,
see “—Air flow selector settings” on page
273.

271

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

“A/C” button
To turn on the air conditioning, press the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.

Air intake selector
Press the button to select the air source.
1. RECIRCULATE—Recirculates the air inside the vehicle.
2. FRESH—Draws
system.

outside

air

into

the

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
the air intake mode may change automatically to FRESH depending on the condition of the air conditioning system.

272

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Air flow selector settings

—Operating tips
D To cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes.
This vents the hot air, allowing the air
conditioning to cool the interior more
quickly.

D Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
leaves or snow, for example).

D Keep the area under the front (and
second) seats clear to allow air to circulate throughout the vehicle.

D On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This
can reduce the amount of fogging on
the windows.

D When driving on dusty roads, close all

windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake selector be set to
FRESH and the fan speed selector to
any setting except “0”.

With third seats

273

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D If following another vehicle on a dusty

road, or driving in windy and dusty
conditions, it is recommended that the
air intake selector be temporarily set to
RECIRCULATE, which will close off the
outside passage and prevent outside
air and dust from entering the vehicle
interior.

CAUTION
To prevent the windshield from fogging up, do not use the windshield
air flow button during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of
the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of
the windshield to fog up, blocking
your vision.

NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge, do not
leave the air conditioning system on
longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.

Heating
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—Any setting except “0”
Temperature—Towards WARM
(red zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—FLOOR
Air conditioning—OFF

D For quick heating, select recirculated

air for a few minutes. To keep the
windows from fogging, select fresh after the vehicle interior has been
warmed.

D Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidified heating.

D Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat
the vehicle interior while defrosting or
defogging the windshield.

Air conditioning
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—Any setting except “0”
Temperature—Towards COLD
(blue zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—ON

D For quick cooling, turn the temperature

selector dial fully towards COLD and
change the air intake selector mode to
RECIRCULATE.

274

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Ventilation
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—Any setting except “0”
Temperature—Towards COLD
(blue zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—OFF
Defogging
The inside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—Any setting except “0”
Temperature—Towards WARM
(red zone) to heat;
COLD (blue zone) to
cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Turning the air flow selector to the windshield or floor/windshield position turns on
the defogging function with the purpose of
clearing the front view.
When turning the air flow selector to windshield or floor/windshield position, air intake selector mode changes to FRESH
automatically to clean up the front view
quickly. It is not possible to return to
RECIRCULATE in this position.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears the
front view more quickly.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating. This setting clears the front view
more quickly.

D On humid days, do not blow cold air

D To heat the vehicle interior while de-

on the windshield—the difference between the outside and inside temperatures could make the fogging worse.

frosting
the
windshield,
floor/windshield air flow.

choose

Defrosting
The outside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:
Fan speed—Any setting except “0”
Temperature—Towards WARM
(red zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Turning the air flow selector to the windshield or floor/windshield position turns on
the defrosting function with the purpose of
clearing the front view.
When turning the air flow selector to windshield or floor/windshield position, air intake selector mode changes to FRESH
automatically to clean up the front view
quickly. It is not possible to return to
RECIRCULATE in this position.

275

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Automatic air conditioning system—
—Controls
1. “TEMP” (driver side temperature
control) button
2. Air intake selector
3. Air flow selector
4. Air conditioning display
5. “A/C” button
6. “DUAL” button
7. “PASS TEMP” (front passenger side
temperature control) button
8. Micro dust and pollen filter button
9. Fan speed selector
10. Windshield air flow button
11. “OFF” button
12. “AUTO” button

276

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

“AUTO” button

“DUAL” button

For automatic operation of the air conditioning, push the “AUTO” button. An indicator light will illuminate to show that the
automatic operation mode has been selected.

Push the button to change the mode of
the temperature setting.

In the automatic operation mode, the air
conditioning selects the most suitable fan
speed, air flow, air intake and on−off of
the air conditioning according to the temperature. As a result, the following may
occur.

D The system may switch automatically

to recirculated mode when the coolest
temperature setting is selected in summer.

D Immediately

after
the
switch
is
pressed, the fan may stop for a while
until warm or cool air is ready to flow.

D Cool air may flow to the area around
the upper body when the heater is on.

You may use manual controls if you want
to select your own settings.
Fan speed selector

With the indicator on—Individual temperature setting
With the indicator off—Simultaneous
temperature setting
“TEMP” (driver side temperature control) button
To increase the temperature, press the
“Ɯ” side. To decrease it, press the “Ɲ”
side.
“LO” appears when you adjust to maximum cooling, and “HI” appears when you
adjust to maximum warming.

“PASS TEMP” (front passenger
temperature control) button

side

To increase the temperature, press the
“Ɯ” side. To decrease it, press the “Ɲ”
side.
“LO” appears when you adjust to maximum cooling, and “HI” appears when you
adjust to maximum warming.
This button changes the temperature on
the front passenger side only.
“OFF” button
Push the “OFF” button to turn off the air
conditioning system.

With the “DUAL” button indicator on—This
button changes the temperature on the
driver side only.
With the “DUAL” button indicator off—This
button changes the temperature on the
driver side and front passenger side simultaneously.
This function will be cancelled when the
“PASS TEMP” button is pushed.

Push the “Ɯ” (increase) or “Ɲ” (decrease)
side of the button to adjust the fan speed.
In automatic operation, you do not have
to adjust the fan speed unless you desire
another fan speed mode.

277

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

4. Floor/Windshield—Air
flows
mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.
This position allows the air intake to
select FRESH automatically. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly. It
is
not
possible
to
return
to
RECIRCULATE in this position.
Pushing this button turns on the
defroster−linked air conditioning. This is
to clean up the front view more quickly.
For details about air flow selector settings,
see “—Air flow selector settings” on page
280.

Air flow selector
Push one of the buttons to select the
vents used for air flow.
In automatic operation, you do not have
to select the air flow unless you desire
another air flow mode.

Windshield air flow button
When this button is pressed, air flows
mainly from the windshield vents and
turns on the defogging function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.
Pressing this button once again returns
the air flow mode to the last one used.
In this position, the air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically to
clean up the front view quickly. It is not
possible to return to RECIRCULATE in
this position.
Pressing the windshield air flow button
turns on the defroster−linked air conditioning. This is to clean up the front view
more quickly.
To turn off the air conditioning alone,
press the “A/C” button once again.

the

When the “A/C” button is not pressed in,
pressing another air flow button turns off
the air conditioning.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor
vents and the instrument panel vents.

For details about air flow selector settings,
see “—Air flow selector settings” on page
280.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly
instrument panel vents.

from

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.

278

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

“A/C” button
To turn on the air conditioning, press the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.
Micro dust and pollen filter button
Push the button to remove the airborne
pollen and micro dust from the cabin as
soon as possible. An indicator will come
on.

Air intake selector
Press the button to select the air source.
1. RECIRCULATE
(indicator
light
is
on)—Recirculates the air inside the vehicle.
2. FRESH (indicator light is off)—Draws
outside air into the system.
To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
the air intake mode may change automatically to FRESH depending on the condition of the air conditioning system.

When the ambient temperature is low, the
following may occur:

D Air intake mode does not switch to
RECIRCULATE.

D The air conditioning system operates
automatically.

D The operation is cancelled after 1 minute.

In rainy weather, the windows may fog up.
Press the windshield air flow button.

The air intake mode will switch to
RECIRCULATE mode. The air will flow to
the upper part of the body of the
occupants and pollen and micro dust will
be removed. After about 3 minutes have
elapsed, the operation stops, and the air
conditioning system automatically returns
to the settings prior to the button being
pushed.
To stop the operation, do one of the following:

D Press the micro dust and pollen filter
button again.

D Press the “AUTO” button.
D Press one of the air flow selector buttons or the windshield air flow button.

279

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Air flow selector settings

—Operating tips
D To cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes.
This vents the hot air, allowing the air
conditioning to cool the interior more
quickly.

D Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
leaves or snow, for example).

D Keep the area under the front (and
second) seats clear to allow air to circulate throughout the vehicle.

D On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This
can reduce the amount of fogging on
the windows.

D When driving on dusty roads, close all

With third seats

280

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D If following another vehicle on a dusty

NOTICE
To prevent battery discharge, do not
leave the air conditioning system on
longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.

Heating

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls to:

—For automatic operation

Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—To the desired
temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—OFF
—For manual operation

Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—To the desired
temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—ON
—For manual operation

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards high temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—FLOOR
Air conditioning—OFF

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards low temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—ON

D For quick heating, select recirculated

D For quick cooling, select recirculated

air for a few minutes. To keep the
windows from fogging, select fresh after the vehicle interior has been
warmed.

air.

D Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidified heating.

D Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat
the vehicle interior while defrosting or
defogging the windshield.

281

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Ventilation
For best results, set controls to:
—For automatic operation
Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—Towards low temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—OFF
—For manual operation
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards low temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—OFF
Defogging and defrosting
—The inside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:
—For automatic operation
Temperature—Towards high temperature
to heat; low temperature
to cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD

—For manual operation
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards high temperature
to heat; low temperature
to cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Pressing the windshield air flow button
turns on the defogging function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.
Pressing this button once again returns
the air flow mode to the last one used.
In this position, the air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically to
clean up the front view quickly. It is not
possible to return to RECIRCULATE in
this position.
Pressing the windshield air flow button
turns on the defroster−linked air conditioning. This is to clean up the front view
more quickly.
To turn off the air conditioning alone,
press the “A/C” button once again.

When the “A/C” button is not pressed in,
pressing another air flow button turns off
the air conditioning.

D On humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield—the difference between the outside and inside temperatures could make the fogging worse.

—The outside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:
—For automatic operation
Temperature—Towards high temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
—For manual operation
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards high temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Pressing the windshield air flow button
turns on the defogging function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.
Pressing this button once again returns
the air flow mode to the last one used.

282

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Side vents
In this position, the air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically to
clean up the front view quickly. It is not
possible to return to RECIRCULATE in
this position.

Open
Close

Pushing this button turns on the defroster−
linked air conditioning. This is to clean up
the front view more quickly.
To turn off the air conditioning alone,
press the “A/C” button once again.
When the “A/C” button is not pressed in,
pressing another air flow button turns off
the air conditioning.

D To heat the vehicle interior while defrosting
the
windshield,
floor/windshield air flow.

choose

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
the side vents. The side vents may be
opened or closed as shown.

You can change air flow direction by turning the side vents.

283

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Checking and replacing the
air conditioning filter

Air conditioning filter—

The air conditioning filter may clog after long use. The filter may need to be
replaced if the air flow of the air conditioning and heater experiences extreme
reductions in operating efficiency, or if
the windows begin to fog up easily in
FRESH mode.

The air conditioning filter information
label is placed in the glove box as
shown and indicates that a filter has
been installed.

The air conditioning filter is behind the
glove box.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,
inspect and replace the air conditioning
filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy
traffic flow, such as inner city or desert
areas, early replacement may be required.
(For scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

The air conditioning filter prevents dust
from entering the vehicle through the air
conditioning vent.

284

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

1. Open the glove box. Slide off the
damper as shown.

2. Push in each side of the glove box
to disconnect the claws.

3. Remove the filter cover as shown in
the illustration.

285

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

4. Pull the filter out of the filter outlet.
Inspect the filter on the surface.
If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

When inserting the filter in the filter
outlet, keep the arrow pointing up.

INFORMATION
The air filter should be installed properly in position. The use of air conditioning with the air filter removed
may cause deteriorated dustproof performance and then affect air conditioning performance.

286

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION

1− 10

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Other equipment

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage storage boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bottle holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tie−down hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grocery bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof luggage carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

288
288
291
291
292
293
294
294
295
295
296
296
300
303
304

287

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Clock

Power outlets (12 VDC)
To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.
To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.
If quick adjustment to a full hour is desired, push the “:00” button.
For example, if the “:00” button is depressed when the time is between
1:01—1:29, the time will change to 1:00.
If the time is between 1:30—1:59, the
time will change to 2:00.
The engine switch must be in the “ACC”
or “ON” position.

Manual air conditioning system

Automatic air conditioning system

If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00 (one
o’clock).

Instrument panel

Rear console box

288

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Power outlet (115 VAC)
NOTICE
z To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the electricity
over the total vehicle capacity of 12
V/120W (front and rear outlets together).
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlets longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
Luggage compartment

The power outlets are designed
power supply for car accessories.

for

The engine switch must be in the “ACC”
or “ON” position for the power outlets to
be used.

z Close the power outlet lids when
the power outlets are not in use.
Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug that fits the outlet,
or allowing any liquid to get into
the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits.

This power outlet is designed for use
as a power supply for electric appliances in the vehicle.
The engine switch must be in the “ON”
position for the power outlet to be used.
The maximum capacity for this power outlet is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to
use an appliance that requires more than
115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit
will activate and cut the power supply.
The power supply will restart automatically
when you use an appliance that operates
within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

289

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

NOTICE
z To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlet longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
z Close the power outlet lid when the
power outlet is not in use. Inserting
anything other than an appropriate
plug that fits the outlet may cause
electrical failure or short circuits.

To use the power outlet, push the main
switch on the instrument panel.
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the power outlet is ready for use.

The power outlet is not designed for
the following electric appliances even
though their power consumption is under 115 VAC/100W. These appliances
may not operate properly.

D Appliances with high initial peak watt-

age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,
compressor−driven refrigerators, electric
pumps, electric tools, etc.

D Measuring devices which process pre-

cise data: medical equipment, measuring instruments, etc.

D Other appliances requiring an extremely

stable power supply: microcomputer−
controlled electric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may cause
radio noise.

Push the main switch once again to turn
the power outlet off. When the power outlet is not in use, make sure that the main
switch is turned off.

290

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Auxiliary box
(overhead console)

Glove box

NOTICE
During hot weather, the interior of the
vehicle becomes very hot. Do not
leave anything flammable or deformable such as a lighter, glasses, etc.
inside.

To use the glove box:
Open by pulling the lever.

To use the box, open it as shown
above.

Lock by inserting the master key and turning it clockwise.

CAUTION

Unlock by inserting the master key and
turning it counterclockwise.

D To reduce the chance of injury in

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the glove box door
closed while driving.

case of an accident or a sudden
stop, always keep the auxiliary box
closed while driving.

D As this holder is designed for hold-

ing light objects such as eyeglasses, do not place objects heavier than 0.2 kg (0.4 lb.) in it. Heavy
objects may cause the holder to
open and the contents to fly out
resulting in injuries.

291

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Auxiliary box
(instrument panel)

To open the box, push the “OPEN
CLOSE” button.
To close the box, push the “OPEN
CLOSE” button again.

Luggage storage boxes

Front

To use the box, do the following.
Front: Remove the deck board.
Rear (type A): Open the deck board by
pulling up the strap.
Rear (type B): Fold up the deck board.

Do not attempt to open the box forcibly
when your vehicle is on a steep downhill.
Move your vehicle to flat road and open
the box by pushing the button.

CAUTION

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the auxiliary box closed
while driving.

Rear (type B)

To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the luggage storage
boxes closed while driving.
Rear (type A)

292

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Rear console box
UPPER TRAY
To access the upper tray, raise the console box lid without touching the lock
release lever.

CONSOLE BOX
To access the rear console box, pull up
the lock release lever while raising the
rear console box lid.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the console box closed
while driving.

293

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Front cup holders

Rear cup holders
The cup holders are designed for holding cups or drink−cans securely.
For the rear/second seat cup holder: To
use the holder, push down the armrest by
pulling the strap forward.

CAUTION

The cup holders are designed for holding cups or drink−cans securely.

For rear/second seats

Do not place anything else other than
cups or drink−cans in the cup holder,
as such items may be thrown about
in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.

A detachable adapter is provided for each
cup holder. Installing the adapter allows a
smaller cup or drink−can to be securely
held in the holder.

CAUTION
Do not place anything else other than
cups or drink−cans in the cup holder,
as such items may be thrown about
in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an accident.

For third seats

294

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Bottle holders

Tie−down hooks
The bottle holders are designed to hold
bottles securely.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to use the holder for
any other purpose for which it was
intended. Inappropriately sized or
shaped objects may be thrown about
in the compartment and possibly injure people in the vehicle during a
sudden braking or an accident.
Front door

NOTICE
Do not put a cup or open bottle in
the bottle holder because the contents may spill when the door opens
or closes.

To secure your luggage, use the tie−down
hooks as shown above.
See “—Stowage precautions” on page 336
in Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.
Vehicles with third seat: When using the
tie−down hooks, stow the third seat (For
detailed information, see “—Stowing third
seats for luggage space” on page 47 in
Section 1−3).

CAUTION

Rear door

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie−
down hooks stored when not in use.

295

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Grocery bag hooks

Luggage cover

This hook is designed to hang things
such as grocery bags.

BEFORE USING LUGGAGE COVER

NOTICE

Move the rear/second seats to the rear−
most lock position.

To prevent damage to the hook, avoid
hanging heavy load on it.

296

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

USING LUGGAGE COVER
To use the luggage cover:
1. Attach the front hooks of the luggage cover to the head restraint.
2. Pull out the rear luggage cover and
hook it on the anchors.

CAUTION

D Do not place anything on the lug-

gage cover. Such items may be
thrown about and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden
braking or a collision.

D To reduce the chance of death or

serious injury in case of an accident or sudden stop, make sure the
luggage cover is secured in place.

If the front hooks cannot be attached to
the head restraint, push down the
rear/second seatback.

REMOVING LUGGAGE COVER
Compress the end of the luggage cover
and lift the cover up.
After you remove the luggage cover, stow
it under deck board as described below.
This will prevent passengers from injury in
the event of a sudden stop or accident.

297

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

STOWING LUGGAGE
third seats)

COVER

(without

1. Open the deck board.

2. Remove the deck side cover.

298

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

3. Insert the right end of the luggage
cover into the hole in the luggage
storage box as shown.

4. Compress the left end of the luggage cover, and fit it into the hollow
on the other side of the luggage
storage box.

When you stow the rear cargo net and
luggage cover together, stow the rear
cargo net first and then the luggage
cover. (See “Rear cargo net” on page
300 in this section.)

CAUTION

Place the front portion of the luggage
cover (2) on the stowed rear cargo net
and then place the rear portion of the
luggage cover (1) over the rear cargo
net. Otherwise, the deck board may not
close securely.

Make sure the luggage cover is surely
stowed.

299

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Rear cargo net
To secure your luggage, use the rear
cargo net. You can also put loads on
the net.
See “—Stowage precautions” on page 336
in Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.

NOTICE
z Do not place breakable items on the
net.
z Do not place anything heavier than
10 kg (22.1 lb.) on the net.

CAUTION

D To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop,
make sure the net is secured in
place.

D Do not climb on or hang on the
net.

D To prevent cargo and luggage from

sliding forward during braking, do
not place anything on the net higher than the rear seatbacks. Otherwise, such items may be thrown
about and possibly injure people in
the vehicle during sudden braking
or an accident.

300

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

USING CARGO NET
To use the net, insert the right end of the
pipe into the hole.

Compress the left end of the pipe, and fit
it into the hole on the other side of the
luggage compartment.
Vehicles with third seat: When sitting in
the third seat, you cannot use the rear
cargo net. Make sure to remove the rear
cargo net.
When using the rear cargo net, stow the
third seat (For detailed information, see
“—Stowing third seats for luggage space”
on page 47 in Section 1−3).

301

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

STOWING REAR CARGO NET (without
third seat)
1. Open the deck board.

2. Remove the deck side cover.

3. Insert the right end of the rear cargo
net into the luggage storage box as
shown.

302

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Roof luggage carrier

4. Compress the left end of the rear
cargo net, and fit it into the other
side of the luggage storage box.

CAUTION
Make sure the rear cargo net is surely stowed.

When you stow the rear cargo net and
luggage cover together, stow the rear
cargo net first and then the luggage
cover. (See “Luggage cover” on page
296 in this section.)

The roof luggage carrier consists of
roof rails (1) attached to the roof and
sliding cross rails (2).

1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise
loosen the cross rails.

To adjust the positions of cross rails, do
this.
to

2. Slide the cross rails to the desired
position for loading the luggages of
various sizes.
3. After adjusting, be sure to tighten the
cross rails by turning knobs clockwise.
Follow the manufacture’s instructions and
precautions when installing the attachments or their equivalent.

303

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Floor mat
CAUTION
When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier, observe the following:

D Place the cargo so that its weight

is distributed evenly between the
front and rear axles.

D If loading long or wide cargo, never

exceed the vehicle overall length or
width.
(See
“Dimensions
and
weights” on page 428 in Section 8
for information on your vehicle
overall length and width.)

D Before driving, make sure the cargo
is securely fastened on the roof
luggage carrier.

D Loading cargo on the roof luggage
carrier will make the center of the
vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high
speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,
sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover due to
failure to operate this vehicle correctly.

D If driving for a long distance, on
rough roads, or at high speeds,
stop the vehicle now and then during the trip to make sure the cargo
remains in its place.

D Do not exceed 46.2 kg (102.6 lb.)

cargo weight on the roof luggage
carrier.

NOTICE
When loading the luggages, be careful
not to scratch the surface of the
moon roof.

Use a floor mat of the correct size.
If the vehicle carpet and floor mat have
2 holes, then they are designed for use
with locking clips. Attach the floor mat to
the vehicle carpet using the clips. Lock
the clips into the holes in the vehicle
carpet.

304

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in the
floor mat slipping and interfering with
the movement of the pedals during
driving, resulting in an accident.

D Make sure the floor mat is properly

placed on the vehicle carpet and
the correct side faces upward.

D Do not place floor mats on top of
existing mats.

305

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

306

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR
TOYOTA
Information before driving your Toyota
Utility vehicle precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three−way catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Iridium−tipped spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric power steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear step bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your Toyota’s identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo and luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

308
309
309
311
311
312
313
314
315
315
319
319
321
321
323
323
324
335
336
338

307

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Utility vehicle precautions
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher ground
clearance and narrower tread in relation
to the height of its center of gravity to
make it capable of performing in a wide
variety of off−road applications. Specific
design characteristics give it a higher
center of gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature
causes this type of vehicle to be more
likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles
have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road allowing you
to anticipate problems. It is not designed for cornering at the same
speeds as ordinary passenger cars any
more than low−slung sports cars designed to perform satisfactorily under
off−road conditions. Therefore, sharp
turns at excessive speeds may cause
rollover.

CAUTION
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of serious
personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

D In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Therefore, the driver and all
passengers should fasten their seat
belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

D Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-

vers, if at all possible. Failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle
rollover causing death or serious
injury.

308

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D Always slow down in gusty cross-

winds. Because of its profile and
higher center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side
winds than an ordinary passenger
car. Slowing down will allow you to
have better control.

D When driving off−road or in rugged

terrain, do not drive at excessive
speeds, jump, make sharp turns,
strike objects, etc. This may cause
loss of control or vehicle rollover
causing death or serious injury. You
are also risking expensive damage
to your vehicle’s suspension and
chassis.

D Do not drive horizontally across
steep slopes. Driving straight up or
straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off−road vehicle) can tip over sideways much
more easily than forward or backward.

Break−in period

Fuel

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

FUEL TYPE

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break−in. But following a few simple tips
for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add
to the future economy and long life of
your vehicle:

Your new vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.

D Avoid full throttle acceleration when
starting and driving.

D Avoid racing the engine.
D Try to avoid hard stops during the first

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, your
Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.
The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will
not.

D Do not drive for a long time at any

At a minimum, the gasoline you use
should meet the specifications of ASTM
D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93
in Canada.

D Do not tow a trailer during the first 800

NOTICE

300 km (200 miles).

single speed, either fast or slow.
km (500 miles).

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of
leaded gasoline will cause the three−
way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and the emission control
system to function improperly. Also,
this can increase maintenance costs.

309

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

OCTANE RATING

QUALITY GASOLINE

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Select octane rating 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher.

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,
Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for quality fuel named
World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that
is expected to be applied world wide.
The WWFC consists of four categories
that depend on required emission levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been
adopted. The WWFC improves air quality by providing for better emissions in
vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction
through better vehicle performance.

Toyota allows the use of oxygenate
blended gasoline where the oxygenate
content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your
Toyota, be sure that it has an octane
rating no lower than 87.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than 87 may result in engine
knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to
engine damage.
If your engine knocks...
If you detect heavy knocking even when
using the recommended fuel, or if you
hear steady knocking while holding a
steady speed on level roads, consult your
Toyota dealer.
However, occasionally, you may notice
light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal
and there is no need for concern.
GASOLINE
ADDITIVES

CONTAINING

DETERGENT

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline
that contains detergent additives to
avoid build−up of engine deposits.
However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.
contains detergent additives to keep clean
and/or clean intake systems.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE is
available in many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner
burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.

Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing methanol.
GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT
Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

310

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Fuel pump shut off system

Operation in foreign countries

In a very few cases, you may experience
driveability problems caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you
continue to have unacceptable driveability,
try changing gasoline brands. If this does
not rectify your problem, then consult your
Toyota dealer.

The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine to minimize the
risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls
or an airbag inflates upon collision. To
restart the engine after the fuel pump shut
off system activates, turn the engine
switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position
once and start it.

If you plan to drive your Toyota in
another country...

NOTICE

CAUTION

z Do not use gasohol other than
stated above. It will cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.

Inspect the ground under the vehicle
before restarting the engine. If you
find that fuel has leaked onto the
ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. In
this case, do not restart the engine.

GASOLINE QUALITY

z If driveability problems occur (poor
hot starting, vaporizing, engine
knock, etc.), discontinue the use.

First, comply with the vehicle registration
laws.
Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded and minimum octane
number).

z Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling. Gasohol may cause
paint damage.
FUEL TANK CAPACITY
60 L (15.9 gal., 13.2 Imp. gal.)

311

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Three−way catalytic converters
The three−way catalytic converter is an
emission control device installed in the
exhaust system.
The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the
exhaust gas.

CAUTION

D Keep people and combustible mate-

rials away from the exhaust pipe
while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.

D Do not idle or park your vehicle
over anything that might burn easily such as grass, leaves, paper or
rags.

NOTICE
A large amount of unburned gases
flowing into the three−way catalytic
converter may cause it to overheat
and create a fire hazard. To prevent
this and other damage, observe the
following precautions:
z Use only unleaded gasoline.
z Do not drive with an extremely low
fuel level; running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, creating an excessive load on the three−
way catalytic converter.
z Do not allow the engine to run at
idle speed for more than 20 minutes.
z Avoid racing the engine.
z Do not push−start or pull−start your
vehicle.
z Do not turn off the engine while the
vehicle is moving.

z Keep your engine in good running
order. Malfunctions in the engine
electrical system, electronic ignition
system/distributor ignition system
or fuel systems could cause an extremely high three−way catalytic
converter temperature.
z If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, take your
vehicle in for a check−up as soon
as possible. Remember, your Toyota
dealer knows your vehicle and its
three−way catalytic converter system best.
z To ensure that the three−way catalytic converter and the entire emission control system operate properly, your vehicle must receive the
periodic inspections required by the
Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For
scheduled maintenance information,
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

312

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Engine exhaust cautions
CAUTION

D Do not remain for a long time in a

bon monoxide (CO) that is colorless
and odorless.
Inhaling exhaust
gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

parked vehicle with the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however,
do so only in an unconfined area
and adjust the heating or cooling
system to force outside air into the
vehicle.

D The exhaust should be checked

D Keep the back door closed while

D Exhaust gases include harmful car-

occasionally. If there is a hole or
crack caused by corrosion, damage
to a joint or abnormal exhaust
noise, be sure to have the vehicle
inspected and repaired by your
Toyota dealer. Failure to do so may
allow exhaust gases to enter the
vehicle, resulting in death or a
serious health hazard.

D If the vehicle is in a poorly venti-

lated area, turn the engine off. In a
closed area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter
the vehicle. This may lead to death
or a serious health hazard.

driving. An open or unsealed back
door may cause exhaust gases to
be drawn into the vehicle.

D To allow proper operation of your

vehicle’s ventilation system, keep
the inlet grilles in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other obstructions.

D If the smell of exhaust is noticed
inside the vehicle, open the windows. Large amounts of exhaust in
the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in
death or a serious health hazard.
Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.

D Do not leave the engine running in

an area with snow build−up, or
where it is snowing. If snowbanks
build up around the vehicle while
the engine is running, exhaust
gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a
serious health hazard.

D When taking a nap in the vehicle,

always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move
the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an
accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle
is parked in a poorly ventilated
area, exhaust gases may collect and
enter the vehicle, leading to death
or a serious health hazard.

313

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Facts about engine oil
consumption
FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL
Engine oil has the primary functions of
lubricating and cooling the inside of the
engine, and plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order.
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil during normal
engine operation. The causes of oil
consumption in a normal engine are as
follows.

D Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston

rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil
is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder.
High negative pressure generated when
the vehicle is decelerating sucks some
of this oil into the combustion chamber.
This oil as well as some part of the oil
film left on the cylinder wall is burned
by the high temperature combustion
gases during the combustion process.

D Oil is also used to lubricate the stems

of the intake valves. Some of this oil
is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is
burned along with the fuel. High temperature exhaust gases also burn the
oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve
stems.

The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the viscosity of the oil, the
quality of the oil and the conditions the
vehicle is driven under.
More oil is consumed by high−speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil, since
its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls
have not become conditioned.
Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000
km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600
miles)
When judging the amount of oil consumption, note that the oil may become
diluted and make it difficult to judge
the true level accurately.
As an example, if a vehicle is used for
repeated short trips, and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
show any drop in the oil level at all, even
after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This
is because the oil is gradually becoming
diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
appear that the oil level has not changed.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CHECK
One of the most important points in proper vehicle maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so that oil
function will not be impaired. Therefore, it
is essential that the oil level be checked
regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil
level be checked every time you refuel
the vehicle.

NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly
could lead to serious engine trouble
due to insufficient oil.
For detailed information on oil level check,
see “Checking the engine oil level” on
page 404 in Section 7−2.

The diluting ingredients evaporate out
when the vehicle is then driven at high
speeds, as on an expressway, making it
appear that oil is excessively consumed
after driving at high speeds.

314

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Iridium−tipped spark plugs
(2.4 L 4−cylinder [2AZ−FE]
engine)

Iridium−tipped spark plugs
(3.5 L V6 [2GR−FE] engine)

Brake system
The tandem master cylinder brake system
is a hydraulic system with two separate
sub−systems. If either sub−system should
fail, the other will still work. However, the
pedal will be harder to press, and your
stopping distance will increase. Also, the
brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with only a
single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped
spark plugs.

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped
spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs.
Do not adjust gaps for engine performance or smooth driveability.

Use only Toyota genuine iridium−
tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust
gaps for engine performance or
smooth driveability.

BRAKE BOOSTER
The brake booster uses engine vacuum to
power−assist the brakes. If the engine
should quit while you are driving, you can
bring the vehicle to a stop with normal
pedal pressure. There is enough reserved
vacuum for one or two stops—but no
more!

For details about the spark plug type, see
“Service specifications” on page 429 in
Section 8.

315

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CAUTION

D Do not pump the brake pedal if the
engine stalls. Each push on the
pedal uses up your reserved vacuum.

D Even if the power assist is com-

pletely lost, the brakes will still
work. But you will have to push the
pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will
increase.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The anti−lock brake system is designed
to help prevent lock−up of the wheels
during a sudden braking or braking on
slippery road surfaces. This assists in
providing directional stability and steering performance of the vehicle under
these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brake
pedal: When the anti−lock brake system
function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.
In this situation, to let the anti−lock
brake system work for you, just hold the
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not
pump the brake in a panic stop. This
will result in reduced braking performance.
The anti−lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated
to a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

When the anti−lock brake system is activated, the following conditions may
occur. They do not indicate a malfunction of the system:

D You may hear the anti−lock brake sys-

tem operating and feel the brake pedal
pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steering wheel. You
may also hear the motor sound in the
engine compartment even after the vehicle is stopped.

D At the end of the anti−lock brake system activation, the brake pedal may
move a little forward.

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery
road surfaces such as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site,
joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day
tends to activate the anti−lock brake system.
A sound may be heard from the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the anti−
lock brake system is in the self−check
mode. This sound does not indicate a
malfunction.

316

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti−lock
brake system: Although the anti−lock
brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to
drive with all due care and maintain
a moderate speed and safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle
stability and effectiveness of steering
wheel operation even with the anti−
lock brake system on.
If tire grip performance exceeds its
capability, or if hydroplaning occurs
during high speed driving in the rain,
the anti−lock brake system does not
provide vehicle control.

D Driving with tire chains installed.
D Driving over the steps such as the
joints on the road.

D Driving on roads where the road
surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at
appropriate pressure: The anti−lock
brake system detects vehicle speeds
using the speed sensors for respective wheels’ turning speeds. The use
of tires other than specified may fail
to detect the accurate turning speed
resulting in a longer stopping distance.

For the U.S.A.

Anti−lock brake system is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate
speed and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you.
Compared with vehicles without an
anti−lock brake system, your vehicle
may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases:

D Driving on rough, gravel or snow−
covered roads.

For Canada

317

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

“ABS” warning light
The light comes on when the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position. If
the anti−lock brake system and the brake
assist system work properly, the light
turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter,
if the system malfunctions, the light
comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
following systems do not operate, but the
brake system still operates conventionally.

D
D
D
D
D

Anti−lock brake system
Brake assist system
Traction control system
“AUTO LSD” system
Enhanced vehicle stability control system

D Downhill assist control system
D Hill−start assist control system
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
somewhere in the components monitored by the warning light. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
service the vehicle.

D The light does not come on when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position, or remains on.

D The light comes on while you are driving.

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE
SYSTEM
Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc type
parking brake system. This type of brake
system needs bedding−down of the brake
shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.
Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding−down.
BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM
When you slam the brakes on, the
brake assist system judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful
braking for a driver who cannot hold
down the brake pedal firmly.
When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be applied. At this time,
you may hear a sound in the engine
compartment and feel the vibrations of the
brake pedal. This does not indicate a malfunction.
The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to
a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

318

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Brake pad wear limit
indicators
For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers” on page 129 in Section 1−6.

Electric power steering system
The electric power steering system, using an electric motor, assists the turning of the steering wheel.
In the following cases, you may feel the
steering becomes heavy. However, the
electric power steering system warning
light does not come on. (Because it is
not a malfunction.)

D When maneuvering or turning frequently
over a long time

The brake pad wear limit indicators on
your disc brakes give a warning noise
when the brake pads are worn to where
replacement is required.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise
while driving, have the brake pads
checked and replaced by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the pads are not
replaced when necessary.

The power steering effect will be reduced to prevent the system from overheating. Avoid turning the steering
wheel, or stop the vehicle and turn the
engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK”
position. The system will become cool
in about 10 minutes.

NOTICE
Frequent maneuvering and turning
over a long time may cause damage
to the system in which the mechanism prevents overheating of the electric power steering system.

319

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D When the battery is discharged

D The light does not come on when the
engine switch is turned to the “ON”
position or remains on.

Check the battery’s condition. If necessary, recharge or replace the battery.
For details, see “Checking battery condition” on page 418 in Section 7−3.

D The light stays on while you are driving.

CAUTION

Electric power steering system warning
light
The light comes on when the engine
switch is turned to the “ON” position. If
the electric power steering system works
properly, the light turns off after a few
seconds. If the system has malfunctions,
the light comes on again.
If the following conditions occur, this
indicates a malfunction somewhere in
the components monitored by the warning light system. Contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible to service
the vehicle.

If the electric power steering system
warning light comes on, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible. In this case, more effort
is required for the steering wheel to
turn than usual. Drive your vehicle
while firmly gripping the steering
wheel.

INFORMATION
When the steering wheel is turned, a
motor
operating
sound
(whining
sound) may be heard. This occurs
when the power steering motor works
and is not defective.

320

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Rear step bumper

Your Toyota’s identification—
—Vehicle identification
number
The vehicle identification number (VIN)
is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
This number is stamped under the right
front seat and top left of the instrument
panel where it can be seen through the
windshield from the outside.
This is the primary identification number
for your Toyota. It is used in registering
the ownership of your vehicle.

The rear step bumper is for rear end
protection and easier step−up loading.

Under the right front seat

To get on the rear step bumper, use the
shaded area between the arrows in the
illustration.

CAUTION

D Do not allow more than one person

to get on the rear step bumper at
a time. It is designed for only one
person.

D Never drive the vehicle with anyone
on the rear step bumper.

Top left of the instrument panel

321

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
also on the Certification Label.

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

322

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Theft prevention labels
(except for Canada)
Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are approximately 47
mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce
the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from
stolen vehicles. The label is designed so
that once it is applied to a surface, any
attempt to remove it will result in destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring
these labels intact from one part to another, will be impossible.

Suspension and chassis
CAUTION
Do not modify the suspension/chassis
with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It
can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting in loss of control.

NOTICE
You should not attempt to remove the
theft prevention labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.

323

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Tire information—
—Tire symbols
This illustration indicates typical tire
symbols.
1. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire
size” on page 326.
2. DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)—For details, see
“—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)” on page 325.
3. Uniform tire quality grading—
For details, see “—Uniform tire
quality grading” that follows.
4. The location of the treadwear
indicators—For details, see
“Checking and replacing tires” on
page 410.
5. Tire ply composition and materials—Plies mean a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords. Cords
mean the strands forming the plies
in the tire.
6. Radial tire or bias−ply tires—A
radial tire has “RADIAL” on the
sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

324

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)
7. “TUBELESS”
or
“TUBE
TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not
have a tube inside the tire and air
is directly filled in the tire. A tube
type tire has a tube inside the tire
and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
8. Load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure—For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires”
on page 410.
9. Maximum cold tire inflation
pressure—This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. For details about recommended
cold
tire
inflation
pressure, see “Tires” on page 433.
10.Summer tire or all season
tire—An all season tire has “M+S”
on the sidewall. The tire not
marked with “M+S” is a summer
tire. For details, see “Types of
tires” on page 338.

The “DOT” symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

This illustration indicates typical DOT
and Tire Identification Number (TIN).
1. “DOT” symbol
2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3. Tire manufacturer’s identification
mark
4. Tire size code
5. Manufacturer’s optional tire type
code (3 or 4 letters)
6. Manufacturing week
7. Manufacturing year

325

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Tire size

This illustration indicates typical tire
size.
1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,
T=Temporary use)
2. Section width (in millimeters)
3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section
width)
4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,
D=Diagonal)
5. Wheel diameter (in inches)
6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one
letter)

—Name of each section of tire

1. Section width
2. Tire height
3. Wheel diameter

1. Bead
2. Sidewall
3. Shoulder
4. Tread
5. Belt
6. Inner liner
7. Reinforcing rubber
8. Carcass
9. Rim lines
10.Bead wires
11. Chafer

326

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Uniform tire quality grading
This information has been prepared
in accordance with regulations issued
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides
the purchasers and/or prospective
purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer
any questions you may have as you
read this information.
DOT quality grades—All passenger
vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality
grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear
200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear—The treadwear grade is
a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and a half (1−1/2) times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction
grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C, and they represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and
does not include cornering (turning)
traction.

327

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Temperature A, B, C—The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No.109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for
this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

328

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term

Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressure

tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile
under that condition

Maximum inflation pressure

the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it
is shown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure

cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items
are available as factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weight

the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional engine

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

Normal occupant weight

68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that follows

Occupant distribution

distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table
1 that follows

sum of—
curb weight;
accessory weight;
vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight

329

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Tire related term

Meaning

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing
over 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,
not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special
trim

Rim

a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)

nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation

rim diameter and width

Rim type designation

the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width

nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

Vehicle normal load on the tire

the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side

the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Bead

the part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply
cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

330

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Tire related term

Meaning

Bead separation

a breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

Bias ply tire

a pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Carcass

the tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears
the load

Chunking

the breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

Cord

the strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separation

the parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Cracking

any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord
material

a pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim
is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed
to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges
inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tire

a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures
than the corresponding standard tire

Groove

the space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner

the layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

331

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Tire related term

Meaning

Innerliner separation

the parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Light truck (LT) tire

a tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight
trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating

the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating

the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that
tire

Maximum
pressure

permissible

inflation

the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

Measuring rim

the rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Open splice

any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord
material

Outer diameter

the overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Overall width

the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire,
including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

332

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Tire related term

Meaning

Passenger car tire

a tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles,
and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or
less.

Ply

a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords

Ply separation

a parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

Pneumatic tire

a mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and
contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

Radial ply tire

a pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire

a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures
than the corresponding standard tire

Section width

the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire,
excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

Sidewall

that portion of a tire between the tread and bead

Sidewall separation

the parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

Snow tire

a tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to
the ASTM E−1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction
test as described in ASTM F−1805−00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel
Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow−and Ice−Covered Surfaces, and
which is marked with an Alpine Symbol (
) on at least one sidewall

333

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Tire related term

Meaning

Test rim

the rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

Tread

that portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

Tread rib

a tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Tread separation

pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators (TWI)

the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication
of the degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel−holding fixture

the fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity,
number of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number of
occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally
loaded vehicle

2 through 4

2 in front

5 through 10

2 in front, 1 in second seat

11 through 15

2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third
seat, 1 in fourth seat

16 through 20

2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third
seat, 1 in fourth seat

334

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load
capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Follow the
load limits shown below. Total load capacity and seating capacity are also
described on the tire and loading information label. For location of the tire
and loading information label, see
“Checking tire inflation pressure” on
page 408.
Total load capacity:
Without third seat
375 kg (825 lb.)
With third seat
525 kg (1155 lb.)
Total load capacity means combined
weight of occupants, cargo and luggage. Tongue load is included when
trailer towing.

Seating capacity:
Without third seat
Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)
With third seat
Total 7 (Front 2, Rear 5)
Seating capacity means the maximum
number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 68 kg (150
lb.) per person. Depending on the
weight of each person, the seating capacity given may exceed the total
load capacity.
NOTICE
Even if the number of occupants
are within the seating capacity,
do not exceed the total load capacity.

Towing capacity:
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
680 kg (1500 lb.)
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
Without towing package
907 kg (2000 lb.)
With towing package
1588 kg (3500 lb.)
Towing capacity means the maximum
gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus
its cargo weight) that your vehicle is
able to tow.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the size (weight)
and the number of occupants. For details, see “Capacity and distribution”
that follows.
CAUTION
Do not apply the load more than
each load limit. That may cause
not only damage to the tires, but
also deterioration to the steering
ability and braking ability, which
may cause an accident.
335

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Cargo and luggage—
—Stowage precautions
When stowing cargo and luggage in
the vehicle, observe the following:
D Put cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment when at all
possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.
D Be careful to keep the vehicle balanced. Locating the weight as far
forward as possible helps maintain
balance.
D For better fuel economy, do not
carry unneeded weight.
CAUTION
D To prevent cargo and luggage
from sliding forward during
braking, do not stack anything
in the luggage compartment
higher than the seatbacks.
Keep cargo and luggage low,
as close to the floor as possible.

D Never allow anyone to ride in
the luggage compartment. It is
not designed for passengers.
They should ride in their seats
with their seat belts properly
fastened. Otherwise, they are
much more likely to suffer
death or serious bodily injury,
in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
D Do not place anything on the
flattened seat, or it may slide
forward during braking.
D Do not place anything on the
luggage cover. Such items may
be thrown about and possibly
injure people in the vehicle
during sudden braking or an
accident. Secure all items in a
safe place.

D To prevent cargo and luggage
from sliding forward during
braking, do not place anything
on the net higher than the rear
seatbacks. Otherwise, such
items may be thrown about and
possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking
or an accident.
D Do not drive with objects left
on top of the instrument panel.
They may interfere with the
driver’s field of view. Or they
may move during sharp vehicle
acceleration or turning, and impair the driver’s control of the
vehicle. In an accident they
may injure the vehicle occupants.

336

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity
is
650
lbs.
(1400–750
(5x150)=650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
For details about trailer towing, see
page 348.

Cargo
capacity
Total load
capacity
Example on Your Vehicle
In case that 2 people with the combined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) are
riding in your vehicle, the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
Without third seat
Total load capacity: 375 kg (825 lb.)
375 kg – 166 kg = 209 kg.
(825 lb. – 366 lb. = 459 lb.)
With third seat
Total load capacity: 525 kg (1155 lb.)
525 kg – 166 kg = 359 kg.
(1155 lb. – 366 lb. = 789 lb.)
337

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Types of tires
From this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 176
kg (388 lb.) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced
as follows:
Without third seat
209 kg – 176 kg = 33 kg.
(459 lb. – 388 lb. = 71 lb.)
With third seat
359 kg – 176 kg = 183 kg.
(789 lb. – 388 lb. = 401 lb.)
As shown in the above example, if the
number of occupants increases, the
cargo and luggage load equaling the
combined weight of occupants who
got on later must be reduced. In other
words, if the increase in the number
of occupants causes the excess of
the total load capacity (combined
weight of occupants plus cargo and
luggage load), you have to reduce the
cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
For details about total load capacity,
see “Vehicle load limits” on page 335.

CAUTION
Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load
is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. That may cause not only damage to the tire but also deterioration to the steering ability due to
unbalance of the vehicle, causing
an accident.

Determine what kind of tires your
vehicle is originally equipped with.
1. Summer tires
Summer tires are high−speed capability tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions.
Since summer tires do not have the
same traction performance as snow
tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow−covered or icy roads.
For driving on snow−covered or icy
roads, we recommend using snow
tires. If installing snow tires, be sure
to replace all four tires.
2. All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be
adequate for driving in most winter
conditions, as well as for use all year
round.

338

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

All season tires, however, do not have
adequate
traction
performance
compared with snow tires in heavy or
loose snow. Also, all season tires fall
short in acceleration and handling
performance compared with summer
tires in highway driving.
The details about how to distinguish
summer tires from all season tires are
described on page 324.
CAUTION
D Do not mix summer and all season tires on your vehicle as
this can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting
in loss of control.
D Do not use tire other than the
manufacturer’s
designated
tires, and never mix tires or
wheels of the sizes different
from the originals.

339

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

340

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION

STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting and driving
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving in the rain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off−road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer . . . . . . . . . . . . .

342
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
353

341

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Before starting the engine
1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,
seat cushion height, head restraint
height, steering wheel angle and steering column length.
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view
mirrors.
4. Lock all doors.
5. Fasten seat belts.

How to start the engine—
(a) Before cranking
1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.

(b) Starting the engine
Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in “(a) Before cranking”.

3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you
need to restart the engine while the
vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in “N”. A starter safety device will
prevent the starter from operating if the
selector lever is in any drive position.

Normal starting procedure

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to
the floor until driving off.

With your foot off the accelerator pedal,
crank the engine by turning the engine
switch to the “START” position. Release it
when the engine starts.

The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system in your
engine automatically controls the proper
air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start
a cold or hot engine as follows:

Engine should be warmed up by driving,
not in idle. For warming up, drive with
smoothly turning engine until engine coolant temperature is within normal range.
If the engine stalls...
Simply restart it, using the correct procedure given in normal starting.
If the engine will not start...
See “If your vehicle will not start” on page
356 in Section 4.

342

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

NOTICE
z Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat
the starter and wiring systems.
z Do not race a cold engine.
z If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, have the
engine checked immediately.

Tips for driving in various
conditions
D Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.

This will allow you much better control.

D Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-

sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving
onto high, sharp−edged objects and
other road hazards. Failure to do so
can lead to severe tire damage such
as a tire burst.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps
or travelling on a bumpy road. Otherwise the impact could cause severe
damage to the tires and/or wheels.

D When parking on a hill, turn the front

wheels until they touch the curb so
that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the
parking brake, and place the transmission in “P”. If necessary, block the
wheels.

D Washing your vehicle or driving through

deep water may get the brakes wet. To
see whether they are wet, check that
there is no traffic near you, and then
press the pedal lightly. If you do not
feel a normal braking force, the brakes
are probably wet. To dry them, drive
the vehicle cautiously while lightly
pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake applied. If they still do not
work safely, pull to the side of the road
and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

D Before driving off, make sure that

the parking brake is fully released
and the parking brake reminder
light is off.

D Do not leave your vehicle unat-

tended while the engine is running.

D Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. It can cause
dangerous overheating, needless
wear, and poor fuel economy.

D To drive down a long or steep hill,

reduce your speed and downshift.
Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and
not work properly.

D Be careful when accelerating, up-

shifting, downshifting or braking on
a slippery surface. Sudden acceleration or engine braking, could cause
the vehicle to skid or spin.

343

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Driving in the rain
D Do not drive in excess of the speed

limit. Even if the legal speed limit
permits it, do not drive over 140
km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle
has high−speed capability tires.
Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may
result in tire failure, loss of control
and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine
whether the tires on your vehicle
are high−speed capability tires or
not before driving at such speeds.

D Do not continue normal driving

when the brakes are wet. If they are
wet, your vehicle will require a
longer stopping distance, and it
may pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will not hold the vehicle
securely.

Driving on a slippery road surface
Drive carefully when it is raining, because
visibility will be reduced, the windows may
become fogged−up, and the road will be
slippery.

CAUTION

D Sudden braking, acceleration and

D Drive carefully when it starts to rain,
because the road surface will be especially slippery.

steering when driving on a slippery
road surface may cause tire slippage and reduce your ability to
control the vehicle, resulting in an
accident.

D Refrain from high speeds when driving

D Sudden changes in engine speed,

on an expressway in the rain, because
there may be a layer of water between
the tires and the road surface,
preventing the steering and brakes
from operating properly.

such as sudden engine braking,
may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident.

D After

driving through a puddle,
lightly depress the brake pedal to
make sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads
may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on
only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control
may be affected, resulting in an accident.

344

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Off−road driving precautions
When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded
after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause
serious damage to the vehicle.

When driving your vehicle off−road, please
observe the following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to help
prevent the closure of areas to off−road
vehicles.

NOTICE

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where
off−road vehicles are permitted to travel.

Driving on a flooded road may cause
the engine to stall as well as cause
serious vehicle malfunctions such as
shorts in electrical components and
engine damage from water immersion.
In the event that you drive on a
flooded road and the vehicle is
flooded, be sure to have your Toyota
dealer check brake function, changes
in quantity and quality of oil and fluid
used for the engine, transaxle, transfer (four−wheel drive models), differential, etc. and lubricant condition for
the propeller shaft (four−wheel drive
models), bearings and suspension
joints (where possible) and the function of all joints and bearings.

b. Respect private property. Get owner’s
permission before entering private property.
c. Do not enter areas that are closed.
Honor gates, barriers and signs that restrict travel.
d. Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet, driving techniques should
be changed or travel delayed to prevent damage to roads.
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and
Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining
to driving your vehicle off−road, consult
the following organizations.

D State and Local Parks and Recreation
Departments

D State Motor Vehicle Bureau
D Recreational Vehicle Clubs
D U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of

CAUTION
Always observe the following precautions to minimize the risk of death or
serious personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:

D Drive carefully when off the road.

Do not take unnecessary risks by
driving in dangerous places.

D Do not grip the steering wheel

spokes when driving off−road. A
bad bump could jerk the wheel and
injure your hands. Keep both hands
and especially your thumbs on the
outside of the rim.

D Always check your brakes for effec-

tiveness immediately after driving in
sand, mud, water or snow.

D After driving through tall grass,

mud, rock, sand, water, etc., check
that there is no grass, bush, paper,
rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or
trapped on the underbody. Clear off
any such matter from the underbody. If the vehicle is used with
these materials trapped or adhering
to the underbody, a breakdown or
fire could occur.

Land Management

345

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Winter driving tips
D In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat
belt. Therefore, the driver and all
passengers should fasten their seat
belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

D When driving off−road or in rugged

NOTICE
z If driving through water, such as
when crossing shallow streams,
first check the depth of the water
and the bottom of the stream for
firmness. Drive slowly and avoid
deep water.

z Take all necessary safety measures
to ensure that water damage to the
engine or other components does
not occur.
Water entering the engine air intake
will cause severe engine damage.
Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in
shift quality, looking up of your
transmission accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage.
Water can wash the grease from
wheel bearings, causing rusting and
premature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission
and transfer case, reducing the gear
oil’s lubricating qualities.
z Sand and mud that has accumulated
around brake discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage
brake system components.
z Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off−road
driving that has taken you through
rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.
For scheduled maintenance information, refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement”.

Make sure your coolant is properly protected against freezing.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
and non−borate coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)
See “Checking the engine coolant level”
on page 406 in Section 7−2 for details of
coolant type selection.
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −35_C
(−31_F).
For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −42_C
(−44_F).

NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.

346

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Dinghy towing
Check the condition of the battery and
cables.
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of
any battery, so it must be in top shape to
provide enough power for winter starting.
Section 7−3 tells you how to visually inspect the battery. Your Toyota dealer and
most service stations will be pleased to
check the level of charge.
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is
suitable for the cold weather.
See page 404 in Section 7−2 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy summer oil in your vehicle during winter
months may cause harder starting. If you
are not sure about which oil to use, call
your Toyota dealer–they will be pleased to
help.
Keep the door locks from freezing.
Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the
locks to keep them from freezing.

NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
Do not use your parking brake when
there is a possibility it could freeze.
When parking, put the transmission into
“P” and block the rear wheels. Do not use
the parking brake, or snow or water accumulated in and around the parking brake
mechanism may freeze, making it hard to
release.
Keep ice and snow from accumulating
under the fenders.
Ice and snow built up under your fenders
can make steering difficult. During bad
winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.

Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution.

Depending on where you are driving,
we recommend you carry some emergency equipment.

This product is available at your Toyota
dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.

Some of the things you might put in the
vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,
bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.

Your vehicle is not designed to be
dinghy towed (with four wheels on the
ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four
wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious damage to your vehicle.

347

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a
passenger−carrying vehicle. Towing a
trailer will have an adverse effect on
handling, performance, braking, durability
and driving economy (fuel consumption,
etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend
on the proper use of correct equipment
and cautious driving habits. For your
safety and the safety of others, you must
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Toyota
warranties do not apply to damage or
malfunction caused by towing a trailer for
commercial purposes. Ask your local
Toyota dealer for further details before
towing.

NOTICE
When towing a trailer, be sure to consult your Toyota dealer for further information on additional requirements
such as a towing kit, etc.

WEIGHT LIMITS
Before towing, make sure the total trailer weight, gross combination weight,
gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight
and trailer tongue load are all within
the limits.
The total trailer weight and tongue load
can be measured with platform scales
found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company,
junk yard, etc.

CAUTION

D The

total trailer weight (trailer
weight plus its cargo load) must
not exceed the following. Exceeding
this weight is dangerous.
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
680 kg (1500 lb.)
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
Without towing package
907 kg (2000 lb.)
With towing package
1588 kg (3500 lb.)
If towing a trailer and cargo weighing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it is
necessary to use a sway control
device with sufficient capacity.

D The gross combination weight (sum

of your vehicle weight plus its load
and the total trailer weight) must
not exceed the following.
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models
Without third seat
2689 kg (5930 lb.)
With third seat
2825 kg (6230 lb.)
Four−wheel drive models
Without third seat
2737 kg (6035 lb.)
With third seat
2887 kg (6365 lb.)
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
Two−wheel drive models
Without third seat
Without towing package
3048 kg (6720
With towing package
3729 kg (8220
With third seat
Without towing package
3182 kg (7015
With towing package
3862 kg (8515

lb.)
lb.)
lb.)
lb.)

348

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Four−wheel drive models
Without third seat
Without towing package
2994 kg (6600
With towing package
3674 kg (8100
With third seat
Without towing package
3128 kg (6895
With towing package
3808 kg (8395

D The gross vehicle weight must not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) indicated on the
Certification Label. The gross vehicle weight is the sum of weights
of the unloaded vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer
tongue load. It also includes the
weight of any special equipment
installed on your vehicle.

lb.)
lb.)
lb.)
lb.)

D The load on either the front or rear
D Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-

ent weight capacities established by
the hitch manufacturer. Even though
the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the
operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular
hitch assembly and never exceed
the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer−hitch. Exceeding
the maximum weight rating set by
the trailer hitch manufacturer can
cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries.

axle resulting from distribution of
the gross vehicle weight on both
axles must not exceed the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed
on the Certification Label.

349

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Total trailer weight

Tongue load

Never load the trailer with more
weight in the back than in the
front. About 60% of the trailer load
should be in the front half of the
trailer and the remaining 40% in the
rear.
HITCHES

Tongue load
Total trailer weight

D Use only
100 = 9 to 11%

D The trailer cargo load should be
distributed so that the tongue load
is 9 to 11% of the total trailer
weight, not exceed the following.
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE)
68 kg
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
Without towing package
90 kg
With towing package
158 kg

engine
(150 lb.)

a weight carrying hitch
designed for the total trailer weight.
Toyota does not recommend using a
weight distribution (load equalizing)
hitch.

D The hitch must be bolted securely to
the vehicle frame and installed according to the hitch manufacturer’s instructions.

D The hitch ball should have a light coat
of grease.

D Toyota recommends that the trailer
(200 lb.)
(350 lb.)

hitch be removed when not towing to
prevent injury and/or damage by the
hitch in event of a rear end collision.
After removing the hitch, the installation area should be sealed to prevent
entry of exhaust fumes and mud.

NOTICE
Do not use an axle−mounting hitch as
it may cause damage to the axle
housing, wheel bearings, wheels and/
or tires.
BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

D Toyota

recommends trailers with
brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.

D A safety chain must always be used

between the towing vehicle and the
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the
chain for turns. The chain should
cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping to
the ground in case it becomes damaged or separated. For correct safety
chain procedures, follow the hitch or
trailer manufacturer’s recommendations.

350

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

CAUTION

D If the total trailer weight exceeds

272 kg (600 lb.), trailer brakes are
required.

D Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-

draulic system as it would lower its
braking effectiveness.

D Never tow a trailer without using a

safety chain securely attached to
both the trailer and the vehicle. If
damage occurs to the coupling unit
or hitch ball, there is danger of the
trailer wandering over into another
lane.

TIRES

D Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are
properly inflated. See page 408 Section
7−2 and page 433 in Section 8 for
instructions.

D The trailer tires should be inflated to
the pressure recommended by the trailer manufacturer in respect to the total
trailer weight.

TRAILER LIGHTS

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

D Trailer lights must comply with federal,

D Check that your vehicle remains level

state/provincial and local regulations.
See your local recreational vehicle
dealer or rental agency for the correct
type of wiring and relays for your trailer. Check for correct operation of the
turn signals and stop lights each time
you hitch up. Direct splicing may damage your vehicle’s electrical system
and cause a malfunction of your lights.

BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

D Toyota recommends that you do not

tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a
vehicle with any new power train component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first
800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

D If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will

require more frequent maintenance due
to the additional load. For this information, please refer to the scheduled
maintenance information in the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”.

D Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing
ball and bracket after approximately
1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

when a loaded or unloaded trailer is
hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has
an abnormal nose−up or nose−down
condition, and check for improper
tongue load, overload, worn suspension
or other possible causes.

D Make sure the trailer cargo is securely
loaded so that it cannot shift.

D Check that your rear view mirrors con-

form to any applicable federal, state/
provincial or local regulations. If not,
install the rear view mirrors required
for towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will
handle differently than when not towing. The three main causes of vehicle−
trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading.
Keep these in mind when towing:

D Before starting out, check operation of

the lights and all vehicle−trailer connections. After driving a short distance,
stop and recheck the lights and connections. Before actually towing a trailer, practice turning, stopping and backing with a trailer in an area away from
traffic until you learn the feel.

351

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D Because stopping distance may be in-

creased, vehicle−to−vehicle distance
should be increased when towing a
trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of
speed, allow at least one vehicle and
trailer length between you and the vehicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as
you may skid, resulting in jackknifing
and loss of control. This is especially
true on wet or slippery surfaces.

D Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.

D Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.

The trailer could hit your vehicle in a
tight turn. Slow down before making a
turn to avoid the necessity of sudden
braking.

D Backing with a trailer is difficult and

requires practice. Grip the bottom of
the steering wheel and move your hand
to the left to move the trailer to the
left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to the right. (This procedure is generally opposite to that
when backing without a trailer.) Also,
just turn the steering wheel a little at
a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged
turning. Have someone guide you when
backing to reduce the risk of an accident.

D Remember that when making a turn,

the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the
turn. Therefore, compensate for this by
making a larger than normal turning
radius with your vehicle.

D Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-

versely affect handling of your vehicle
and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention
to the rear from time to time to prepare yourself for being passed by large
trucks or buses, which may cause your
vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying
happens, firmly grip the steering wheel
and reduce speed immediately but
gradually. Never increase speed. Steer
straight ahead. If you make no extreme
correction with the steering or brakes,
the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

D Be careful when passing other ve-

hicles. Passing requires considerable
distance. After passing a vehicle, do
not forget the length of your trailer and
be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.

D In order to maintain engine braking effi-

ciency, do not place the transmission
in “D”.

D Because of the added load of the trail-

er, your vehicle’s engine may overheat
on hot days (at temperatures over
30_C [85_F]) when going up a long or
steep grade with a trailer. If the engine
coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, immediately turn off the air
conditioning (if in use), pull off the road
and stop in a safe spot. Refer to “If
your vehicle overheats” on page 360 in
Section 4.

D Always place wheel blocks under both
the vehicle and trailer wheels when
parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.
Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid parking on a slope with a trailer, but if it
cannot be avoided, do so only after
performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release your brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.

352

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

How to save fuel and make
your vehicle last longer
When restarting out after parking on a
slope:
1. With the transmission in “P” position,
start the engine. Be sure to keep the
brake pedal depressed.
2. Shift into gear.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal. Slowly pull or back away from
the wheel blocks. Stop and apply your
brakes.
4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

D Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or

the posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower. Because instability (swaying) of a towing vehicle−
trailer
combination
usually
increases as the speed increases, exceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may
cause loss of control.

D Slow down and downshift before
descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts.

D Avoid holding the brake pedal down
too long or too frequently. This
could cause the brakes to overheat
and result in reduced braking efficiency.

Improving fuel economy is easy—just take
it easy. It will help make your vehicle last
longer, too. Here are some specific tips
on how to save money on both fuel and
repairs:

D Keep your tires inflated at the cor-

rect pressure. Underinflation causes
tire wear and wastes fuel. See page
408 in Section 7−2 for instructions.

D Do not carry unneeded weight in
your vehicle. Excess weight puts a
heavier load on the engine, causing
greater fuel consumption.

D Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once
the engine is running smoothly, begin
driving—but gently. Remember, however, that on cold winter days this may
take a little longer.

D Put the selector lever into the “D”

when engine braking is not required.
Driving with the select lever in “3”
(4−speed) or “4” (5−speed) will reduce
the fuel economy. (For details, see
“Automatic transmission” on page 143
or 147 in Section 1−7.)

D Accelerate

slowly and smoothly.
Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high
gear as quickly as possible.

353

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D Avoid long engine idling. If you have
a long wait and you are not in traffic,
it is better to turn off the engine and
start again later.

D Avoid engine lugging or over−revving. Use a gear position suitable for
the road on which you are travelling.

D Avoid continuous speeding up and
slowing down.
wastes fuel.

Stop−and−go

driving

D Avoid

unnecessary stopping and
braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try
to time the traffic signals so you only
need to stop as little as possible or
take advantage of through streets to
avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also reduce wear
on your brakes.

D Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams
whenever possible.

D Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal. This causes premature wear,
overheating and poor fuel economy.

D Keep the front wheels in proper

alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and
slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire
wear but also puts an extra load on
the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

D Keep the bottom of your vehicle free
from mud, etc. This not only lessens
weight but also helps prevent corrosion.

CAUTION
Never turn off the engine to coast
down hills. Your power steering and
brake booster will not function without the engine running. Also, the
emission control system operates
properly only when the engine is running.

D Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in
top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil
and grease,brakes not adjusted, etc. all
lower engine performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For longer
life of all parts and lower operating
costs, keep all maintenance work on
schedule, and if you often drive under
severe conditions, see that your vehicle
receives more frequent maintenance.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

D Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you drive, the greater
the fuel consumption. By reducing your
speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.

354

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

In case of an emergency
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot increase engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . .
If you lose your keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

356
359
359
360
361
373
373
378
379

355

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If your vehicle will not start—
(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure
you have followed the correct starting procedure given in “How to start the engine”
on page 342 in Section 3 and that you
have sufficient fuel. If your vehicle is
equipped with the engine immobilizer system, also check whether the other keys
will start the engine. If they work, your
key may be broken. Have the key
checked at your Toyota dealer. If none of
your keys work, there may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. Call your
Toyota dealer. (See “Keys (with engine
immobilizer system)” on page 12 in Section 1−2.)
If the engine is not turning over or is
turning over too slowly—
1. Check that the battery terminals are
tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch
on the interior light.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out
when the starter is cranked, the battery
is discharged. You may try jump starting. See “(c) Jump starting” on page
357 for further instructions.

(b) Starting a flooded engine
If the engine turns over at its normal
speed but will not start—
1. Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position and try starting the
engine again.
2. If the engine will not start, the engine
may be flooded because of repeated
cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded
engine” on page 356 for further instructions.
3. If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota
dealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your engine
may be flooded because of repeated
cranking.
If this happens, turn the engine switch to
the “START” position with the accelerator
pedal fully depressed. Keep the key and
accelerator pedal in these positions for 15
seconds and release them. Then try starting the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the engine does not start after 15 seconds of cranking, release the key, wait
a few minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer
or qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat
the starter and wiring systems.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still will
not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
shop.

356

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

(c) Jump starting
To avoid serious personal injury and
damage to your vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid burns,
electrical burns, or damaged electronic
components, these instructions must be
followed precisely.
The engine cannot be started by push−
starting.
If you are unsure about how to follow this
procedure, we strongly recommend that
you seek the help of a competent mechanic or towing service.

CAUTION

D Batteries

contain
sulfuric
acid
which is poisonous and corrosive.
Wear protective safety glasses when
jump starting, and avoid spilling
acid on your skin, clothing, or vehicle.

D If you should accidentally get acid

on yourself or in your eyes, remove
any contaminated clothing and flush
the affected area with water immediately. Then get immediate medical attention. If possible, continue
to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while en route to the medical
office.

D The gas normally produced by a

battery will explode if a flame or
spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do
not smoke or light a match while
jump starting.

NOTICE
The battery used for boosting must
be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you
are sure that the booster battery is
correct.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1. If the booster battery is installed in
another vehicle, make sure the vehicles
are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.
When boosting, use the battery of
matching or higher quality. Any other
battery may be difficult to jump start
with.
If jump starting is difficult, charge the
battery for several minutes.
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs
from the booster and discharged batteries. Lay a cloth over the open vents
on the batteries. (This helps reduce the
explosion hazard, personal injuries and
burns.)
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the
booster battery is not running, start it
and let it run for a few minutes. During
jump starting, run the engine at about
2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.

357

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Jumper cable

Discharged
battery
Jumper cable

Discharged
battery

Positive
terminal
(“+” mark)

Positive
terminal
Booster (“+” mark)
battery

4. Make the cable connections in the order a, b, c, d.
a. Connect the clamp of the positive
(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal on the discharged battery.
b. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the positive (red) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal on the booster
battery.

Booster
battery

Negative terminal
(“−” mark)

c. Connect the clamp of the negative
(black) cable to the negative (−) terminal on the booster battery.
d. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the negative (black) jumper cable to
a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic
point of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
The recommended connecting point is
shown in the following illustration:

Connecting point

Do not connect the cable to or near
any part that moves when the engine
is cranked.

CAUTION
When making the connections, to
avoid serious injury, do not lean over
the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the correct battery terminals or the ground.

358

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If your engine stalls while
driving

If you cannot increase engine
speed

5. Start your engine in the normal way.
After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm
for several minutes with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.

If your engine stalls while driving...

If engine speed does not increase when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, there
may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system.

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in the
exact reverse order: the negative cable
and then the positive cable.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery cover
cloths—they may now contain sulfuric
acid.
8. If removed, replace all the battery vent
plugs.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent (for example, lights left on),
you should have it checked at your Toyota
dealer.
If the first start attempt is not successful...
Check that the clamp on the jumper
cables are tight. Recharge the discharged
battery with the jumper cables connected
for several minutes and restart your engine in the normal way.

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
3. Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position, and try starting the
engine again.
If the engine will not start, see “If your
vehicle will not start” on page 356 in this
Section.

CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not work so steering and braking
will be much harder than usual.

At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal
more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic
throttle control system is corrected during
low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and
the engine switch is turned to the “ACC”
or “LOCK” position.

CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.

If the another attempt is not successful,
the battery may be depleted. Have it checked at your Toyota dealer.

359

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If your vehicle overheats
If your engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you hear
a loud knocking or pinging noise, the
engine has probably overheated. You
should follow this procedure...

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from the
radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.
However, note that water draining from
the air conditioning is normal if it has
been used.

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your emergency
flashers. Put the transmission in “P”
and apply the parking brake. Turn off
the air conditioning if it is being used.

CAUTION

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the
radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.
Wait until the steam subsides before
opening the hood. If there is no coolant
boiling over or steam, leave the engine
running and make sure the electric
cooling fan is operating. If it is not,
turn the engine off.

CAUTION
To help avoid personal injury, keep
the hood closed until there is no
steam. Escaping steam or coolant is
a sign of very high pressure.

6. After the engine coolant temperature
has cooled to normal, again check the
coolant level in the reservoir. If necessary, bring it up to half full again. Serious coolant loss indicates a leak in the
system. You should have it checked as
soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

When the engine is running, keep
hands and clothing away from the
moving fan and engine drive belts.
4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the engine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer
for assistance.
5. If there are no obvious leaks, check
the coolant reservoir. If it is dry, add
coolant to the reservoir while the engine is running. Fill it about half full.
For the coolant type, see “Coolant type
selection” on page 406 in Section 7−2.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to remove the coolant
reservoir cap when the engine and
radiator are hot. Serious injury could
result from scalding hot fluid and
steam blown out under pressure.

360

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If you have a flat tire—
1. Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place
well away from the traffic. Avoid
stopping on the center divider of
a highway. Park on a level spot
with firm ground.
2. Stop the engine and turn on your
emergency flashers.
3. Firmly set the parking brake and
put the transmission in “P”.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.
5. Read the following instructions
thoroughly.

CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe
the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury:
D Follow jacking instructions.
D Do not put any part of your
body under the vehicle supported by the jack. Otherwise,
personal injury may occur.
D Do not start or run the engine
while your vehicle is supported
by the jack.
D Stop the vehicle on a level firm
ground, firmly set the parking
brake and put the transmission
in “P”. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being
changed if necessary.

D Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising
the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the
vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and
cause personal injury.
D Never get under the vehicle
when the vehicle is supported
by the jack alone.
D Use the jack only for lifting
your vehicle during wheel
changing.
D Do not raise the vehicle with
someone in the vehicle.
D When raising the vehicle, do
not place any objects on top
of or underneath the jack.
D Raise the vehicle only high
enough to remove and change
the tire.

361

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Required tools and spare
tire
1. Get the required tools and
spare tire on the back door.
To prepare yourself for an emergency,
you should familiarize yourself with
the use of the jack, each of the tools
and their storage locations.

NOTICE
Do not continue driving with a
deflated tire. Driving even a
short distance can damage a
tire and wheel beyond repair.

Tool bag

Jack
362

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

To remove the jack, turn the jack joint
by hand.
To remove: Turn the joint in direction
1 until the jack is free.
To store: Turn the joint in direction 2
until the jack is firmly secured to prevent it flying forward during a collision
or sudden braking.

To remove the spare cover:
1. Open the back door. Unhook the
latch handle which on the bottom
of the spare tire cover.
The latch handle can be released only
when the back door is opened.

2. Close the back door. Remove the
spare tire cover.

363

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Blocking the wheel

To remove the spare tire, turn the
hold−down nuts counterclockwise
with the wheel nut wrench and remove them.
When stowing the spare tire, put it in
place and secure it to prevent it from
flying forward during a collision or
sudden braking.

2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to keep the
vehicle from rolling when it is
jacked up.
When blocking the wheel, place a
wheel block in front of one of the front
wheels or behind one of the rear
wheels.

—Removing wheel ornament

Type A

Type B
364

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Loosening wheel nuts
3. Remove the wheel ornament.
Pry off the wheel ornament, using the
beveled end of the wheel nut wrench
as shown.

CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the
bolts or nuts. The nuts may loose
and the wheels may fall off,
which could cause a serious accident.

CAUTION
Do not try to pull off the ornament by hand. Take due care in
handling the ornament to avoid
unexpected personal injury.
4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
Always loosen the wheel nuts before
raising the vehicle.
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise
to loosen. To get maximum leverage,
fit the wrench to the nut so that the
handle is on the right side, as shown
above. Grab the wrench near the end
of the handle and pull up on the handle. Be careful that the wrench does
not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet—just unscrew them about one−half turn.

365

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Positioning the jack

—Raising your vehicle
CAUTION
Never get under the vehicle when
the vehicle is supported by the
jack alone.

5. Position the jack at the correct
jack point as shown.
Make sure the jack is positioned on
a level and solid place.

6. After making sure that no one
is in the vehicle, raise it high
enough so that the spare tire
can be installed.
Remember you will need more ground
clearance when putting on the spare
tire than when removing the flat tire.
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack
handle into the jack (it is a loose fit)
and turn it clockwise. As the jack
touches the vehicle and begins to lift,
double−check that it is properly positioned.

366

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Changing wheels

7. Remove the wheel nuts and
change tires.
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it
aside.
Roll the spare wheel into position and
align the holes in the wheel with the
bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get
at least the top bolt started through
its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it
back over the other bolts.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts

Before putting on wheels, remove any
corrosion on the mounting surfaces
with a wire brush or such. Installation
of wheels without good metal−to−metal contact at the mounting surface can
cause wheel nuts to loosen and
eventually cause a wheel to come off
while driving.

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.
Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end
inward) and tighten them as much as
you can by hand. Press back on the
tire back and see if you can tighten
them more.

367

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Lowering your vehicle
CAUTION

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the
bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead
to overtightening the nuts and
damaging the bolts. The nuts
may loose and the wheels may
fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or
grease on any bolt or nut, clean
it.
9. Lower the vehicle completely
and tighten the wheel nuts.
Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.
Use only the wheel nut wrench and
turn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.
Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other than your hands,
such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.
Make sure the wrench is securely engaged over the nut.
Tighten each nut a little at a time in
the order shown. Repeat the process
until all the nuts are tight.

D When lowering the vehicle,
make sure all portions of your
body and all other persons
around will not be injured as
the vehicle is lowered to the
ground.
D Have the wheel nuts tightened
with torque wrench to 103 N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soon
as possible after changing
wheels. Otherwise, the nuts
may loosen and the wheels
may fall off, which could cause
a serious accident.

368

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Stowing flat tire
10.Install the flat tire and spare tire
cover on the back door.

CAUTION
Make sure that the rubber rings
are not installed to the wheel
nuts for aluminum wheel. Otherwise, the nuts may become loose
and the wheel may fall off, which
may cause a serious accident.

CAUTION
Make sure flat tire and spare tire
cover are securely in place in
their storage location to reduce
the possibility of personal injury
during a collision or sudden
braking.
On vehicles with aluminum wheels
and a steel wheel for the spare, remove the rubber rings from the wheel
nuts of the spare tire carrier before
stowing a flat tire. Be careful not to
lose the rubber rings after removing
them.

After repairing the flat tire, be sure
to reinstall the rubber rings to the
wheel nuts before stowing the spare
tire. If the steel wheel is stowed without reinstalling the rubber rings to the
wheel nuts, the spare tire carrier may
produce abnormal noise when the vehicle is driven.

369

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Guides

On some models—Before stowing the
flat tire, remove the center wheel ornament by pushing from the reverse
side.
Be careful not to lose the wheel ornament.

To install the spare tire cover:
1. Insert the hooks under the guides
to the upper slots and lower the
cover.

2. Attach the cover by hooking the
2 inner protrusions.
Check that the cover is securely attached.

370

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Reinstalling wheel ornament

3. Open the back door. Lock the
latch handle which is on the bottom of the cover.
4. Close the back door.
Check that the cover is securely in
place.

Type A

Type C
11. Reinstall the wheel ornament.
Type A and B—
1. Put the wheel ornament into position.
Type A only: Align the cutout of
the wheel ornament with the valve
stem as shown.
2. Then firmly tap the outer edge of
the wheel cap with the side or heel
of your hand to snap into place.

Type B
371

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—After changing wheels
Type C—
Push the wheel ornament into the
center hole.
With a spare tire of different wheel
type from the installed tires, the wheel
ornament can not be installed into the
spare tire. After repairing the flat tire,
reinstall the wheel ornament.
CAUTION
D Take due care in handling the
ornament to avoid unexpected
personal injury.
D Do not attach a heavily damaged plastic wheel ornament.
It may fly off the wheel and
cause accidents while the vehicle is moving.

12.Check the air pressure of the replaced tire.
Adjust the air pressure to the specification designated on page 433 in
Section 8. If the pressure is lower,
drive slowly to the nearest service
station and fill to the correct pressure.
Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflation valve cap as dirt and moisture
could get into the valve core and
possibly cause air leakage. If the cap
is missing, have a new one put on as
soon as possible.
13.Restow all the tools and jack securely.
As soon after changing wheels as
possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the
torque specified on page 433 in Section 8 with a torque wrench. Have a
technician repair the flat tire.

CAUTION
Before driving, make sure all the
tools and jack are securely in
place in their storage location to
reduce the possibility of personal injury during a collision or
sudden braking.

372

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If your vehicle needs to be
towed—

If your vehicle becomes stuck
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,
mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt
to rock the vehicle free by moving it
forward and backward.
You can use the “AUTO LSD” switch
(two−wheel drive models) or four−wheel
drive lock switch (four−wheel drive
models) in this situation. (For details,
see ““AUTO LSD” system” on page 153
or “Active torque control 4WD system”
on page 150 in Section 1−7.)

CAUTION
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the
rocking operation the vehicle may
suddenly move forward or backward
as it becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or objects.

NOTICE
If you rock your vehicle, observe the
following precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and other
parts.
z Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever
or before the transmission is completely shifted to forward or reverse
gear.
z Do not race the engine and avoid
spinning the wheels.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—
—From front

—From rear

z If your vehicle remains stuck after
rocking the vehicle several times,
consider other ways such as towing.
(b) Using flat bed truck

Two−wheel drive models

373

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—
—From front

—From rear

If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by your Toyota
dealer or a commercial tow truck service. In consultation with them, have
your vehicle towed using either (a) or
(b).

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Only when you cannot receive a towing
service from a Toyota dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your vehicle carefully in accordance with the
instructions given in “—Emergency towing” on page 375 in this Section.

Two−wheel drive models—

Proper equipment will help ensure that
your vehicle is not damaged while being
towed. Commercial operators are generally
aware of the state/provincial and local
laws pertaining to towing.
(b) Using flat bed truck

Four−wheel drive models

Your vehicle can be damaged if it is
towed incorrectly. Although most operators
know the correct procedure, it is possible
to make a mistake. To avoid damage to
your vehicle, make sure the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show
this page to the tow truck driver.

Use a safety chain system for all towing,
and abide by the state/provincial and local
laws. The wheels and axle on the ground
must be in good condition. If they are
damaged, use a towing dolly.
(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck
From front—Release the parking brake.

NOTICE
When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate ground clearance for
towing at the opposite end of the
raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper
and/or underbody of the towed vehicle
will be damaged during towing.
From rear—
Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle with an automatic
transmission from the rear with the
front wheels on the ground, as this
may cause serious damage to the
transmission.

374

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Emergency towing
(b) Using flat bed truck
Four−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck
Use a towing dolly under the wheels not
lifted by the truck.
(b) Using flat bed truck

All models—
(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE
Do not tow with sling type truck, either from the front or rear. This may
cause body damage.

If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by your Toyota
dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelets
on the front of the vehicle. Use extreme
caution when towing vehicle.
To install the front towing eyelet, see
“—Installing front towing eyelet” described
below.

375

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Installing front towing eyelet
NOTICE

NOTICE

z Only use specified towing eyelet;
otherwise your vehicle may be damaged.

Use only a cable or chain specifically
intended for use in towing vehicles.
Securely fasten the cable or chain to
the towing eyelet provided.

z Never tow a vehicle from the rear
with four wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to
the transmission.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer
it and operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only
on hard−surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the
wheels, axles, drive train, steering and
brakes must all be in good condition.

Before towing, release the parking brake
and put the transmission in “N”. The engine switch must be in the “ACC” (engine
off) or the “ON” (engine running) position.

CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not work so steering and braking
will be much harder than usual.

1. Remove the front towing eyelet cover
on the front bumper, using a flathead
screwdriver which is wrapped with a
cloth.

CAUTION
Use extreme caution when towing vehicles. Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which would place
excessive stress on the emergency
towing eyelet and towing cable or
chain. The eyelet and towing cable or
chain may break and cause serious
injury or damage.

376

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Emergency towing eyelet
precautions
D Before emergency towing, check that

the eyelet is not broken or damaged
and that the installation bolts are not
loose.

D Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the eyelet.

D Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady
and even force.

D To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not

pull from the side or at a vertical
angle. Always pull straight ahead.

2. Use the front towing eyelet in the tool
bag. Secure it to the hole on the
bumper by turning clockwise. (For the
tool bag location, see “—Required tools
and spare tire” on page 362 in this
Section.)

3. Tighten the front towing eyelet securely
by a wheel nut wrench.

CAUTION
When installing the eyelet on the vehicle, be sure to tighten the front
eyelet securely. If the eyelet is loose,
it may come off when being towed
and result in death or serious injury.

377

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Tips for towing a stuck
vehicle
CAUTION
If the emergency towing eyelet is
used to get out when your vehicle
becomes struck in mud, sand or other condition from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power, make sure to observe the precautions mentioned below. Otherwise,
excessive stress will be put on the
eyelet and the towing cable or chain
may break, causing serious injury or
damage.

If you cannot shift automatic
transmission selector lever

The following methods are effective to get
out when your vehicle is struck in mud,
sand or other condition from which the
vehicle cannot be driven out under its own
power. Use extreme caution when towing
vehicles. In addition, keep away from the
vehicles and towing cable or chain when
towing.

D Remove the soil and sand in the front
and the back of the tires.

D Place a stone or wood under the tires.

D If the towing vehicle can hardly

If you cannot shift the selector lever
out of “P” position to other positions
even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button as follows:

D Tow the vehicle as straight ahead

1. Turn the engine switch to
“LOCK” position. Make sure
parking brake is applied.

move, do not forcibly continue the
towing. Contact your Toyota dealer
or a commercial tow truck service
for assistance.
as possible.

D Keep away from the vehicle during
towing.

the
the

2. Pry up the cover with a flathead
screwdriver or equivalent.

378

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

If you lose your keys
You can purchase a new key at your
Toyota dealer if you can give them the
key number. If your vehicle is equipped
with the engine immobilizer system, the
dealer will also need your master key.
Vehicles with engine immobilizer system—
Even if you lose only one key, contact
your Toyota dealer to make a new key. If
you lose all your master keys, you cannot
make new keys; the whole engine immobilizer system must be replaced.

3. Insert your finger into the
push down the shift lock
button. You can shift out
position only while pushing
ton.

hole to
override
of “P”
the but-

4. Shift into “N” position.
5. Insert the cover.
6. Start the engine. For your safety,
keep the brake pedal depressed.
Be sure to have the system checked by
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

See the suggestion given in “Keys (with
engine immobilizer system)” on page 12 in
Section 1−2.
You can use the wireless remote control
system with the new key. Contact your
Toyota dealer for detailed information.
If your keys are locked in the vehicle and
you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota
dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must
break a window to get in, we suggest
breaking the smallest side window because it is the least expensive to replace.
Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from
the glass.

379

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

380

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION
CORROSION PREVENTION AND
APPEARANCE CARE

Corrosion prevention and appearance care
Protecting your Toyota from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Washing and waxing your Toyota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

381

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Protecting your Toyota from
corrosion
Toyota, through the diligent research, design and use of the most advanced
technology available, helps prevent corrosion and provides you with the finest quality vehicle construction. Now, it is up to
you. Proper care of your Toyota can help
ensure long−term corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion
to your vehicle are:

D The accumulation of road salt, dirt and
moisture in hard−to−reach areas under
the vehicle.

D Chipping

of paint, or undercoating
caused by minor accidents or by
stones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you live
in particular areas or operate your vehicle under certain environmental conditions:

D Road salt or dust control chemicals will

accelerate corrosion, as will the presence of salt in the air near the sea−
coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

D High humidity accelerates corrosion es-

pecially when temperatures range just
above the freezing point.

D Wetness or dampness to certain parts

of your vehicle for an extended period
of time, may cause corrosion even
though other parts of the vehicle may
be dry.

D High ambient temperatures can cause

corrosion to those components of the
vehicle which do not dry quickly due to
lack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keep
your vehicle, particularly the underside, as
clean as possible and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings as
soon as possible.

D High pressure water or steam is effec-

tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside
and wheel housings. Pay particular
attention to these areas as it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to simply wet the
mud and debris without removing. The
lower edge of doors, rocker panels and
frame members have drain holes which
should not be allowed to clog with dirt
as trapped water in these areas can
cause corrosion.

D Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter is over.

your

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” on
page 383 for more tips.

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of
course, necessary to keep your vehicle
clean by regular washing, but to prevent
corrosion, the following points should be
observed:

Check the condition of your vehicle’s
paint and trim. If you find any chips or
scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone
through the bare metal, have a qualified
body shop make the repair.

To help prevent corrosion on
Toyota, follow these guidelines:

D If you drive on salted roads in the
winter or if you live near the ocean,
you should hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month to minimize corrosion.

382

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Washing and waxing your
Toyota
Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can accumulate under the
floor mats and could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make
sure the area is dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals, cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc; these should be
transported in proper containers. If a spill
or leak should occur, immediately clean
and dry the area.
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you
drive on salted or gravel roads, mud
shields help protect your vehicle. Full−size
shields, which come as near to the ground
as possible, are the best. We recommend
that the fittings and the area where the
shields are installed be treated to resist
corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be
happy to assist in supplying and installing
the shields if they are recommended for
your area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated
garage or a roofed place. Do not park
your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in
the garage, or if you drive it covered with
water or snow, your garage may be so
damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your
garage is heated, a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor.

Hand−washing your Toyota

Washing your Toyota
Keep your
washing.

vehicle

clean

regular

Work in the shade and wait until the
vehicle body is not warm to the touch.

The following cases may cause weakness
to the paint or corrosion to the body and
parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible.

D When cleaning under floor or chas-

D When driving in a coastal area
D When driving on a road sprinkled with

D Exhaust gases cause the exhaust

antifreeze

D When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,

bird droppings and carcass of an insect

D When driving in areas where there is

a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or
chemical substances

D When the vehicle becomes remarkably
dirty with dust and mud

CAUTION
sis, be careful not to injure your
hands.

pipe to become quite hot. When
washing the vehicle, be careful not
to touch the pipe until it has cooled
sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

NOTICE
When the front wiper arms need to be
lifted away from the windshield to
wash the vehicle, raise the arm on
the driver side first. Conversely, when
returning the wipers to their original
positions, fold down the arm on the
front passenger side first. Failure to
perform the operations in the correct
order results in damage.

383

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road salt from the
underside of the vehicle or the wheel
wells.
2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,
mixed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and
keep it wet by dipping it frequently into
the wash water. Do not rub hard—let
the soap and water remove the dirt.
Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−
pressure car wash, for example) at or
near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler
door opened. If the water enters the air
vent, you may experience trouble with refueling or rough engine idling.
Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic
wheel ornaments are damaged easily by
organic substances. If any organic substances splashes an ornament, be sure to
wash them off with water and check if the
ornament is damaged.
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap
or neutral detergent.

NOTICE
z Do not use corrosive chemical−
based cleaners on your wheels.
(Example: hydrofluoric acid)
z Do not use steam cleaners or the
chemicals therein to clean your
wheels.
z Do not use scouring pads, wire
brushes, or coarse abrasives to
clean your wheels.
z Do not use alcohol, solvents, gasoline, or other non−neutral detergents, because they may alter the
wheel’s appearance and resistance
to corrosion.
Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not
scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper
faces are soft.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine or
cleaners that are marked safe for painted
surfaces.
3. Rinse
thoroughly—dried
soap
can
cause streaking. In hot weather you
may need to rinse each section right
after you wash it.
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle
using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not
rub or press hard—you might scratch
the paint.

NOTICE
z Do not use organic substances
(gasoline, kerosene, benzine or
strong solvents), which may be toxic or cause damage.
z Do not scrub any part of the vehicle with a hard brush, which may
cause damage.

Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not use
organic substances or scrub them with a
hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

384

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Automatic car wash

Waxing your Toyota

Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but remember that the
paint can be scratched by some types of
brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the
washing process itself. Scratching reduces
paint durability and gloss, especially on
darker colors. The manager of the car
wash should be able to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on
your vehicle.

Polishing and waxing is recommended
to maintain the original beauty of your
Toyota’s finish.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the antenna,
make sure it is removed before driving your Toyota through an automatic
car wash.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle
surface does not repel water well.
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing, even if you are
using a combined cleaner and wax.

Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on the
surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause
damage to the lenses. If you accidentally
put wax on the light surfaces, wipe or
wash it off.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water
does not bead but remains on the surface in large patches.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If
the finish has become extremely weathered, use a car−cleaning polish, followed by a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and
precautions. Be sure to polish and wax
the chrome trim as well as the paint.
Windshield washer nozzles: Make sure
that the nozzles do not become blocked
when waxing. If a nozzle becomes
blocked, contact your Toyota dealer to
have the vehicle serviced.

NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.

385

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Cleaning the interior
CAUTION

D Vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags:

Be careful not to splash water or
spill liquid on the floor. This may
prevent the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag from activating correctly, resulting in serious injury.

D Do not wash the vehicle floor with

water, or allow water to get onto
the floor when cleaning the vehicle
interior or exterior. Water may get
into audio components or other
electrical components above or under the floor carpet (or mat) and
cause a malfunction; and it may
cause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior
The vinyl upholstery may be easily
cleaned with a mild soap or detergent
and water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or
soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few
minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt
and wipe off the soap with a clean damp
cloth. If all the dirt do not come off, repeat the procedure. Commercial foaming−
type vinyl cleaners are also available
which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.

NOTICE
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline
or window cleaner on the interior.
Carpets
Use a good foam−type
clean the carpets.

shampoo

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove
as much dirt as possible. Several types of
foam cleaners are available; some are in
aerosol cans and others are powders or
liquids which you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,
use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.
Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
possible. Read the shampoo instructions
and follow them closely.
Seat belts
The seat belts may be cleaned with
mild soap and water or with lukewarm
water.
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for excessive wear,
fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE
z Do not use dye or bleach on the
belts—it may weaken them.
z Do not use the belts until they become dry.
Windows
The windows may be cleaned with any
household window cleaner.

NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or connectors.

386

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Air conditioning control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel, console panel,
and switches

Leather interior

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for
wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces
of detergent with a clean damp cloth.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE
z Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or peeling of the
surface.
z If you use cleaners or polishing
agents, make sure their ingredients
do not include the substances mentioned above.
z If you use a liquid car freshener, do
not apply the liquid onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain
the
ingredients mentioned
above. Immediately clean any spill
using the method mentioned above.

The leather upholstery may be cleaned
with neutral detergent for wool.

After cleaning or whenever any part of the
leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean
cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area.

NOTICE
z If a stain should fail to come out
with a neutral detergent, apply a
cleaner that does not contain an
organic solvent.
z Never use organic substances such
as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or
alkaline or acid solutions for cleaning the leather as these could
cause discoloring.
z Use of a nylon brush or synthetic
fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the
fine grained surface of the leather.

z Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be especially careful
to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
upholstery always clean.
z Long exposure to direct sunlight
may cause the leather surface to
harden and shrink. Keep your vehicle in a shaded area, especially in
the summer.
z The interior of your vehicle is apt
to heat up on hot summer days, so
avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or
containing wax as these tend to
stick to leather when warm.
z Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could result in discoloration or staining.
If you have any questions about the
cleaning of your Toyota, your local
Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer
them.

387

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

388

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE

Vehicle maintenance and care
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . .

390
391
393
394

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

389

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Maintenance requirements
Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for
fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time
and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day−to−day care, is
more important than ever before to ensure
smooth, trouble−free, safe, and economical
driving.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make
sure the specified maintenance, including
general maintenance service, is performed.
Note that both the new vehicle and emission control system warranties specify that
proper maintenance and care must be performed. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for complete warranty information.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day−
to−day care practices that are important to
your vehicle for proper operation. It is the
owner’s responsibility to ensure that the
general maintenance items are performed
regularly.
These checks or inspections can be done
either by yourself or a qualified technician,
or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be
pleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

Where to go for service?

The scheduled maintenance items listed in
the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those
required to be serviced at regular intervals.

Toyota technicians are well−trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership
training programs. They learn to work on
Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,
rather than while they are working on it.

For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
It is recommended that any replacement
parts used for maintenance or for the
repair of the emission control system
be Toyota supplied.
The owner may elect to use non−Toyota
supplied parts for replacement purposes without invalidating the emission
control system warranty. However, use
of replacement parts which are not of
equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.
You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and system
performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual without invalidating this warranty. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” for complete warranty information.

You can be confident that your Toyota
dealer’s service department performs the
best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle—reliably and economically.
Your copy of the repair order is proof that
all required maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If any problems should arise with your vehicle while
under warranty, your Toyota dealer will
promptly take care of it. Again, be sure
to keep a copy of the repair order for any
service performed on your Toyota.
What about do−it−yourself maintenance?
Many of the maintenance items are easy
to do yourself if you have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive
tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are presented on page 395 in
Section 7.

390

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

General maintenance
If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechanic, the Toyota service manuals are recommended. Please be aware that do−it−yourself maintenance can affect your warranty
coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenance
items that should be performed as frequently as specified. In addition to checking the items listed, if you notice any
unusual noise, smell or vibration, you
should investigate the cause or take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop immediately. It is recommended that any problem you notice be
brought to the attention of your dealer or
the qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you run the engine.
IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Items listed below should be checked
from time to time, e.g. each time when
refueling.
Washer fluid
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the
tank. See page 422 in Section 7−3 for
additional information.

Engine coolant level
Make sure the coolant level is between
the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see−
through reservoir when the engine is cold.
See page 406 in Section 7−2 for additional information.
Radiator, condenser and hoses
Check that the front of the radiator and
condenser are clean and not blocked with
leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 407 in
Section 7−2 for additional information.
Battery electrolyte level
Check the battery condition by the indicator color. See page 418 in Section 7−3 for
additional information.
Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.
See page 407 in Section 7−2 for additional information.
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the
engine turned off and the vehicle parked
on a level spot. See page 404 in Section
7−2 for additional information.

391

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Exhaust system

Seats

Parking brake

If you notice any change in the sound of
the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have
the cause located and corrected immediately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on
page 313 in Section 2.)

Check that all seat controls such as seat
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate
smoothly and that all latches lock securely
in any position. For folding−down rear
seatbacks, check that the latches lock securely.

Check that the lever has the proper travel
and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle
is held securely with only the parking
brake applied.

Seat belts

On a safe incline, check that your vehicle
is held securely with the selector lever in
“P” position and all brakes released.

INSIDE THE VEHICLE
Items listed below should be checked
regularly, e.g. while performing periodic
services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Lights
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights
are all working.
Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers
Check that all service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers function properly.
Steering wheel
Check that it has the specified free play.
Be alert for changes in steering condition,
such as hard steering or strange noise.

Check that the seat belt system such as
buckles, retractors and anchors operate
properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt
webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
uneven pedal effort or catching.

Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Items listed below should be performed
from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Fluid leaks

Check the pedal for smooth operation and
that the pedal has the proper clearance.
Check the brake booster function.

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. If you smell fuel
fumes or notice any leak, have the cause
found and corrected immediately.

Brakes

Doors and engine hood

In a safe place, check that the brakes do
not pull to one side when applied.

Check that all doors and back door operate smoothly and all latches lock securely.
Make sure the engine hood secondary
latch secures the hood from opening when
the primary latch is released.

Brake pedal

392

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Does your vehicle need
repairing?
Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at least once a
month. See page 408 in Section 7−2
for additional information.
Tire surface and wheel nuts
Check the tires carefully for cuts,
damage or excessive wear. See page
410 in Section 7−2 for additional information. When checking the tires,
make sure no nuts are missing, and
check the nuts for looseness. Tighten
them if necessary.
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires according to the
maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) See page 412 in Section 7−2
for additional information.

Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and visual tip−offs that
indicate service is needed. Some important clues are as follows:

D
D
D
D

Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from the air conditioning
after use is normal.)

If you notice any of these clues, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible. It probably needs adjustment or
repair.

CAUTION
Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly
personal injury.

D Change in exhaust sound (This may

indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide
leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked immediately.)

D Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squeal
when cornering; uneven tire wear

D Vehicle pulls to one side when driving
straight on a level road

D Strange noises related to suspension
movement

D Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy

feeling brake pedal; pedal almost
touches floor; vehicle pulls to one side
when braking

D Engine coolant temperature continually
higher than normal

393

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD
(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.
The OBD system monitors the operation
of the emission control system. When the
OBD system determines that a problem
exists somewhere in the emission control
system, the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on. In this case, your vehicle may
not pass the I/M test and need to be
repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to
service the vehicle.
Even
does
pass
have

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
after taking several driving trips, but the
error code in the OBD system will not be
cleared unless about 40 trips or more are
taken.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
even the malfunction indicator lamp does
not come on, contact your Toyota dealer
to prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

if the malfunction indicator lamp
not come on, your vehicle may not
the I/M test as readiness codes
not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically set
during ordinary driving. However, when the
battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on
your driving habits, the codes may not be
completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had
come on recently due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

394

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

7− 1

Introduction
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do−it−yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positioning a floor jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

396
398
399
400
401

395

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Engine compartment overview
"2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
1. Fuse blocks
2. Engine coolant reservoir
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Battery
6. Radiator
7. Condenser
8. Electric cooling fans
9. Engine oil level dipstick
10. Windshield and rear window washer
fluid tank

396

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

"3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
1. Fuse blocks
2. Engine coolant reservoir
3. Engine oil filler cap
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Battery
6. Radiator
7. Condenser
8. Electric cooling fans
9. Engine oil level dipstick
10. Windshield and rear window washer
fluid tank

397

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Fuse locations
Spare fuses

398

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Do−it−yourself service
precautions
If you perform maintenance by yourself,
be sure to follow the correct procedure
given in this Section.
You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing may result in operating
problems.
Performing
do−it−yourself
maintenance
during the warranty period may affect your
warranty coverage. Read the separate
Toyota Warranty statement for details and
suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for
those items that are relatively easy for an
owner to perform. As explained in Section
6, there are still a number of items that
must be done by a qualified technician
with special tools.

CAUTION

D When the engine is running, keep

hands, clothing, and tools away
from the moving fan and engine
drive
belts.
(Removing
rings,
watches, and ties is advisable.)

D Right

after driving, the engine
compartment—the engine, radiator,
exhaust manifold and spark plug
boots, etc.—will be hot. So be careful not to touch them. Oil, fluids
and spark plugs may also be hot.

D If the engine is hot, do not remove
the coolant reservoir cap or loosen
the drain plugs to prevent burning
yourself.

For information on tools and parts for do−
it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts and
tools” on page 400 in this Section.

D Do not leave anything that may

Utmost care
ing on your
injury. Here
you should
serve:

D Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-

should be taken when workvehicle to prevent accidental
are a few precautions that
be especially careful to ob-

burn easily, such as paper or rags,
in the engine compartment.

low open flames around fuel or the
battery. Their fumes are flammable.

D Do not get under your vehicle with
just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or
other solid supports.

D Be sure that the engine is off if you

work near the electric cooling fans
or radiator grille. With the engine
on, the electric cooling fans will
automatically start to run if the engine coolant temperature is high
and/or the air conditioning is on.

D Use eye protection whenever you

work on or under your vehicle
where you may be exposed to flying
or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

D Used engine oil contains potentially

harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged
and repeated contact with it. To remove used engine oil from your
skin, wash thoroughly with soap
and water.

D Do not leave used oil within the
reach of children.

D Dispose of used oil and filter only
in a safe and acceptable manner.
Do not dispose of used oil and filter in household trash, in sewers or
onto the ground. Call your dealer or
a service station for information
concerning recycling or disposal.

399

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Parts and tools
D Be extremely cautious when work-

ing on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

NOTICE
z Remember that battery and ignition
cable carry high currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally
causing a short circuit.
z Add only “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate,
non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid
organic acid technology to fill the
radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for
the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water (for Canada).
z If you spill some of the coolant, be
sure to wash it off with water to
prevent it from damaging the parts
or paint.

z Do not allow dirt or anything else
to fall through the spark plug holes.
z Use only spark plugs of the specified type. Using other types will
cause engine damage, loss of performance or radio noise.
z Do not reuse iridium−tipped spark
plugs by cleaning or regapping.
z Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid, or the transmission
could be damaged.
z Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed, or excessive engine
wear could result. Also backfiring
could cause a fire in the engine
compartment.
z Be careful not to scratch the glass
surface with the wiper frame.
z When closing the engine hood,
check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you will
need to perform do−it−yourself maintenance. Remember all Toyota parts are designed in metric sizes, so your tools must
be metric.
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Parts (if level is low):

D “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

See page 404 in Section 7−2 for details about engine oil selection.
Tools:

D Rag or paper towel
D Funnel (only for adding oil)
CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Parts (if level is low):

D “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or

similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−
life hybrid organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a
mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%
coolant and 45% deionized water (for
Canada).

400

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Positioning a floor jack
Tools:

ADDING WASHER FLUID

D Funnel (only for adding coolant)

Parts:

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID

D Water
D Washer fluid containing antifreeze

Parts (if level is low):

D SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
brake fluid

(for winter use)

Tools:

D Funnel

D Rag or paper towel
D Funnel (only for adding fluid)

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

D Bulb with same number and wattage

Parts:

Tools:

D
D
D
D

Warm water
Baking soda

Front

Tools:

Grease
Conventional
clamp bolts)

rating as original (See charts in
“Replacing light bulbs” on page 422 in
Section 7−3.)

wrench

(for

terminal

D Screwdriver

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES
Parts (if replacement is necessary):

D Fuse with same amperage rating as
original

Rear

401

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

When jacking up your vehicle with the
floor jack, position the jack correctly as
shown in the illustrations.

CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe the
following to reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury:

D Follow jacking instructions.
D Do not put any part of your body
under the vehicle supported by the
floor jack. Personal injury may occur.

D Do not start or run the engine while

your vehicle is supported by the
floor jack.

D Make sure to set the floor jack

properly in the jack point. Raising
the vehicle with floor jack improperly positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to
fall off the floor jack and cause
personal injury.

D Never get under the vehicle when

the vehicle is supported by the
floor jack alone; use vehicle support stands.

D Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle.

D When raising the vehicle, do not
place any objects on top of or underneath the floor jack.

D Stop the vehicle on a level firm

ground, firmly set the parking brake
and put the transmission in “P”.
Block the wheels on the opposite
side of the floor jack up point if
necessary.

NOTICE
Make sure to place the floor jack correctly, or your vehicle may be damaged.

402

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

7− 2

Engine and Chassis
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

404
406
407
407
408
410
412
413
415
416

403

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Checking the engine oil level
Low level

Full level

CAUTION
Be careful not to touch the hot exhaust manifold.

NOTICE
Be careful not to drop engine oil on
the vehicle components.
Add oil

O.K.

NOTICE
z Be careful not to spill engine oil on
the vehicle components.
z Avoid overfilling, or
could be damaged.

the

engine

z Check the oil level on the dipstick
once again after adding the oil.

Too full

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level
on the dipstick.
1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle
should be on level ground. After turning
off the engine, wait a few minutes for
the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under
the end and wipe it clean.
3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far
as it will go, or the reading will not be
correct.
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil
level while holding a rag under the
end.

If the oil level is below or only slightly
above the low level, add engine oil of
the same type as already in the engine.
Remove the oil filler cap and add engine
oil in small quantities at a time, checking
the dipstick. We recommend that you use
a funnel when adding oil.
The approximate quantity of oil needed to
raise the level between low and full on the
dipstick is indicated as follows:
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
1.1 L (1.2 qt., 1.0 lmp. qt.)
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 lmp. qt.)
For the engine oil capacity, see “Service
specifications” on page 429 in Section 8.
When the level reaches within the correct
range, install the filler cap hand−tight.

404

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

ENGINE OIL SELECTION
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
SAE 5W−30

Oil grade:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity:
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20

Outside temperature

Oil identification mark
SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for good
fuel economy, and good starting in cold
weather.

Outside temperature

If SAE 5W−30 oil is not available, SAE
10W−30 oil may be used. However, it
should be replaced with SAE 5W−30 at
the next oil change.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you
should use.

SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20 engine oil may be
used. However, SAE 0W−20 is the best
choice for good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.

405

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Checking the engine coolant
level
Look at the see−through coolant reservoir when the engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between
the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the
reservoir. If the level is low, add the
coolant. (For the coolant type, see
“Coolant type selection” described below.)
The coolant level in the reservoir will vary
with engine temperature. However, if the
level is below the “LOW” line, add coolant. Bring the level between the “FULL”
and “LOW” lines.
To ensure excellent lubrication performance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine
Motor Oil” is available, which has been
specifically tested and approved for all
Toyota engines.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details about “Toyota Genuine Motor
Oil”.

If the coolant level drops within a short
time after replenishing, there may be a
leak in the system. Visually check the
radiator, hoses, coolant reservoir cap and
drain cock and water pump.

Coolant type selection
Use of improper coolants may damage
your engine cooling system.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
and non−borate coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology consists of the combination of
low phosphates and organic acids.)
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −35_C
(−31_F).

If you can find no leak, have your Toyota
dealer test the cap pressure and check
for leaks in the cooling system.

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −42_C
(−44_F).

CAUTION

NOTICE

To prevent burning yourself, do not
remove the coolant reservoir cap
when the engine is hot.

Do not use plain water alone.

406

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Checking the radiator and
condenser

Checking brake fluid

If any of the above parts are extremely
dirty or you are not sure of their condition, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, be careful not to touch the radiator or condenser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE
Toyota recommends “Toyota Super Long
Life Coolant”, which has been tested to
ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor
result in malfunction of your engine
coolant system with proper usage. “Toyota
Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology and has been specifically
designed to avoid engine cooling system
malfunction on Toyota vehicles.
Please contact
further details.

your

Toyota dealer

for

To prevent damage to the radiator
and condenser, do not perform the
work by yourself.

To check the fluid level, simply look at
the see−through reservoir. The level
should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the reservoir.
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go
down slightly as the brake pads wear. So
be sure to keep the reservoir filled.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it
may indicate a serious mechanical problem.
If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the
brake reservoir.

407

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Checking tire inflation
pressure
Remove and replace the reservoir cap by
hand. Fill the brake fluid to the dotted
line. This brings the fluid to the correct
level when you put the cap back on.
Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once
opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from
the air, and excess moisture can cause a
dangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION
Take care when filling the reservoir
because brake fluid can harm your
hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your
hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable
with your hands or eyes, go to the
doctor.

Keep your tire inflation pressures
at the proper level.
The recommended cold tire inflation
pressures, tire sizes and the combined weight of occupants and cargo
(vehicle capacity weight) are described on page 428 and 433. They
are also on the tire and loading information label.
You should check the tire inflation
pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month. And do not forget the
spare!

NOTICE
If you spill some of the fluid, be sure
to wipe it off to prevent it from damaging the parts or paintwork.

408

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

The following instructions for
checking tire inflation pressure
should be observed:
D The
pressure
should
be
checked only when the tires are
cold. If your vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours and has
not been driven for more than 1.5
km or 1 mile since, you will get
an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
D Always use a tire pressure
gauge. The appearance of a tire
can be misleading. Besides, tire
inflation pressures that are even
just a few pounds off can degrade
ride and handling.
D Do not bleed or reduce tire
inflation pressure after driving.
It is normal for the tire inflation
pressure to be higher after driving.
D Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passenger and luggage weight should be located so
that the vehicle is balanced.

Tire pressure gauge

5. After completing the tire inflation
pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the
valve and check for leakage.
6. Install the tire valve cap.
If a gauge and air pump are not available, have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the tire valve cap.
2. Press the tip of the tire pressure
gauge to the tire valve.
3. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
4. In case the tire inflation pressure
is not within the prescribed range,
insert the compressed air from the
valve. In case of applying too
much air, press the center of the
valve and release the air to adjust.

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve
caps. Without the valve caps, dirt
or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage.
If the caps have been lost, have
new ones put on as soon as possible.
Incorrect tire inflation pressure may
waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your vehicle less safe to drive.
If a tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

409

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Checking and replacing tires
CAUTION
Keep your tires properly inflated.
Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and cause an accident resulting in death or serious injuries.
Low tire pressure (underinflation)—
D Excessive wear
D Uneven wear
D Poor handling
D Possibility of blowouts from an
overheated tire
D Poor sealing of the tire bead
D Wheel deformation and/or tire
separation
D A greater possibility of tire
damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinflation)—
D Poor handling
D Excessive wear
D Uneven wear
D A greater possibility of tire
damage from road hazards

Treadwear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES
Check the tire’s tread for treadwear
indicators. If the indicators show,
replace the tires. The location of
treadwear indicators is shown by
the “TWI” or “Δ ” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of each
tire.

410

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

The tires on your Toyota have built−in
treadwear indicators to help you know
when the tires need replacement.
When the tread depth wears to 1.6
mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indicators
will appear. If you can see the indicators in two or more adjacent grooves,
the tire should be replaced. The lower
the tread, the higher the risk of skidding.
The effectiveness of snow tires is
lost if the tread wears down below
4 mm (0.16 in.).
If you have tire damage such as
cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage, the tire
should be replaced.
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be
properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage, it
should be replaced. If you are not
sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do not
continue driving. Driving even a short
distance can damage a tire beyond
repair.
Any tires which are over 6 years
old must be checked by a qualified
technician even if damage is not
obvious.
Tires deteriorate with age even if they
have never or seldom been used.
This applies also to the spare tire and
tires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRES
When replacing a tire, use a tire of
the same size and construction,
and the same or greater maximum
load as the originally installed
tires. Also, on four−wheel drive
models, all the tires must be the
same brand and have the same
tread patterns.
Using any other size or type of tire
may seriously affect handling, ride,
speedometer/odometer calibration,
ground clearance, and clearance between the body and tires or snow
chains.
Check that the maximum load of the
replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)
of either the front axle or the rear
axle, whichever is greater. As for the
maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure mentioned on the sidewall
of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label.

411

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Rotating tires
For details about the side wall of the
tire and the Certification Label, see
pages 321 and 324.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident
may occur resulting in death or
serious injuries.
D Do not mix radial, bias belted,
or bias−ply tires on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
D Do not use tires other than the
manufacturer’s recommended
size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics
resulting in loss of control.

D Four−wheel drive models:
Do not use tires of different
brands, sizes, construction or
tread patterns, as this may
cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in
loss of control.
Toyota recommends all four tires,
or at least both of the front or rear
tires be replaced at a time as a set.
See “If you have a flat tire” on page
361 in Section 4 for tire change procedure.
When a tire is replaced, the wheel
should always be balanced.
An unbalanced wheel may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Wheels
can get out of balance with regular
use and should therefore be balanced
occasionally.
When replacing a tubeless tire, the
air valve should also be replaced
with a new one.

With a spare tire of the same
wheel type as the installed tires

412

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Installing snow tires and
chains

With a spare tire of different
wheel type from the installed
tires

To equalize tire wear and help extend tire life, Toyota recommends
that you rotate your tires according to the maintenance schedule.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual
Supplement”.)
However, the most appropriate timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and
road surface conditions.
See “If you have a flat tire” on page
361 in Section 4 for tire change procedure.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, out−
of−balance wheels, or severe braking.

WHEN TO
CHAINS

USE

SNOW

TIRES

Snow tires or chains are recommended
when driving on snow or ice.
On wet or dry roads, conventional tires
provide better traction than snow tires.
SNOW TIRE SELECTION
If you need snow tires, select tires of
the same size, construction and load
capacity as the originally installed tires.
Also, on four−wheel drive models, all
the tires must be the same brand and
have the same tread patterns.
Do not use tires other than those mentioned above. Do not install studded tires
without first checking local regulations for
possible restrictions.

CAUTION
Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

D Do not use snow tires other than

the manufacturer’s recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in
loss of control.

413

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D Four−wheel drive models:

Side chain

Do not use snow tires of different
brands, sizes, construction or tread
patterns, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.

If the wrong combination of tire and
chain is used, the chains could damage the vehicle body.
Cross chain

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION
Snow tires should be installed on all
wheels.
Installing snow tires on the front wheels
only can lead to an excessive difference
in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires, which could cause loss of
vehicle control.
When storing removed tires, you should
store them in a cool dry place.
Mark the direction of rotation and be sure
to install them in the same direction when
replacing.

CAUTION

D Do not drive with the snow tires
incorrectly inflated.

D Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)
with any type of snow tires.

NOTICE

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION
Use the tire chains of correct size.
For 215/70R16, 225/65R17 and 235/55R18
tires, use the following type chains.
A
B
C
D
E
F

Diameter of side chain
Width of side chain
Length of side chain
Diameter of cross chain
Width of cross chain
Length of cross chain

mm (in.)
3 (0.12)
10 (0.39)
30 (1.18)
4 (0.16)
14 (0.55)
25 (0.98)

CHAIN INSTALLATION
Install the chains on the front tires as
tightly as possible. Do not use tire
chains on the rear tires. Retighten
chains
after
driving
0.5—1.0
km
(1/4—1/2 mile).
When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the instructions of the chain
manufacturer.
If wheel covers are used, they will be
scratched by the chain band, so remove
the covers before putting on the chains.

Regulations regarding the use of tire
chains vary according to location or
type of road, so always check local regulations before installing chains.

414

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Replacing wheels
CAUTION

D Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or

the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is
lower.

D Drive

carefully avoiding bumps,
holes, and sharp turns, which may
cause the vehicle to bounce.

D Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel

braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.

D When driving with chains installed,

be sure to drive carefully. Slow
down before entering curves to
avoid losing control of the vehicle.
Otherwise an accident may occur.

As you might have difficulty in identifying a flat or deflated tire, a tire pressure warning system is provided on
this vehicle.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

When replacing the wheels, be sure to
install tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters on the wheels. Consult your
Toyota dealer about how to set up the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,
the tire may slip off the wheel or cause
loss of handling control.

CAUTION

D Have the tires, wheels or tire pres-

sure warning valves and transmitters replaced and ID codes registered by Toyota dealer. If you need
tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters, purchase from Toyota
dealer.

D The tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter nuts should always be
tightened to a torque of 4 N·m (0.4
kgf·m, 2.9 ft·lbf).

If you have wheel damage such as
bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the
wheel should be replaced.

WHEEL SELECTION
When replacing wheels, care should be
taken to ensure that the wheels are replaced by ones with the same load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.
Correct replacement wheels are available
at your Toyota dealer.
A wheel of a different size or type may
adversely affect handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow chain clearance to
the body and chassis.

D The use of non−genuine wheels may

result in the system failure or air−
leak.

415

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage
and could fail without warning. Also, bent
wheels which have been straightened may
have structural damage and therefore
should not be used. Never use an inner
tube in a leaking wheel which is designed
for a tubeless tire.

CAUTION
Observe the following instructions.
Otherwise, an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

D Do not use wheels other than the
manufacturer’s recommended size,
as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in
loss of control.

D Four−wheel drive models:
Do not use
brands, sizes
may cause
characteristics
control.

Aluminum wheel precautions
D When installing aluminum wheels,

check that the wheel nuts are tight
after driving your vehicle the first 1600
km (1000 miles).

D If

you have
changed your
wheel nuts are
1600 km (1000

rotated, repaired, or
tires, check that the
still tight after driving
miles).

D When using tire chains, be careful not
to damage the aluminum wheels.

D Use

only Toyota wheel nuts and
wrench designed for your aluminum
wheels.

D When balancing your wheels, use only

Toyota balance weights or equivalent
and a plastic or rubber hammer.

D As with any wheel, periodically check

your aluminum wheels for damage. If
damaged, replace immediately.

wheels of different
and types, as this
dangerous handling
resulting in loss of

416

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION
DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

7− 3

Electrical components
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

418
420
420
422
422

417

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Checking battery condition—
—Precautions
CAUTION
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
The battery produces flammable and
explosive hydrogen gas.

D Do not cause a spark from the battery with tools.

D Do not smoke or light a match near
the battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.

D Avoid contact with eyes, skin or
clothes.

D Never ingest electrolyte.
D Wear protective safety glasses when
working near the battery.

D Keep children away from the battery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

D If electrolyte gets in your eyes,

flush your eyes with clean water
immediately and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge
or cloth while en route to the medical office.

—Checking battery exterior
D If electrolyte gets on your skin,

Terminals

Ground cable

thoroughly wash the contact area. If
you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

D If electrolyte gets on your clothes,
there is a
through to
ly take off
follow the
essary.

possibility of its soaking
your skin, so immediatethe exposed clothing and
procedure above, if nec-

Hold−down clamp

D If you accidentally swallow electro-

lyte, drink a large quantity of water
or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable
oil. Then go immediately for emergency help.

Check the battery for corroded or loose
terminal connections, cracks, or loose
hold−down clamp.
a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off
with a solution of warm water and baking soda. Coat the outside of the terminals with grease to prevent further corrosion.
b. If the terminal connections are loose,
tighten their clamp nuts—but do not
overtighten.
c. Tighten the hold−down clamp only
enough to keep the battery firmly in
place. Overtightening may damage the
battery case.

418

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

NOTICE
z Be sure the engine and all accessories are off before performing maintenance.
z When checking the battery, remove
the ground cable from the negative
terminal (“−” mark) first and reinstall it last.
z Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.

Before replacing the battery, remove the
cover as shown.

Removing clip

z Take care no solution gets into the
battery when washing it.
If the battery is disconnected or run
down, You should normalize the power
window and moon roof may not operate
correctly after you reconnect, replace or
recharge the battery. In any of these
cases, you should normalize each system.
To normalize them, see “Power windows”
on page 24 and “Electric moon roof” on
page 30 in Section 1−2.

Installing clip

419

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Checking battery condition
Type A
Green

Dark

Clear or
light yellow

White

Red

Checking and replacing fuses

During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen gas.
Therefore, before recharging:
1. If recharging with the battery installed
on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.

Type B
Blue

Battery recharging precautions

2. Be sure the power switch on the recharger is off when connecting the
charger cables to the battery and when
disconnecting them.

Good

Blown

CAUTION

D Always charge the battery in an un-

CHECKING BY INDICATOR
Check the battery condition by the indicator color.
Indicator color
Type A

Type B

Green

Blue

Dark
Clear or
light
yellow

White

Red

Condition
Good
Charging necessary.
Have battery
checked by your
Toyota dealer.

Have battery
checked by your
Toyota dealer.

Type A

confined area. Do not charge the
battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventilation.

D Only do a slow charge (5 A or

less). Charging at a quicker rate is
dangerous. The battery may explode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the
engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.

Good

Blown

Type B

420

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Type A fuses can be pulled out by using
the pull−out tool. The location of the pull−
out tool is shown in the illustration.
If you are not sure whether the fuse has
blown, try replacing the suspected fuse
with one that you know is good.
If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse
into the clip.
Only install a fuse with the amperage rating designated on the fuse box lid.
Good
Type C

Blown

If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work, check the
fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,
they must be replaced.
See “Fuse locations” on page 398 in Section 7−1 for locations of the fuses.
Turn the engine switch and inoperative
component off. Pull the suspected fuse
straight out and check it.
Determine which fuse may be causing the
problem. The lid of the fuse box shows
the name of the circuit for each fuse. See
page 434 in Section 8 for the functions
controlled by each circuit.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in an
emergency you can pull out the “RAD
NO.1” or “CIG” fuse, which may be dispensable for normal driving, and use it if
its amperage rating is the same.
If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one that is lower, but as close
to the rating as possible. If the amperage
is lower than that specified, the fuse
might blow out again but this does not
indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and
return the substitute to its original clip.
It is a good idea to purchase a set of
spare fuses and keep them in your vehicle for emergencies.

421

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Adding washer fluid

Replacing light bulbs—

If the new fuse immediately blows out,
there is a problem with the electrical system. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as
soon as possible.

If any
shield
comes
empty.

You should normalize the power window
and moon roof may not operate correctly
after replacing blown fuses. To normalize
the power window and moon roof, see
“Power windows” on page 24 and “Electric
moon roof” on page 30 in Section 1−2.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.
However, in cold areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This
product is available at your Toyota dealer
and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to
mix with water.

The following illustrations show how to
gain access to the bulbs. When replacing
a bulb, make sure the engine switch and
light switch are off. Use bulbs with the
wattage ratings given in the table.

CAUTION
Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any other object, in
place of a fuse. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire.

washer does not work or windwasher fluid level warning light
on, the washer tank may be
Add washer fluid.

NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.

The stop/tail lights and high mounted stoplight consist of a number of LEDs. If any
of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle
to your Toyota dealer to have the light
replaced.
If two or more LEDs in a stop/tail light
burn out, your vehicle may not conform to
local laws (SAE).

CAUTION

D To prevent burning yourself, do not

replace the light bulbs while they
are hot.

D Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas

inside and require special handling.
They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb
only by its plastic or metal case.
Do not touch the glass part of a
bulb with bare hands.

422

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.
The inside of the lens of exterior lights
such as headlights may temporarily fog up
when the lens becomes wet in the rain or
in a car wash. This is not a problem
because the fogging is caused by the
temperature difference between the outside
and inside of the lens, just like the
windshield fogs up in the rain. However, if
there is a large drop of water on the
inside of the lens, or if there is water
pooled inside the light, contact your
Toyota dealer.

Bulb
No.

Type

Headlights (high)

9005

Headlights (low)

9006

Front turn signal,
parking and front
side marker lights

7443

21/5

Front fog lights

—

Rear turn signal
lights

7440

Back−up lights

921

Rear side marker
lights

—

License plate light

Light bulbs

168

Interior light

—

Front personal
lights

—

Vanity lights

—

Luggage
compartment light

—

A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
F:

HB3 halogen bulbs
HB4 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
H11 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (amber)
Double end bulbs

423

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Headlights
High beam (inside)
Low beam
(outside)

1. Open the hood. Turn the bulb base
counterclockwise to the front of the
vehicle as shown.
The above illustration shows the left−hand
headlight.

2. Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.
If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Plug in a new bulb into the connector and install it into the mounting
hole.
Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

424

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—Front turn signal, parking
and front side marker lights

—Front fog lights

—Rear turn signal, rear side
marker and back−up lights

If either the left or right front fog light
burns out, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE
Do not try to replace the front fog
light bulbs by yourself. You may damage the vehicle.

425

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

—License plate light

a: Rear side marker light
b: Rear turn signal light
c: Back−up light

Use a flathead screwdriver.

426

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION
SPECIFICATIONS

Specifications
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

428
429
429
429
433
434

427

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Dimensions and weights
(179.9)∗1
(180.1)∗2
(180.3)∗3
(181.1)∗4

Overall length

mm (in.)

4570
4575
4580
4600

Overall width

mm (in.)

1815
1855

(71.5)
(73.0)∗5

Overall height∗6

mm (in.)

1685
1690
1745
1755

(66.3)
(66.5)∗7
(68.7)∗8
(69.1)∗7, 8

Wheelbase

mm (in.)

2660 (104.7)

Front tread

mm (in.)

1560

(61.4)

Rear tread

mm (in.)

1560

(61.4)

Vehicle capacity weight
(occupants + luggage)
Towing capacity
(trailer weight + cargo weight)

kg (lb.)
kg (lb.)

∗1 :
∗2 :
∗3 :
∗4 :
∗5 :
∗6 :
∗7 :
∗8 :
∗9 :
∗10 :
∗11 :
∗12 :

215/70R16 tires
225/65R17 tires
235/55R18 tires
With spare tire cover
With over fender
Unladen vehicle
With third seat
With roof rails
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
Without towing package
With towing package

375 (825)
525 (1155)∗7
680 (1500)∗9
907 (2000)∗10, 11
1588 (3500)∗10, 12

428

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Engine

Fuel

Service specifications

Model:
2AZ−FE and 2GR−FE

Fuel type:

ENGINE

Type:
2AZ−FE engine
4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline
2GR−FE engine
6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke, mm (in.):
2AZ−FE engine
88.5
96.0 (3.48
3.78)
2GR−FE engine
94.0
83.0 (3.70
3.27)
Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):
2AZ−FE engine
2GR−FE engine

2362 (144.1)
3456 (210.9)

Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):
60 (15.9, 13.2)

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine only
Intake
0.19—0.29 (0.007—0.011)
Exhaust
0.38—0.48 (0.015—0.019)
Spark plug type:
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
DENSO
SK20R11
NGK
IFR6A11
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
DENSO
FK20HR11
Spark plug gap, mm (in.):
1.1 (0.043)

NOTICE
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine—Use only
above spark plugs. Do not adjust
gaps for engine performance or
smooth driveability.

429

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

ENGINE LUBRICATION
Oil capacity (drain and refill),
L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Recommended oil viscosity:
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
SAE 5W−30

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
With filter
4.3 (4.5, 3.8)
Without filter
4.1 (4.3, 3.6)
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
With filter
6.1 (6.4, 5.4)
Without filter
5.7 (6.0, 5.0)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.
Oil grade:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Outside temperature
Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

430

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

COOLING SYSTEM
Total capacity, L(qt., lmp. qt.):
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
6.8 (7.2, 6.0)
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
Without towing package
8.9 (9.4, 7.8)
With towing package
9.3 (9.8, 8.2)
Coolant type:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
used in your Toyota vehicle at factory
fill. In order to avoid technical problems,
only use “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non−silicate, non−amine,
non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with
long−life hybrid organic acid technology.
(Coolant with long−life hybrid organic
acid technology consists of the combination of low phosphates and organic
acids.)
Do not use plain water alone.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for
further details.

BATTERY
Open voltage∗ at 20_C (68_F):
12.6—12.8 V
Fully charged
12.2—12.4 V
Half charged
11.8—12.0 V
Discharged
∗:

Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the lights
turned off
Charging rates:
5 A max.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,
Imp. qt.):
Up to 3.5 (3.7, 3.1)
Fluid type:
Toyota Genuine ATF WS
Change automatic transmission fluid only
as necessary.
Generally, it is necessary to change
automatic transmission fluid only if your
vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions
listed
in your
“Scheduled
Maintenance
Guide”
or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. When
changing the automatic transmission fluid,
use only “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” (ATF
JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring
optimum transaxle performance.

Notice: Using automatic transmission
fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF
WS” may cause deterioration in shift
quality, locking up of your transmission
accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission
of your vehicle.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.
TRANSFER
(four−wheel drive models)
Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
0.45 (0.48 0.40)
Oil type:
Hypoid gear oil API GL−5
Recommended oil viscosity:
Above −18_C (0_F)
SAE 85W−90
Below −18_C (0_F)
SAE 80W−90

431

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

REAR DIFFERENTIAL
(four−wheel drive models)

STEERING
Wheel free play:
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
0.5 (0.5, 0.4)
Oil type:
Hypoid gear oil API GL−5
Recommended oil viscosity:
Above −18_C (0_F)
SAE 90
Below −18_C (0_F)
SAE 80W or 80W−90
BRAKES
Minimum pedal clearance when depressed
with a force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)
with the engine running, mm (in.):
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
Without third seat
95 (3.7)
With third seat
120 (4.7)
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

120 (4.7)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):
1—6 (0.04—0.24)
Pad wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)
Parking brake adjustment when pulled with
the force of 200 N (21 kgf, 45 lbf):
6—8 clicks
Fluid type:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

432

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Tires
Tire size, cold tire inflation pressure and wheel size:
Cold tire inflation pressure
kPa (kgf/cm 2 or bar, psi)

Tire size

Wheel size

Front

Rear

Spare

215/70R16 99H

220 (2.2, 32)

6 1/2J

225/65R17 101H

220 (2.2, 32)

17
17

6 1/2J∗1
7J∗2

235/55R18 99H

220 (2.2, 32)

7 1/2J

∗1 :
∗2 :

Steel wheels
Aluminum wheels
Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):
103 (10.5, 76)
NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions”, pages 408 through 416 in Section 7−2.

433

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Fuses
ENGINE COMPARTMENT (No.1)
1. SPARE 30 A: Spare fuse
2. SPARE 20 A: Spare fuse
3. SPARE 10 A: Spare fuse
4. ECU−B2 7.5 A: Air conditioning system, power windows
5. RSE 7.5 A: Rear seat entertainment
system

13. HEAD RL 10 A: Right−hand headlight
(low beam)
14. AC INV 15 A: AC inverter
15. TOWING 30 A: No circuit
16. STV HTR 25 A: No circuit
17. DEICER 20 A: Windshield wiper de−
icer
18. HTR 50 A: Air conditioning system

6. STR LOCK 20 A: No circuit

19. PTC2 50 A: No circuit

7. RAD NO.1 20 A: Audio system

20. PTC1 50 A: No circuit

8. ECU−B 10 A: Wireless remote control
system, electric power steering system,
main body ECU, power door lock, front
passenger occupant classification system, clock, audio system, meters and
gauges

21. HEAD MAIN 50 A: “HEAD LL”, “HEAD
RL”, “HEAD LH”, “HEAD RH” fuses

9. DOME 10 A: Engine switch light, interior light, vanity lights, luggage compartment light, front personal lights, foot
lights

22. RDI 30 A (without towing package)
or FAN2 50 A (with towing package):
Electric cooling fan
23. CDS 30 A (without towing package)
or FAN1 50 A (with towing package):
Electric cooling fan
24. H−LP CLN 30 A: No circuit

10. HEAD LH 10 A: Left−hand headlight
(high beam)
11. HEAD RH 10 A: Right−hand headlight
(high beam)
12. HEAD LL 10 A: Left−hand headlight
(low beam)

434

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT (No.2)
1. AMP 30 A: Audio system
2. AM2 30 A: Starting system
3. IG2 15 A: Starting system, multiport
fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
4. HAZ 10 A: Emergency flashers
5. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
6. AM2−2 7.5 A: No circuit
7. EFI NO.1 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
8. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
9. EFI MAIN 20 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, “EFI NO.1”, “EFI NO.2”
fuses

13. ABS2 30 A: Anti−lock brake system,
traction control system, enhanced vehicle stability control system, “AUTO
LSD” system, downhill assist control
system, hill−start assist control system
14. ABS1 50 A: Anti−lock brake system,
traction control system, enhanced vehicle stability control system, “AUTO
LSD” system, downhill assist control
system, hill−start assist control system
15. EMPS 60 A: Electric power steering
system
16. MAIN 80 A: “HEAD MAIN”, “ECU−B2”,
“RSE” fuses
17. ALT 120 A (without towing package)
or 140 A (with towing package):
“ABS 1”, “ABS 2”, “RDI”, “CDS”,
“FAN1”, “FAN2”, “AC INV”, “TOWING”,
“HTR”, “DEICER” fuses

10. HORN 10 A: Horn
11. A/F 20 A (3.5 L V6 [2GR−FE] engine
only): A/F sensor
12. P/I 50 A: “EFI MAIN”, “HORN”, “A/F”
fuses

435

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. S−HTR 15 A: Seat heaters
2. WIP 25 A: Windshield wipers
3. RR WIP 15 A: Rear window wiper
4. WSH 15 A: Windshield washer, rear
window washer
5. ECU−IG1 10 A: Electric cooling fan,
anti−lock brake system, traction control
system, enhanced vehicle stability control system, “AUTO LSD” system,
downhill assist control system, hill−start
assist control system, active torque
control 4WD system, tire pressure
monitor system, automatic transmission
shift lock system, air conditioning system, main body ECU, electric moon
roof, stop/tail lights, windshield wiper
de−icer, electric power steering system,
clock, AC inverter
6. ECU−IG2 10 A: Air conditioning system, rear window defogger
7. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis system

8. STOP 10 A: Stop/tail lights, high
mounted stoplight, automatic transmission shift lock system, multiport fuel
injection system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system, anti−lock brake
system, traction control system, enhanced vehicle stability control system,
“AUTO LSD” system, downhill assist
control system, hill−start assist control
system
9. DOOR 25 A: Main body ECU, power
door lock system
10. ACC−B 25 A: “ACC”, “CIG” fuses
11. 4WD 7.5 A: Active torque control 4WD
system
12. FR FOG 15 A: Front fog lights
13. AM1 7.5 A: Starting system
14. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, parking lights,
license plate light, front fog lights, rear
side marker lights
15. PANEL 7.5 A: Clock, instrument panel
lights, audio system
16. GAUGE1 10 A: Buck−up lights, charging system
17. D FR DOOR 20 A: Power window
(front doors)
18. RL DOOR 20 A: Power window (rear
left door)

436

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

19. RR DOOR 20 A: Power window (rear
right door)
20. S/ROOF 25 A: Electric moon roof
21. CIG 15 A: No circuit
22. ACC 7.5 A: Audio system, power outlets, power rear view mirror control,
automatic transmission shift lock system, main body ECU, clock, rear seat
entertainment system
23. MIR HTR 10 A: Outside rear view mirror heaters
24. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets
25. RR FOG 10 A: No circuit
26. IGN 7.5 A: SRS airbag system, multiport fuel injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system, front
passenger occupant classification system, starting system
27. GAUGE2 7.5 A: Meters and gauges
28. DEF 30 A: Rear
“MIR HTR” fuse

window defogger,

29. P/SEAT 30 A: Power seat
30. POWER 30 A: Power windows

437

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

438

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

SECTION

FOR OWNERS
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) . . . . . . . . . . 440

439

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Seat belt instructions for
Canadian owners (in
French)—

Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
(Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy
campaign.
However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll−free
at
1−888−327−4236
(TTY:
1−800−424−9153);
go
to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200
New
Jersey
Ave,
S.E.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor
vehicle
safety
from
http://www.safercar.gov.

The following is a French explanation
of seat belt instructions extracted from
the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.

440

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

441

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

442

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

2008
Quick Reference Guide

2008
RAV4
This Quick Reference Guide is a summary of
basic vehicle operations. It contains brief
descriptions of fundamental operations so you
can locate and use the vehicle’s main
equipment quickly and easily.
The Quick Reference Guide is not intended as
a substitute for the Owner’s Manual located
in the vehicle’s glove box. We strongly
encourage you to review the Owner’s Manual
and supplementary manuals so you will have
a better understanding of the vehicle’s
capabilities and limitations.
Your dealership and the entire staff of Toyota
Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. wish you many years
of satisfied driving in your new RAV4.

! A word about safe vehicle operations
This Quick Reference Guide is not a full
description of RAV4 operations. Every
RAV4 owner should review the Owner’s
Manual that accompanies this vehicle.
Pay special attention to the boxed
“
” information highlighted
throughout the Owner’s Manual. Each box
contains safe operating instructions to
help you avoid injury or equipment
malfunction.
All information in this Quick Reference
Guide is current at the time of printing.
Toyota reserves the right to make changes
at any time without notice.

INDEX
Item

Page no.

* Visit your Toyota dealer for information on
customizing this feature.

24
24
24
25
24

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES
Doors-Child safety locks
Seat belts
Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor
Spare tire & tools
Tire Pressure Warning System

10
16-17
18-19
21
9
17
17
23
23
21
22
14
20
15
22
20
10
11
16
11
12
13
21
15
15
13

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Active torque control 4WD
Air Conditioning/Heating
Audio
Auto LSD (Limited Slip Differential)
Automatic Transmission
Bottle holders
Clock
Cruise control
Cup holders
Door locks
Light control-Instrument panel
Lights & turn signals
Moonroof
Parking brake
Power outlets
Rear seat entertainment system
Seat adjustments-Front
Seat adjustments-Second row seats
Seat heaters
Seats-Head restraints
Seats-Folding down second row seats
Seats-Stowing third row seats
Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
Windows
Windshield wipers & washers

8
6
7
4-5
4
2-3
6-7

OVERVIEW

OVERVIEW
Engine maintenance
Fuel tank door release and cap
Hood release
Indicator symbols
Instrument cluster
Instrument panel
Keyless entry*

OVERVIEW
Instrument panel
Steering wheel
controls

Steering wheel audio controls
Telephone controls*
Speech command button*
Cruise control
Instrument panel light control
Headlight, turn signal and front fog light* control
Wiper and washer controls
Four-wheel drive lock switch (4WD models) or
“AUTO LSD” switch (2WD models)
Audio system
Emergency flasher switch
Front passenger occupant classification indicator
Air Conditioning controls
Rear window and outside rearview mirror
defogger switch*

With automatic Air
Conditioning system
OVERVIEW

With manual Air
Conditioning system

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

* If equipped

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Clock and Air Conditioning display
12V DC Power outlet
Seat heater switch*
Downhill Assist Control switch
Front passenger seat belt reminder light
Engine immobilizer indicator*
Engine switch
Tilt and telescopic steering release
115V AC Power outlet ON/OFF switch*

OVERVIEW

Instrument cluster

Tachometer
Service indicator and reminder
Speedometer
Engine coolant temperature
Fuel gauge
Odometer, two trip meters and outside
temperature display
Trip meter reset knob

Indicator symbols
Brake system warning1
Driver/Front passenger seat belt
reminder1 (alarm will sound if speed
is over 12 mph)
Charging system warning1
Low engine oil pressure warning1
Malfunction/Check Engine indicator1
Low fuel level warning1
Engine oil replacement reminder1
•Vehicle Stability Control warning1
•“AUTO LSD” warning1
•Traction Control warning1
•Downhill Assist Control warning1
•Hill-start Assist Control warning1
Open door warning1
1

For details, refer to “Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers,” Section 1-6, 2008 Owner’s Manual.
2 For details, refer to “Active torque control 4WD system,”
Section 1-7, 2008 Owner’s Manual.

Airbag SRS warning1

Low Tire Pressure Warning1

OVERVIEW

Automatic Transmission fluid temperature
warning1

“4WD” warning2
Electric power steering system warning1
Low windshield washer fluid level warning1
Front passenger occupant classification indicator
Headlight high beam indicator
Turn signal indicator

Automatic Transmission indicator (4-speed)1
Automatic Transmission indicator (5-speed)1
Four-wheel drive lock indicator2

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Front fog light indicator

Slip indicator
“AUTO LSD” indicator
Downhill Assist Control indicator
Cruise control indicator3
Anti-lock Brake System warning1

If this light flashes, refer to “Cruise control,” Section 1-7, 2008
Owner’s Manual.

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

OVERVIEW

Fuel tank door release and cap
Driver seat

Pull up

Turn

Store

NOTE: Tighten until one click is heard. If the cap is
not tightened enough, Check Engine “
” indicator
may illuminate.

Keyless entry
Beep sound can be switched “ON” or “OFF.” Refer to
the Owner’s Manual for more details.

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

Push ONCE: Driver door
TWICE: All doors

Push

NOTE: After unlocking, if a door is not opened within
30 seconds, all doors will relock for safety.
6

Panic button
OVERVIEW

Push and hold

Hood release

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Pull

Pull up latch
and raise hood
SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

OVERVIEW

Engine maintenance
4 cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine

6 cylinder (2GR-FE) engine

Engine coolant reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Engine oil level dipstick
Windshield and back window washer fluid tank
Note: Regularly scheduled maintenance, including
oil changes, will help extend the life of
your vehicle and maintain performance.
Please refer to the “Owner’s Warranty
Information Booklet,” “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement.”
8

FEATURES/OPERATIONS
Automatic Transmission
4-speed models
OVERVIEW

Park*
Reverse
Neutral
Drive
Third gear
Second gear
First gear

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

5-speed models
Park*
Reverse
Neutral
Drive
Fourth gear
Third gear
Second gear
First gear

Downshifting increases power going uphill, or
provides engine braking downhill. For best fuel
economy during normal driving conditions, always
drive with the shift lever in the “D” position.

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

* The engine switch must be ON, and the brake
pedal depressed to shift from “Park.”

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Auto lock
Active
torque
functions
control 4WD (4WD models)
Four-wheel drive lock switch

Push the switch to ensure that the engine torque is
applied to the four wheels.
NOTE: Should ONLY be used when wheel spinning
occurs on loose or unpaved surfaces.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.

Seat adjustments-Front
Power seat

Manual seat

Position
Height crank (driver side only)
Seatback angle
Driver seat: position, cushion angle and height
Passenger seat: position only
Seatback angle
Lumbar support

Seats-Head restraints
Second row seats

Front seats

OVERVIEW

Lock release button
Third row seats

Seat adjustments-Second row seats
Vehicles with
third row seats

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Lock release button

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Position
Seatback angle
Seatback lock release

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Seats-Folding down second row seats
Vehicles without third row seats
Left side
remote seat release

Right side
remote seat release

Vehicles with third row seats

(2) Lower

(1) Push
(3) Pull down

Seats-Stowing third row seats (if equipped)
(4) Fold down

(3) Pull

OVERVIEW

(2) Lower

(1) Push

(8) Push to lock in
(6) Lift up

(5) Pull up

(9) Push to lock in

Windshield wipers & washers

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

(7) Push
down

Front
Single wipe

Adjust interval

Interval wipe
Pull to wash and wipe

Slow
Fast

Rear
Wipe
Interval wipe

Wash and wipe

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Wash and wipe

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Lights & turn signals
Headlights
Headlights
Parking lights

High beam
Low beam

High beam flasher

-Daytime Running Light system (if equipped)
Automatically turns on the headlights at a reduced
intensity.
-Automatic light cut off system Will automatically
turn lights off after a delay of 30 seconds, or the
lock switch on remote may be pushed.

Turn signals
Right turn
Lane change

Lane change
Left turn

Front fog lights (if equipped)
Turn

Front fog lights come on only when the headlights
are on low beam.

Parking brake
Release

Set

OVERVIEW

Pull
(1) Pull slightly
(2) Push
(3) Lower

Tilt and telescopic steering wheel
Length

Lock
release
lever

Angle

NOTE: Do not attempt to adjust while the vehicle
is in motion.

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Hold wheel, push lever down, set angle and length,
and return lever.

Windows
Driver side
Up

Windows
lock
button
Up

Down

Window lock switch Deactivates all passenger
windows. Driver’s window remains operable.
NOTE: If the battery is disconnected, the window
needs to be reinitialized. Refer to the Owner’s
Manual for more details.
15

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Automatic operation (driver side only) Push the
switch completely down or pull it completely up and
release to fully open or close. To stop window
midway, lightly push the switch in the opposite
direction.

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Seat heaters (if equipped)
Left front seat

Right front seat

Air Conditioning/Heating
Automatic Air Conditioning

Temperature (driver side)
Fresh or recirculated cabin air
Airflow vent
In “
” or “
” mode, use fresh air (“
”
indicator “OFF”) to reduce window fogging.
Air Conditioning ON/OFF
“DUAL” button
Indicator ON: Separate temperature settings
for driver and passenger.
Indicator OFF: Synchronize temperature
settings for driver and passenger.
Temperature (front passenger side)
Micro dust and pollen filter ON/OFF
Rear defogger
Fan speed
Climate control OFF
Automatic climate control ON
Adjust the temperature setting, and airflow
vents and fan will adjust automatically.

Manual Air Conditioning
OVERVIEW
FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Airflow vent selector
In “
” or “
” mode, use fresh air (“
”
indicator “OFF”) to reduce window fogging.
Fan speed
Temperature
Air Conditioning ON/OFF
Use for quick cooling. MAX A/C changes air
intake to recirculate. It is not possible to
change intake to fresh, or to turn A/C OFF in
this mode.
Rear defogger
Fresh or recirculated cabin air

Clock
Automatic
Air Conditioning system

Manual
Air Conditioning system

Bottle holders
Front doors

Rear doors

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

H- Hour set
M- Minute set
:00- Round off minutes

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Audio
Type 1
Push to turn
ON/OFF

Preset buttons - functions in other
modes indicated above number.
Push to
adjust
tone &
balance

Eject CD
Seek
station/
CD track
select
Station/CD
track scan

Mode

View CD text

Push to
skip
up/down
folder

Type 2 additional functions

Load CD(s)
AM/Satellite
radio
View genre/Push to
skip up/down folder
Type 2 (with JBL speakers)

CD PLAYER
To scan tracks on a disc Push “SCAN.” Push again to
hold selection.
CD Changer (Type 2)
-To load one disc Push “LOAD” and insert one disc.
-To load multiple discs Push and hold “LOAD” until
you hear a beep. Insert one disc. Wait until the
green indicator illuminates and shutter opens to
insert next disc.
To select a file (MP3/WMA only) Turn “TUNE.FILE.”
To select a folder (MP3/WMA only) Push either side
of “FOLDER” or “TYPE/FOLDER.”
18

RADIO
OVERVIEW

To preset stations Tune in the desired station and
hold down a preset button (1-6) until you hear a
beep. Push desired preset button (1-6) to select.
To scan stations Push “SCAN.” Push and hold to scan
preset stations. Push again to hold selection.

Steering wheel controls (if equipped)

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

“ +”
Volume control
“MODE”
Push to turn audio ON and select an audio mode.
Push and hold to turn the audio OFF.
“
”
-In radio mode Push to select a preset station;
push and hold to seek the next strong station.
-In CD mode Push to skip up or down to next/
previous track.

AUX audio jack

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

By inserting a mini plug into the AUX audio jack, you
can listen to music from a portable audio device
through the vehicle’s speaker system.

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Rear seat entertainment system
(if equipped)

Front audio system
DVD player
DVD screen
Remote control
A/V input adapter
115V AC Power outlet
115V AC Power outlet ON/OFF switch

Moonroof (if equipped)
Sliding operation

Open
Recommended
driving position
to minimize
wind noise

Tilting operation

Tilt

NOTE: If battery is disconnected, the moonroof
needs to be reinitialized. Refer to the Owner’s
Manual for more details.
20

Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)*
(if equipped)
OVERVIEW

Bluetooth® technology allows dialing or receipt of
calls without taking hands from the steering wheel
or using a cable to connect the telephone and the
system.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.

Door locks
Lock

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Unlock

Auto LSD (Limited Slip Differential)
(2WD models)

NOTE: Will ONLY work for 2-wheel drive models.
Should ONLY be used when wheel spinning
occurs on slippery or unpaved surfaces.
Refer to the Owner‘s Manual for more details on
this system before attempting to use it.
21

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Push the “AUTO LSD” switch when the vehicle is
stopped. To deactivate, push the switch again.

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Power outlets
12V DC
Inside center console

Instrument panel

Luggage Compartment

NOTE: Designed for car accessories. Engine switch
must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position to be used.

115V AC (if equipped)
ON/OFF switch
Push

Rear console

NOTE: Engine switch must be in the “ON” position
to be used.

Light control-Instrument panel

+
Brightness
control

With the dial turned fully up, instrument panel lights
will not dim when the headlights are turned ON.
22

Cruise control
Turning system ON/OFF
OVERVIEW

System ON/OFF

Functions
Cancel1

Resume2/Increase speed

Set/Decrease speed

The set speed may also be cancelled by depressing
the brake pedal.
2 The set speed may be resumed once vehicle speed
exceeds 25 mph.

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.

Cup holders
Front

Rear
Second row

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Third row side trim
(if equipped)

SAFETY AND
EMERGENCY FEATURES
Doors-Child safety locks
Rear door

Moving the lever to “LOCK” will allow the door to
be opened only from the outside.

Seat belts
Take up
slack
Too high

Keep as low on
hips as possible

If belt is fully extended, then retracted even
slightly, it cannot be re-extended beyond that point,
unless fully retracted again. This feature is used to
help hold child restraint systems securely.
To find more information about seat belts, and how
to install a child restraint system, refer to the
Owner’s Manual.

Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor
Push up or
squeeze lock
release to lower

Tire Pressure Warning System
The system is designed to provide a warning when
tire pressure of any one of the tires (including the
spare) is critically low.
Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.
24

Spare tire & tools
Tool location
OVERVIEW

Luggage compartment
Inside right side box

Luggage compartment
Inside left side box

Jack

Tool bag

Removing the spare tire
(1)

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

(2)

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for tire changing and
jack positioning procedures.
* If equipped

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

(1) To remove the spare tire cover,* open the back
door. Unhook the latch on the bottom of the
cover. After closing the back door, remove the
cover.
(2) To remove the spare tire, turn the wheel nuts
counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench
and remove.

Customer Experience Center
1-800-331-4331

MN 00505-QRG08-RAV4
Printed in the USA 8/07

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Foreword
Welcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering and
quality construction of each vehicle we build.
This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants
follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. For
important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.
When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete
satisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number:
D When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:
U.S. OWNERS:
Toyota Customer Experience Center
Toll−free:1−800−331−4331
D Hawaii:
Servco Automotive Customer Services
Toll−free:1−888−272−5515
CANADIAN OWNERS:
D When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:
Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre
Toll−free:1−888−TOYOTA−8 or 1−888−869−6828
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy of
continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may
find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
Please access our websites for further information.
D The U.S. mainland
www.toyota.com
D Hawaii
www.toyotahawaii.com
D Canada
www.toyota.ca

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

U −1
Quick index
D If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on . . . . . . . . 129
D If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
D If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
D If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
D If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
D If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
D Tips for driving during break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
D How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
D General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
D Complete index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO TAG

Gas station information
Fuel type:
UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or
higher
See page 309 for detailed information.
Fuel tank capacity:
60 L (15.9 gal., 13.2 Imp. gal.)
Engine oil:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.
See page 405 for detailed information.
Tire information: See pages 408 through 416.
Tire inflation pressure: See page 433.

Publication No. OM42726U
Part No. 01999-42726
Printed in Japan 01−0802−00 I

(

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Important information about this manual
Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Safety symbol

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle damage warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to
avoid possible injury or damage.
The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are
used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION
This is a
injury to
informed
order to
others.

warning against anything which may cause
people if the warning is ignored. You are
about what you must or must not do in
reduce the risk of injury to yourself and
When you see the safety symbol
shown above, it means: “Do not...”;
“Do not do this”; or “Do not let this
happen”.

NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning
is ignored. You are informed about what you must or
must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of
damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systems

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help
reduce the possibility of death or serious injury in the
event of a collision. None of these systems, either individually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in the
event of collision. However, the more you know about
these systems and how to use them properly, the greater
your chances become of surviving an accident without
death or serious injury.

Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time to
read Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In
terms of helping you understand how you can receive the
maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems this
vehicle provides, Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual is
the most important Section for you and your family to
read.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of
the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear
seat belts properly at all times. Children should always be
secured in child restraint systems that are appropriate for
their age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with,
and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutes
for them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducing
the risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact of
the head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.

Section 1−3 describes the function and operation concerning seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint systems of this vehicle and some potential hazards you
should be aware of. These systems work together along
with the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provide
occupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect of
each system is enhanced when it is used properly and
together with other systems. No single occupant restraint
system can, by itself, provide you or your family with the
equal level of restraint which these systems can provide
when used together. That is why it is important for you and
your family to understand the purpose and proper use of
each of these systems and how they relate to each other.

iii

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Event data recorder

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with
tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS airbags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources
of death or serious injury if an occupant is too close to an
airbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body has
been placed between the occupant and the airbag at the
time of deployment. This is just one example of how the
instructions in Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual will help
ensure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, and
increase the safety they can provide to you and your family in the event of an accident.

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in
driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a
system to record data in a crash or a near car crash
event. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a
crash or a near car crash event, this device may record
some or all of the following information:

Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section
1−3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your time
of ownership of this vehicle.

D Engine speed
D Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
D Vehicle speed
D To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
D Position of the transmission selector lever

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

D Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seat
belts or not

The information above is intended to be used for the
purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike
general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound
data such as conversation between passengers.

D Driver’s seat position
D Front passenger’s occupant classification

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a
third party except when:

D SRS airbag deployment data
D SRS airbag system diagnostic data

D An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained
D Officially requested by the police or other authorities
D Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit
D Ordered by the court
However, if necessary Toyota will:
D Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety
performance
D Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner,
and only when it is deemed necessary
D Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non−Toyota organization for
research purposes

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Important health and safety
information about your Toyota

New vehicle warranty
Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limited
warranties:

CAUTION

D New vehicle warranty
D Emission control systems warranty

D WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

D Others

ents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. In addition,
oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as
well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s
Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement”.

Your responsibility for
maintenance

D Battery

posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by washing
thoroughly with soap and water.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the specified maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details of
these maintenance requirements. Also included in Section
6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Accessories, spare parts and
modification of your Toyota

Spark ignition system of your
Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessories
for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.
You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or
replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or
adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference−Causing Equipment
Standard.

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuine
Toyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyota
products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the
modification may not be covered under warranty.

vii

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Installation of a mobile
two−way radio system

D Tire pressure warning system
D Cruise control system
D Anti−lock brake system
D Electronic throttle control system

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system in
your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as follows, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation.

Tires and loading on your
Toyota

D Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system

Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and the
excess load may result in the deterioration of
steering ability and braking ability, leading to an
accident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodically and be sure to keep the load limits given in
this Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflation
pressure and load limits, see pages 335 and 408.

D SRS airbag system
D Seat belt pretensioner system
D Active torque control 4WD system
D Traction control system
D “AUTO LSD” system
D Enhanced vehicle stability control system
D Downhill assist control system
D Hill−start assist control system

viii

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Scrapping of your Toyota

On−pavement and off−road
driving tips

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your
Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is
scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as they
are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to
have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by the qualified service
shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of your
vehicle.

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuver
differently from an ordinary passenger car because it is
designed for off−road use also. In addition, this vehicle
has a higher ground clearance and center of gravity than
that of an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design
feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to
rollover. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result
in loss of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing
death or serious injury. Be sure to read “Utility vehicle
precautions” on page 308 in Section 2 and “Off−road
driving precautions” on page 345 in Section 3.

Leak detection pump
This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. This
check is done approximately five hours after the engine is
turned off. So you may hear sound coming from under the
floor around the driver’s seat for several minutes. It does
not indicate a malfunction.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply,
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate.
These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

You should know as much about the quality and
importance of proper maintenance of your new
vehicle as the people who built it.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual
tells you how to maintain your vehicle and
enables you to correctly perform your own
maintenance.
The best way to keep your new vehicle in top
running order is to maintain it properly from
the moment you drive it off the showroom
floor.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is
packed with literally everything you need to
know to perform your own maintenance in
virtually every area of your new vehicle.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

Maintenance procedures for the engine,
chassis, body, electrical system, and more,
are clearly explained and illustrated.
Periodic maintenance and tune−up
Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to prevent
small problems from growing into larger ones later on.
The repair manual outlines exactly what maintenance
is required and clearly explains how to do the work
yourself step−by−step.
Areas covered include such things as spark plug replacement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil
and filter replacement.

Where to obtain the
Repair Manual
The repair manual for RAV4 may be purchased
from any Toyota dealer or the Material Distribution Center. To purchase the repair manual, please
contact your Toyota dealer or call the Material
Distribution Center toll−free at 1−800−622−2033.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU PLEASE BUCKLE UP
Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.
Toyota belts are:

D Comfortable
D Easy to use
D Convenient
We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : lime
Create Date                     : 2013:05:08 14:39:28-04:00
Modify Date                     : 2013:05:08 14:39:28-04:00
Title                           : 
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Metadata Date                   : 2013:05:08 14:39:28-04:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe Acrobat Pro 10.0.0
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : lime
Document ID                     : uuid:0e8c31b8-ae6b-4e5a-9420-3f4f59139615
Instance ID                     : uuid:d38c669b-7d67-4ffa-bff5-a426a1292d28
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat Pro 10.0.0
Page Count                      : 484

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Toyota 2008 Rav4 Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation